Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 260 - Contract - CB Thompson Co - Pump Station & Reservoir - 08_30_1979RESOLUTION #260 - 8/30/79 RRSOT.TTTTnN BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock a Contract between the City of Lubbock and C.B. Thompson Construction Co., on Bid No. 5433, for the construction of a Pump Station and Reservoir, attached herewith which shall be spread upon the minutes of the Council and as spread upon the minutes of this Council shall constitute and be a part of this Resolution as if fully copied herein in detail. Passed by the City Council this 30th day of August ,1979. ,f �' '1W WJIK I&W�ST, MAYOR ATTEST: Evelyn Gaf ga, City S c et -Treasurer APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: Guy W916on, Utilities Engineer APPROVED AS TO FORM: J. Wor Fullingim, Assistant City Attorney CONTRACT STATE OF TEXAS ) ) COUNTY OF LUBBOCK ) THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this jn±hday ofA L/(aU 7T A. D. 19_2�, by and between The City of Lubbock, Texas of the County of Lubbock and State of Texas, acting through Dirk West, Mayor thereunto duly authorized so to do, .Party of the First Part, hereinafter termed Owner, and C. B. THOMPSON CONSTRUCTION CO. of the City of Lubbock , County of Lubbock and State of Texas Party of the Second Part, here- i inafter termed Contractor. WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agree- ments hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the Party of the First Part (Owner), and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith, the said Party of the Second Part (Contractor) hereby agrees with said Party of the First Part (Owner) to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: construction of Pump Station Number Ten and Reservoir and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in i the General Conditions of the Agreement; and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all the materials, supplies, machinery, equip- ment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction, in accordance with D-1 the conditions and prices stated in the Proposal attached hereto, and in accordance with all the General Conditions of the Agreement, and in ac- cordance with the Plans, which includes all maps, plats,'blue prints and other drawings and printed or written explanatory matter thereof, and the Specifications therefor, as prepared by Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc., Consulting Engineers, Lubbock, Texas, herein entitled the Engineer, each of which has been identified by the endorsement of the Contractor and the Engineer thereon, together with the Contractor's written Proposal, the General Conditions of the Agreement, and the Construction Bond hereto attached; all of which are made a part hereof and collectively evidence and constitute the entire contract. The Contractor hereby agrees to commence work within ten (10) days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him, and to complete the project within 270 consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications. The Contractor agrees that time is of the essence on this contract and that for each day of delay beyond the time herein agreed upon for the completion of the work herein specified and contracted for (after due allowance for such extension of time as is provided for under Extension of Time hereinabove), the Owner may withhold permanently from the Con- tractor's total compensation, the sum of Five Hundred and No/100 Dollars ($500.00) as stipulated liquidated damages for such delay. The Owner agrees to pay the Contractor in current funds for the per- formance of the contract in accordance with the Proposal submitted there- for, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the General Con- ditions of the Agreement, and to make payments on account thereof as pro- vided therein. IT WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this Agreement in the year and day first above written. ATTEST: Party of the First Part (Owner) City of Lubbock, Texas - BY. k , V1Jt r- -`• Party of the Second Part (Contractor) ATTE T: C. B. Thompson Con r ction Co. a t�X� o�,rno o�J By. ft Y D-2 CHANGE ORDER NUMBER ONE Pump Station No. 10 and Reservoir City of Lubbock, Texas TO: C.B. Thompson Construction Co. P . 0. Box 6456 Lubbock, Texas 79413 General description of work included in contract: Construction of ten million gallon reservoir, pump station, piping and other related items. Original amount of contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . $1,793,000 Change Order Number One . . . . . . . . . . . . (Add) 5,752 Adjusted Contract Amount . . . . . . . . $1,798,752 Adjustment in Construction Time . . . . . . None WHEREAS, it is desirable to change the amount of the contract for this project. THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSETH: In consideration of the mutual advantage gained, the Owner and the Contractor agree to the changes indicated below and further agree that the amount of the contract shall be adjusted by the amount shown above: Item No. Description Cost 1. Provide additional conduit in post - tensioned topping slab on reservoir as shown on attached Figure 1. $1,122.00 2. Addition of load bearing steel - masonry lintel plate above plumbing chase as shown on accompanying Figure 2. 66.00 3. Addition of grade adjusting bends on 36-inch and 18-inch pipelines between pump station and 82nd Street to match elevations of line in 82nd Street. 3,361.00 4. Addition of PVC conduit as requested by phone company for control circuits. Approximate routing of PVC conduit is shown on accompanying Figure 3; final routing will be determined in field by Engineer. 1,203.00 TOTAL $5,752.00 CHANGE ORDER NO. 1 Page 1 of.2 n IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Owner and the Contractor have hereto set their hands this the 10th day of January Wj&_ 1980 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Recommended: PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC., Consulting Engineers By �' �- f�---y Pro j . Engineer / 2 /2 p , 1979 Approved: C. B. THOMPSON CONSTRUCTION COMPANY, Contractor By 1979 Approved: CITY OF LUBBOCK, TEXAS, Owner _ By Mayor 1/10/ J&7& 1980... 'West Attest: City SdOcretary CHANGE ORDER NO. 1 Page 2 of 2 RESOLUTION #439 - 3/13/80 RESOLUTION #260 - 8/30/80 CHANCE ORDER NUMBER TWO Pump Station No. 10 and Reservoir City of Lubbock, Texas TO: C. B. Thompson Construction Co. P. 0. Box 6456 Lubbock, Texas 79413 General description of work included in contract: Construction of ten million gallon reservoir, pump station, piping and other related items. Original Amount of Contract . . . . . . . . . . $1,793,000 Change Order Number One . . . . . . . . . . . (Add) 5,752 Change Order Number Two . . . . . . . . . . . (Add) 3,351 Adjusted Contract Amount . . . . . . . $1,802,103 Adjustment in Construction Time . . . . . None WHEREAS, it is desirable to change the amount of the contract for this project. THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSETH: In consideration of the mutual advantage gained, the Owner and the Contractor agree to the changes indicated below and further agree that the amount of the contract shall be adjusted by the amount shown above: Item No. Description 1. Provide a non -freeze hose bib, piping and insulation as shown on attached Figure 1. 2. Addition of a report back system be- tween Pump Station Number 10 and Dis- patcher's Office for the status of the valves and pump motors TOTAL CHANGE ORDER NO. 2 Page 1 of 2 Cost $ 491 2,860 $ 3, 351 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Owner and the Contractor have hereto set their hands this the 13th day of March 1980. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Recommended: PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC., Consulting Engineers ByS4- 2 , Proj . Engineer, 21/4 1980 Approved: C. B. THOMPSON CONSTRUCTION COMPANY, Contractor By aG•w , QA,G:a . Z + Z I " SOP 1980 Approved: CITY OF LUBBOCK, TEXAS, Owner BY CHANGE ORDER NO. 2 Page 2 of 2 1980 CITY OF LUBBOCK, TEXAS WATERWORKS IMPROVEMENTS NON -FREEZE HOSE BIB February, 1980 Change Order No. 2 FIGURE RESOLUTION #260 - 8/30/79 CHANGE ORDER NUMBER THREE Pump Station No. 10 and Reservoir City of Lubbock, Texas TO: C. B. Thompson Construction Co. P. 0. Box 6456 Lubbock, Texas 79413 General description of work included in contract: Construction of ten million gallon reservoir, pump station, piping and other related items. Original Amount of Contract . . . . . . . . . . $1,793,000 Change Order Number One . . . . . . . . (Add) 5,752 Change Order Number Two . (Add) 3,351 Change Order Number.Three . . . . . . . . . . . - 0 Adjusted Contract Amount . . . . . . $1,802,103 Adjustment in Construction Time . . . None WHEREAS, it.is desirable to provide support to certain of the precast double tees used in the reservoir roof. THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSETH: In consideration of the mutual advantage gained, the Owner and the Contractor agree to the construction of the'con- crete beams and columns as detailed by Charles F. Terry, Inc., Consulting Engineers, on attached sheets one through four dated June 26, 1980, and further agree that the amount of the contract shall not be changed. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Owner and the Contractor have hereto set their hands this the 24th day of July /. , 1980. CHANGE ORDER NO. 3 Page 1 of 2 IL I A , � Recommended: PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC., Consulting Engineers By �� /•.,..r, Pro_j . Engineer,+LLli_ , 1980 Approved: C. B. THOMPSON CONSTRUCTION COMPANY, Contractor 1980 Approved: CITY OF LUBBOCK, TEXAS, Owner By Mayor �`�fl 1980 Aa 4ttist: City ecreta CHANGE ORDER NO. 3 Page 2 of 2 �_ si, 0 .0 20_ Job ���T�-.2 .P�SE.f'✓O/�P. LvB�or.C, 4,f Subject ✓T �: �/��0� Tf ey .,W7, Date,, Job No Sheet / of r 5 O of 9 CHARLES F. TERRY.1 NC. Consulting Engineers !' 3200 Maple Avenue Dallas.Te xas 75201 214/651 9801 '! !%1 �2 ToP�N<j a 7, Z+. � s�� Ted,✓ TvPi�/Gj - r -ir-- �� \ r 2 .3 oov6zE T�s ij- 8E,gAf .3 °b W57E-.e •PL'tE.F't�G/C , fr!/Bdd�� . 7F�t'ifJ Subject ��.��>A•s��NT .S'�/.o.�O,e TJ BWT� lbate,,4X Job No Sheet2 0! CHARLES F. TERRY. INC. Consulting Engineers 3200 Maple Avenue Dailas,Te xas 75201 214/651 9801 iVV+ 1086 LS9/till anuan sa de sepeQ b I W OOZE sjaaw6u3 6uiunsuoo 'ON I'MHjlA SEhH3 H3 jo S' laa4S oNgor 4P9L V.a,, 1L/,ce f'�,r�� a,�o�pn�•a'ioi'v�13�Y a'�lb/1il qof oBGz'90 '.l�Z oN ��a�d Z 1��a7 0�' ne•'Q% .�ir�% 71 Z /�/��7 . •s31 IV a4Za=U AVk�7t? �yiv�a�ds �' fyb'�8 1,la" ,:� jai/z ////-z � � w rd c (7,V d 6� -Ti -- 1 n� ��-� �' •` �f� -7i -Z I. �/� i ��TJ �� P-6 h 1 � I�.O-h► �7YA) , t7Y� 246 SSE P1--44 L1201 vtil'41 e" T.S:) Job Subject�p�����E�T 6y v7- - DateO6 2 -4 Job No Sheet.,/ of CH ARLES F. TERRY, INC. Consulting Engineers 3200 Maple Avenue Dallas. Texas 75201 214/651 9801 T TIED TO RESOLUTION #260 - 8/30/79 CONTRACT COPY OWNER Contract Documents for CITY OF LUBBOCK, TEXAS PUMP STATION NO. 10 AND RESERVOIR JULY 1979 Prepared By PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC. PSC Engineers Arohiteots Planners Lubbock El Paso Texas StP 6 1971 Ply SECRETARY II !p- u 1 n 0 0 .0 WA-. C4„CEN0.L1iCO0O k1 4�>1 • - L OZMAw am .Lb. xNec'telun C V4'N A_ . rT E ' iaL0.O a + MOT N 1RJe W.A1,CN. N C V .. A V • AE I N M5 yy .a�� oE 5 L e'e9 2 rL A IM . IeM . M A • M a rO . e) 95 PLAN VIEW OCAL� a' 11hLAL ooJOLE TLL 00AMNO M WA0600 JO.MT. tdC E%PANOIOA e"MN9ioN JOINT OLTAiLD . 9NEeT .o , JOINT iYAUL OOJDLE iGE DEARINO M MTCRwR OCAM Dee oeTA-Le,eMeei 10 AeOMVOA ovowww oft, ELEVMION —Kee �4'lgMfE COWMr,S to"�• M DOTfoh " uwLL. 9 n 0?� 0A°ii,S J�Gn L.^., f.AG.^ fpGo G LJ � a. SJ 4 2 rIoTC S - I. f0n eOAri } CCLJMN 9CNLOJLe, Q 9ee DMeET1 Fw"e�5.0-eo -'O-Po 5.AD TO De A -1,M11'IJr! OP 4"Inc,to T,¢c t io ee Go•,�RJc1eO TO TMGAtiESS_9 PeOuIneo to mov oe SLOM5 S.+oLjf•. 10 - 'L. FOR FLOOR 4 ROOi JO�r�LNO LA'foufO, Dee 5+eeT a AI,;)I,)a"Dur'I NO. 1 AJGJ3; '1 , Iq'i9 wwrre.uli.er a Lueeaa •.CALL: /IU•I'•O• eee OetA�L9• ECT ..aaa CITY OF LUBBOCK, TEXAS SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS PUMP STATION NO. 10 AND RESERVOIR ADDENDUM NO. 2 August 10, 1979 Attention of all bidders is directed to the following modifications to the referenced Plans and Specifications. SPECIFICATIONS 1. Page SP-9, Paragraph 28, Wage Rates The following paragraphs shall be inserted in this Paragraph: "The Contractor shall submit weekly a copy of all payrolls to the City of.Lubbock; the payrolls shall be submitted through the Engineer. The payroll copy shall be accompanied by a statement signed by the employer or his agent indicating that the payrolls are correct and complete, that the classifications set forth for each laborer or mechanic conform with the work performed, and that the wage rates conform to the project specifications and to the Wage and Hour Laws of the State of Texas. The wage rates included in these specifications in - elude two schedules, one being for Heavy and Highway Construction and Paving and Utilities Incidental to General Building Construction, and one being for Building Construction. The Building Construction schedule shall be applied to construction of the pump station building, excluding construction of the pump pit, and the Heavy and Highway Construction and Paving and Utilities Incidental to General Build- ing Construction may be applied to all other work on the project, including construction of the pump pit." ADDENDUM NO. 2 Page 1 of 2 This Addendum becomes a part of and shall be attached to the above - referenced Plans and Specifications. This Addendum shall be acknowledged by the Bidder and attached to the Proposal submitted. PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC. By. I Ames R. Glaser, P.E. ACKNOWLEDGED: C. B. Thompson Construction Company By ADDENDUM NO. 2 Page 2 Of 2 CITY OF LUBBOCK, TEXAS SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS PUMP STATION NO. 10 AND RESERVOIR ADDENDUM NO. 1 August 7, 1979 Attention of all bidders is directed to the following modifications to the referenced Plans and Specifications. PRE -BID MEETING A pre -bid meeting is scheduled at City of Lubbock Pump Station Number Three at 2:00 P.M., Tuesday, August 14, 1979. Pump Station Number Three is located on Third Street just west of University Avenue. The pre -bid meeting is intended to provide bidders an opportunity to examine equipment that is to be moved from Pump Station Number Three to the pump station being constructed as part of this project. SPECIFICATIONS 1. Page 2-19, Paragraph 15-2, Testing The second sentence of the first paragraph of this Paragraph shall be deleted and the following shall be inserted in its place: "If any structure loses water at a rate exceeding 0.13 gallons per square foot of wetted concrete surface in 48 hours, the leaks shall be found and repaired." 2. Page 2-20, Paragraph 15-3, Disinfection The second sentence of the first paragraph of this Paragraph will be deleted and the following shall be inserted in its place: "Disinfection shall be accomplished in accordance with the requirements of either the first or second method described in AWWA D 102-62T." 3. Page 6-3, Paragraph 3-1, Butterfly Valves The following information shall be added at the end of this Paragraph: ADDENDUM NO. 1 Page 1 of 7 "Information regarding the butterfly valves to be included in this project is provided below. The valves shall be Class A or Class B as required to meet the operating torque criteria in current A14WA C 504. " Pressure Class of Maximum Flowrate Butterfly Valve(s) Through Valve Valve Description psi Million Gallons Per Day 18-inch in Valve 150 18 Manhole - Two Valves 36-inch in Valve 150 40 Manhole 24-inch on Pump 25 20 Suction Lines in Pump Station Building - Four Valves 24-inch on Pump Dis- 150 20 charge Lines in Pump Station Building - ao Valves 24-inch Buried Valves 150 20 Downstream from Meters on Pump Discharge Lines - Two Valves 36-inch Buried Valve on 150 25 Station Discharge Line 36-inch Buried Valve on 150 25 Pump Discharge Header - with Blind Flange on End 4. Page 6-8, Paragraph 4-6.1, General The following information shall be added at the end of this Paragraph: "One-half inch of expansion joint material shall be placed around all pipes passing through concrete walls and concrete floors of all structures except the reservoir and the chlorination manhole. Exposed joints where pipe passes through concrete walls or floors shall be caulked to provide a smooth and neat joint." ADDENDUM NO. 1 Page 2 of 7 5. Page 10-28, Paragraph 10-4 Door Identifications (New Paragraph) The following information shall be added as Paragraph 10-4 of the specifications. The Paragraph shall be titled "Door Identifications": "Door identifications shall be provided on the door to the chlorine room and the rest room. The door identifications shall be plates cut from laminated plastic with a brown surface cut through to a white core. The identification on the chlorine room shall read CHLORINE ROOM, and the identification on the rest room shall read REST ROOM. Letters shall be approximately 5/8-inch high." 6. Page 11-10, Paragraph 13-3, Sewage Ejector PLANS The second paragraph of this Paragraph shall be deleted and the following shall be inserted in its place: "Each pump shall be rated to pass 1/2-inch diameter solids." 7. Page 12-7, Paragraph 2-3, Installation of Underground Steel Conduit This Paragraph is to be deleted from the Specifications and the following shall be inserted in its place: "All steel conduit in earth shall be PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit and shall. be in- stalled in accordance with manufacturer's instruc- tions." 1. SHEET 2 The location of the Valve Manhole and the Chlorination Manhole with re- spect to the east property line is to be changed by 6.5 feet. The dist- ance from.the east property line to the west edge of the Valve Manhole shall be changed from 80.83 feet to 74.33 feet, and the distance from the east property line to the west edge of the Chlorination Man- hole shall be changed from 78.17 feet to 71.67 feet. 2. SHEET 3 Reservoir roof elevations are shown on this sheet of the drawings. Elevations shown on the reservoir are to be changed as indicated below, and the elevations shall be the elevation of the top of wall rather than the top of the post -tensioned topping slab. ADDENDUM NO. 1 Page 3 of 7 Elevation on Revised Location Drawings Elevation (a) Southeast corner reservoir 37.35 37.02 (b) 73.5 feet from Southeast corner of reservoir 37.72 37.39 (c) Southwest corner reservoir 37.11 36.78 (d) Northwest corner reservoir 37.11 36.78 (e) 73.5 feet from Northeast corner reservoir 37.72 37.39 (f) Northeast corner reservoir 37.35 37.02 I� 3. SHEET 4 The changes and additions listed below shall be made on this sheet of the drawings: (a) The dimension from the 36-inch discharge line from the reservoir to the west edge of the Valve Manhole is shown as 4 feet. This dimen- sion shall be changed to 10.5 feet. (b) The note reading "36-inch Butterfly Valve and Box -Plug End of Valve" shall be changed to read "36-inch Flanged End Butterfly Valve and Box -Blind Flange End of Valve". (c) The note reading "24-inch Butterfly Valves and Box" shall be changed to read "24-inch Flanged End Butterfly Valves and Box". (d) The tee and cross on the buried 36-inch line between the Pump Station and Valve Manhole shall be flanged fittings. (e) A note reading "See Sheet 24 for Site Utility Piping" shall be added to the drawing. 4. SHEET 5 Sheet 5 of the drawings shall be deleted and the accompanying Sheet 5 shall be inserted in its place. ADDENDUM NO. 1 Page 4 of 7 5. SHEET 6 The note below shall be added to the notes on this sheet of the drawings: "The reservoir roof shall be designed to support a live load of 30 pounds per square foot." 6. SHEETS 7,8,9,10,11 The post -tensioned topping slab to be constructed on top of the pre- cast double tee beams shall have a minimum thickness of 4-inches and shall be constructed to the thicknesses required to provide the finished slopes shown for the topping slab. All notes on the referenced sheets of drawings indicating a 4-inch thick post -tensioned topping slab shall be changed to indicate 4-inch minimum thickness for the post -tensioned topping slab. 7. SHEET 9 Sections 929 and 939 indicate that the reservoir vent boxes and the eservoir an c lorination manhole transmitter covers are to be fabricated of 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal. The vent boxes and transmitter shall be fabricated of 10 gauge sheet metal, and the notes on the sections shall be changed to indicate 10 gauge galvanized sheet metal. Additionally, a 1-1/2 inch by 1-1/2 inch by 3/16-inch angle shall be provided across the middle of each vent opening along the long dimension of the opening. The angle shall be securely welded in place. 8. SHEET 11 Section 111 indicates that the top of the post -tensioned topping slab 11 be at elevation 37.11. The note indicating this elevation shall be deleted from the drawing. 9. SHEET 14 Section 041pi indicates that the centerline of the 36-inch con- crete cylinpe leaving the Chlorination Manhole shall be at ele- vation 31.00 and that it shall be 4 feet 1/2-inch from the manhole floor. The elevation of the 36-inch concrete cylinder pipe leaving the manhole shall be changed so that it shall be located at elevation 29.25 and shall be 2 feet 3-1/2 inches above the manhole floor. 10. SHEET 16 The height of the picket fence is to be changed from six feet to eight feet. The changes listed below shall be made on this sheet of the drawings. ADDENDUM NO. 1 Page 5 of 7 (a) On the "Typical Fence Post Detail," the note indicating "6'0" Cedar Pickets" shall be changed to indicate "8'0" Cedar Pickets," and the 5' 1-1/2" dimension from bottom to top girt shall be changed to 7' 1-1/2". (b) On the "Typical Gate Elevations," the note in- dicating "6'0" Cedar Pickets" shall be changed to "8'0" Cedar Pickets," and the 2'8" and 2'0" dimen- sions between Jambs shall be changed to,respectively, 3'8" and 3'0". (c) One the "Gate Jamb Detail," the note in- dicating "6'0" Cedar Pickets" shall be changed to indicate "8'0" Cedar Pickets". (d) On the "Brick Column Detail," notes in- dicating "6'0" Cedar Pickets" shall be changed to indicate "8'0" Cedar Pickets," the distance from ground to top of the brick column shall be changed from 7'0" to 91011, and the 2'3" and 2'8" dimensions between girts shall be changed to, respectively 3'3" and 3'8". 11. SHEET 23 I Trusses T-1, T-2, and T-3 as detailed on this sheet shall include 3/16-inch trim plate as detailed on accompanying drawing. • 12. SHEET 24 On the "Layout -Transformer Pad Area", the note indicating 6'0" cedar fence shall be changed to indicate 8'0" cedar fence. On the "Utility Site Plan", a portion of the water line to the pump station building is shown as 1/2-inch. The drawing shall be changed to indicate that the 1/2-inch section of line shall be 1-inch. 13. SHEET 25 On the "Sump Pump Detail", the sump pump basin is shown as "Cast Iron Basin By Mech Cont'r." This note shall be changed to read "Fiberglass Basin By Mach Cont'r." On the "Floor Plan -Mechanical and Plumbing", the note indicating 1/2-inch water line shall be changed to indicate 1-inch water line. ADDENDUM NO. 1 Page 6 of 7 This sheet of the drawings indicates 'that the vent risers on the east side of the building are to run within the building in the pump pit and thence to the roof within the masonry walls. The vent riser lo- cations on the east side of the building shall be changed so that they are routed outside the pump pit walls, thence through beam at top of concrete pit walls into masonry walls and to roof. This Addendum becomes a part of and shall be attached to the above -referenced Plans and Specifications. This Addendum shall be acknowledged by the Bidder and attached to the Proposal submitted. PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC Ja es R. Glaser, P.E. ACKNOWLEDGED: C. B. Thompson Construction Company ADDENDUM NO. 1 Page 7 of 7 C,�ror- Lo -fir W GI7Y of Lu�lb .K , Te'XAS l-.lA?��Z �.1oRKg 'I h'I PRa/�r-�E�T6 Specifications and Contract Documents for CITY OF LUBBOCK, TEXAS PUMP STATION NO. 10 AND RESERVOIR JULY 1979 ' Prepared By PSC PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC. Engineers Architects Planners ' Lubbock E1 Paso Texas 1 I 1 1 ptE OF••rF+ * . , N•� !!!�MGLASER 31737. q Cry, ►SS/Auer• fG�.: Specifications and Contract Documents for CITY OF LUBBOCK, TEXAS PUMP STATION NO. 10 AND RESERVOIR JULY 1979 Prepared By PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC. PSC Engineers Architects Planners Lubbock E1 Paso Texas OF ..�R.-GLASER 31737' , f PiST�P�� rs/Anf G_ ENEAAL NOTE 1 THIO PRo�Ecr /NCLUOC9 FUICN/3N/N6//N37ALL/N$ NGTf PCNCC PO9r _4aev65. PENCE UWBTQOCt/bV� FWCE R73r /NSrAL[UT/OV ARC NOT INCLU040 /N TN/ P,ta/EGT. 2. 7H/3 AAaerr/NCLuze5 CONou/r3, CM[e GVC[o3U4E9/ LIdAIT POLE PCD/3TAt.5 A$ 30OWN. LI6HT PbLeS f COVOU6TiX9 F K CONCT Ll&4rAl& ARE Nor /NCLUOW /A/ 774/3 P,POJer r �� �.et Q• ,a.01 I— LECrENO DGOCni�fiOre NC W GATE FCHCG F9'HLe: AoeT UHLC56 b.buN GTHCfM1N'5C HET "T 5L.CCVC w*HT POLE CA15,Tr CnCL00tlf,C o ee", COLLP1H HO<UToq OO r¢' 0.0.00.40.'T r I aol_ol Q aol•ol m__/ `/ •4 0AA .8x Ibt 60,v C iI I�OA, cast.- A ca.uut ' as' c,MnMR caHDy,f /te.u�a+CO s erro I'n,H. CLCM.HLC � ECMI �RNCCH CnG.05uIt COLJHH IOA JONT 4 - I'O DID.'2L6 GOf i onlG.On C4rl 12' ✓W ro.�C CtTlno .o'B LOCAfaM .a aror.H a. LM'IDJt 9 I �1 eaCTIOH 'A -A cane C.c. `Id —ft Po-ro.r, I' �� connA xcn a ree �CE ��n• F weT . 6 6 SIGHT POLE _ OETAIL,-`I G.E.oGD a..Lwln +. 40! TCwD.Q+CD TDM,Ia WL �,5� � s' Ibbf +lH9oHlD TbM.+a O✓D T .'ORG A0.'O,1lvC /L - 'i 24' V.U" r,.y taut ren IUA �% pl m MELD' GJr 4"CNC ftiROOH. A� x w ri' IDI. .rreA rClO f OCM eAecTm °} eRaRsLs�a+aer d•%•Ita.WOrA l C ' flyow 9 1 I,IC a..ecvG xM r.CT war ro ee e' ..ax G/O,r M pfy-I w MIUAoeo Vo. DA. C."a' w /ICM- DW'I -T +xMxaeO da,Wx .,N. 4TMID 44. :lT- to ✓.ro" t 5 WeA ro JKq,T TM a we r Ia111LICII` H_ Q ,x>.L,.aunon. r1ET POJT $ aE NGE °>LE YE AT P EGPST h M 1 V FENCE. NET r' -b eD LIGHT POLE LAYOUT DY OTHGh6 OCAL y,tl. I'•o' f2" 0.0. teHa, . a'DOJOLC TCG w TaxlDulT WATERWORKS IMPROVEMENTS ADDITIONAL CONDUIT IN C10ND lIT -IaT°e �ATIOI-I a. POST —TENSIONED TOPPING SLAB ` AT p DECEMBER 1979 �LI, IM'.I'•o' „ CHANGE ORDER 1 ' FIGURE I •" {bo, TSW _. I � ♦'0116' A �LlCV! _ _ � � I cGNrdYD �H L•1.L-L 9!2 LAIRlT Tw.! prICF IM11 La<•'IOH. a G7 o i-Y. ao. nL �2 OC eLe r 4 ,nrn�oA "x ° eL.iavee Te to as nerx.. FeNCE P057 5LEEVE .. 04.4 ciry w LOW WATERWORKS IMPROVEMENTS FENCE, NET a LIGHT POLES LAYOUT & DETAILS ©PAAAHILL, SMITH • C00PZA. INC. S �msruu — vcT• — IL mu 11Mai, rilY •�-all. MW,Ti1U T �J t rt✓OOP� SDI W �.I N'G L. R.. - ,/4'I v.I &' - 44 - Co' a .UI"MD,Nr-IASE G G�AZcO G.r'.U. "" ^rI,AZt:v Crl.U. 0 0 p) FaI LCI 102 G C HAgc AL.� CITY OF LUBBOCK TEXAS WATERWORKS IMPROVEMENTS STEEL MASONRY LINTEL AT PLUMBING CHASE DECEMBER 1979 CHANGE ORDER I FIGURE 2 1 i f I " II ' wBBltl 10 A' SOII LI E _Bw EI [ � [J Y,13[B I[I[L irYli111 tT[1 ]7w qu7 1 f. ra L 70 - 1•U4P STATION B[]E11v0IM YBIY[ W' CO I 'tAMI NAi� BY :la w 4T !A'Y� N IAAA— F, hGPI.kG IN• nc , ulE , aLK wBa f' IBYIYIU 1 ❑1 TOO'Y•� 1a IW B I I• A J. ,C. Ip 1-]I --- B I ]lEl lllE Y1lY[ NMNOL[ 1111911 T1L flry0!IIISa WMOIE II Pygg, CoqDUIr 1 .•, ?TD•I qO 1n0F DI DE OA I 1 UTILITY —SITE — PLAN ]CNon> ALF • . 70-0 O� OCT „GO+L. Y+YY) O'•O' LVU3Le + en,c,s t;ou✓+3 ..xe oAe-e15" oe-115 Ile SIder QJryyII � 9nCGT ,�. ZO -o' O e' F' II ,) I (I o I! u I I i CITT OE LUBBOCK, TEXAS see o ee7 Iz Eon WATERWORKS IMPROVEMENTS Ae3 Tle,4� +3 *oee PVC CONDUIT �' FOR TELEPHONE AE3CA"a�^�� COMPANY CONTROL CIRCUITS D ECEM13ER 1979 CHANGEORDER 3R I _A`�OuT--IF�A-t)=oFF1''E-� PAD AhftA xA_e b' • -a' ereITT OF LUBBOCK, TEXAS •, WATERWORKS IMPROVEMENTS UTILITY SITE PLAN —. ` • ;'�� ►ARKNLLL SMITH i COOPER. MI.3 E)IEERB— AIIOIREe T! — nAMKNB LueeofN, TExa — R mcn TABLE OF CONTENTS ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS . . . . . . . . . . A-1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. . . . . . . . . . IB-1 PROPOSAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 CONTRACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1 PERFORMANCE BOND . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1 PAYMENT BOND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE . . . . . . . . . G-1 M EXPERIENCE RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT Paragraph Page GC-01. Owner GC-1 GC-02. Contractor GC-1 GC-03. Engineer GC-1 GC-04. Contract Documents. GC-1 GC-05. Sub -Contractor GC-1 GC-06. Written Notice GC-1 GC-07. Work GC-2 GC-08. Working Day GC-2 GC-09. Substantially Completed GC-2 GC-10. Layout of Work GC-2 GC-11. Engineer's Authority and Duty GC-2 GC-12. Superintendence and Inspection GC-3 GC-13. Contractor"s Duty and Superintendence GC-4 GC-14. Contractor's Understanding GC-4 GC-15. Character of Workmen GC-4 GC-16. Contractor's Buildings GC-4 GC-17. Sanitation GC-5 rt" GC-18. - Shop Drawings GC-5 GC-19. Preliminary Approval GC-5 GC-20. Defects and Their Remedies GC-6 ' GC-21. GC-22. Changes and Alterations Right of Engineer to Modify Methods and GC-6 Equipment GC=6 GC-23. Keeping of Plans and Specifications ' Accessible GC-7 GC-24. Ownership of Drawings GC-7 GC-25. Adequacy of Design GC-7 GC-26. Right of Entry GC-7 GC-27. Collateral Contracts GC-7 GC-28. Discrepancies and Omissions GC-7 GC-29. Damages GC-8 GC-30. Protection Against Accident to Employees and the Public GC-8 • 6 Paragraph Page GC-31. Contractor's Insurance GC-9 GC-32. Time for Completion and Liquidated Damages GC-10 GC-33. Price for Work GC-11 GC-34. Bonds GC-12 GC-35. Losses from Natural Causes GC-12 GC-36. Protection of Adjoining Property GC-12 GC-37. Protection Against Claims of Sub -Contractors, Laborers, Materialmen and Furnishers of Machinery, Equipment and Supplies GC-12 GC- 38. Protection Against Royalties or Patented Invention GC-13 GC-39. Laws and Ordinances GC-13 GC-40. Assignment and Subletting GC-13 GC-41. Time and Order of Completion GC-14 GC-42. Extension of Time GC-14 GC-43. Hindrances and Delays GC-14 GC-44. Quantities and Measurements GC-15 GC-45. Estimated Quantities GC-15 GC-46. Partial Payments GC-15 GC-47. Use of Completed Portions GC-16 GC-48. Final Completion and Acceptance GC-16 GC-49. Final Payment GC-16 GC-50. Payment Withheld GC-17 GC-51. Delayed Payments GC-17 GC-52. Extra Work CC-17 GC-53. Time of Filing Claims GC-19 GC-54. Arbitration GC-19 GC-55. GC-56. Abandonment by Contractor Abandonment by Owner GC-20 GC-22 I 1 SPECIAL PROVISIONS Paragraph Page SP-1 Scope of Work SP-1 SP-2 Contract Documents SP-1 SP-3 Time and Order of Completion SP-1 SP-4 Protection of Existing Facilities SP-2 SP-5 Provision Concerning Escalator Clauses SP-2 SP-6 Availability of Plans SP-2 SP-7 Payment SP-3 SP-8 Affidavit of Bills Paid SP-3 SP-9 Protection Against Loss to the Owner Caused by Delayed Completion SP-3 SP-10 Sales Tax on Construction Materials and Equipment SP-4 SP-11 Materials and Workmanship SP-4 SP-12 Lines and Grades SP-4 SP-13 Limitation of Work Area SP-5 SP-14 Water for Construction SP-5 SP-15 Electric Power SP-5 SP-16 Sanitary Facilities SP-5 SP-17 Cost Breakdown SP-6 SP-18 Barricades, Watchmen and Safety Measures SP-6 SP-19 Engineer's Field Office SP-6 SP-20 Guarantees SP-7 SP-21 Progress Schedule SP-7 SP-22 Contractor's Responsibility for Complete Facility SP-7 SP-23 Origin of Materials and Equipment" SP-8 SP-24 Protection and Maintenance of Facility SP-8 SP-25 Cleanup SP-8 SP-26 Special Provision Regarding Retainage SP-8 SP-27 Subsurface Conditions SP-9 SP-28 Wage Rates SP-9 SECTION 1 EXCAVATION, GRADING, AND SUBGRADE PREPARATION 1. General 1-1 2. Excavation for Structures 1-1 3. Backfilling and Grading 1-1 4. Topsoil 1-2 5. Disposal of Excess Excavation 1-2 6. Clean Up ' 1-2 �i i SECTION 2 CONCRETE Paragraph Page 1. General 2-1 2, Concrete Materials Tests 2-1 3. General Requirements 2-2 4. Concrete Materials 2-4 5. Reinforcing 2-5 6. Proportions 2-6 7, Slump and Air Content 2-8 8, Mixing & Placing 2-8 9, Waterstops and Expansion Joints 2-12 10. Forms 2-13 11. Patching 2-14 12. Finishing 2-15 13. Curing and Protecting 2-16 14. Embedded Items 2-19 15. Cleaning and Testing Structures 2-19 SECTION 3 PRECAST OR PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONCRETE 1. General 3-1 2, Quality Assurance 3-1 3. Submittals 3-4 4, Delivery, Storage and Handling 3-4 5. Job Conditions 3-4 6. Formwork 3-5 7, Reinforcing Materials 3-5 8. Concrete Materials 3-6 9. Connection Materials 3-6 10. Concrete Mix Design 3-7 i.l. Fabrication 3-7 12. Installation of Precast Beams and Precast Prestressed Double Tees 3-9 13. Plant Quality Control Evaluations 3-10 SECTION 4 POST -TENSIONED CONCRETE TOPPING SLAB 1. General 4-1 2, Quality Assurance 4-1 ' 3. Submittals 4-2 4. Job Conditions 4-2 5.- Materials 4-3 6. Construction Procedures 4-4 4 SECTION 5 METERING. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS Paragraph Pam 1. Scope 5-1 2. Pump Discharge Flow Metering 5-1 3. Station Inflow Transmitter (FT-3) 5-4 4. Reservoir Level Monitoring 5-5 5. Functional Requirements, Control System 5-6 6. Materials and Equipment 5-7 7. Electrical Work 5-9 8. Start-up Services 5-9 9. System Drawings 5-9 SECTION 6 PIPING, VALVES, AND FITTINGS 1. General 6-1 2. Pipe Materials 6-1 3. Valves and Appurtenances 6-3 4. Pipe Installation 6-6 SECTION 7 MOVING AND INSTALLING PUMPS 1. General 7-1 2. Examination of Items to -be Removed 7-1 3. Description of Items to be Removed 7-1 4. Pump and Motor Mounting Frames 7-2 5. Coordination of Removal of Equipment 7-2 SECTION 8 CHLORINATION EQUIPMENT 1. General 8-1 2. Chlorinator 8-1 3. Automatic Switchover Valves 8-2 4. Scales 8-2 5. Chlorine Solution Diffusor 8-2 6. Accessories 8-2 SECTION 9 PAINTING EQUIPMENT AND METAL SURFACES Paragraph Page 1. General 9-1 2. Scope 9-1 3. Approval of Materials 9-1 4. Storage 9-1 ' 5. Mixing 9-2 6. Miscellaneous Surfaces 9-2 7. Color Schedule 9-2 8. Workmanship 9-2 ' 9. Retouching 9-3 10. Covering shall be Complete 9-3 ' 11. Hardware, Accessories, Fixtures and Similar Items 9-3 12. Touch Up 9-3 13. Affidavits 9-4 ' 14. Items to be Painted 9-4 15. Preparation of Surfaces 9-4 16. Materials 9-4 17. Paint Systems 9-5 ' 18. Inspection and Superintendence 9-5 19. Guarantee 9-6 SECTION 10 PUMP STATION BUILDING 1. Description 10-1 2. Excavating, Filling and Grading 10-1 3. Concrete 10-4 4. Masonry 10-7 5. Structural Steel 10-9 6. Carpentry 10-12 7. Moisture Protection 10-14 8. Doors, Windows and Glass 10-17 9. Finish Systems 10-24 10. Specialties 10-27 SECTION 11 MECHANICAL WORK 1. Utility Services 11-1 2. Materials 11-1 .3. Valves 11-2 4. Hangers and Supports 11-2 5. Plumbing Fixtures 11-3 10 Paragraph Page 6. Drains 11-3 7. Installation of Piping Systems 11-3 8. Fabrication of Pipe Joints 11-4 9. Repair of Leaks 11-4 10. Insulation 11-5 11. Testing 11-5 12. Disinfecting 11-6 13. Equipment 11-6 14. Low Pressure Ductwork 11-11 15. Flexible Connections 11-11 16. Flashing 11-12 17. Instructions 11-12 SECTION 12 1. Electrical Materials 12-1 2. Installation of Electrical Materials 12-6 SECTION 13 MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION 1. General 13-1 2. Shop Drawings 13-1 3. Steel Shapes 13-1 4, Weir Plate 13-1 5. Hot -Dip Galvanizing 13-1 6. Grating 13-1 7. Ladders 13-2 8. Concrete Anchors 13-2 9. Sump Pumps 13-2 APPENDIX 1 ADVERTISEMENTS FOR BIDS NOTICE TO BIDDERS ' Sealed proposals addressed to the Honorable Mayor and City Council of Lubbock, Texas will be received at the office of Floyd P. Nesbitt, Director of Purchasing, until 2:00 P.M., August 15, 1.979 , for -furnishing all necessary materials, machinery, equipment, superintendence, and labor for constructing a pump station, ten million gallon reservoir, and related items for the City of Lubbock, Texas. Immediately following the closing time for receipt of bids, proposals will be publicly opened and read aloud in the Council Room. Any bid received after closing time will be returned unopened. �. Each bidder must deposit with his bid, security in the amount, form and subject to the conditions provided in the Information for Bidders. The successful Bidder will be required to furnish a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond each in the amount of the contract, written by a re- sponsible Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas, and satisfactory to the Owner, as required by Article 5160, V.A.T.C.S., as amended by H.F. 344, passed by the 56th Legislature Regular Session, 1959. ii Copies of the Plans and Specifications may be secured from Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc., Consulting Engineers, 4010 Avenue R, Lubbock, Texas 79412, phone 806-747-0161. One half size drawings (12 inches by 18 inches) will be provided unless full size drawings are requested. The deposit for half size drawings is thirty dollars ($30.00), and the deposit for full size drawings is fifty dollars ($50.00). The full amount of the deposit will be returned to the Contractor on submission of a bona fide bid on the work, with such plans and specifications; or upon returning the plans and speci- fications immediately after examination of same, and advising the Engineer that bid will not be submitted; otherwise, the deposit shall be forfeited. CITY OF LUBBOCK, TEXAS Owner y f I�o Floyd P. Nesbit irector of Purchasing 1 Nnq ' INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS 1. BID FORMS Bids shall be submitted on the Proposal form in the bound speci- fications. The complete bound documents shall be submitted and plans shall be returned as specified herein. 2. PREPARATION OF PROPOSAL All blanks in the forms shall be filled in or marked "N.A." (Not A- Applicable) and all required information shall be included with the Pro- posal. Bid prices shall be shown both in written words and figures. Receipt of all addenda issued shall be acknowledged in the space pro- vided in the addendum. Each addendum received and the Bid Security shall be enclosed with the Proposal. The Proposal and accompanying documents shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope addressed to the Honorable Mayor and City Council, City of Lubbock, Texas, and marked "Proposal for Pump Station Number Ten and Reservoir," with the name and address of the Bidder also shown thereon. 3. EXPERIENCE RECORD AND FINANCIAL STATEMENT The Experience Record, included herein, shall be filled in, showing completed jobs, of a similar nature to the one covered by the Proposal, and the work in progress with contract and bond amounts and percent complete. A swarn statement of the current financial condition of the Bidder shall also be enclosed with the Proposal, in order to provide the Owner with information relative to the responsibility of bidders and their ability to finance and construct the work. This statement shall be enclosed with the Proposal in a separate sealed envelope and will be returned to the Bidder upon return of his bid security. ' 4. BID SECURITY Each proposal must be accompanied by a Proposal Bond, Certified Check, or Cashier's Check in the amount of not less than five percent of the bid submitted, payable without recourse to the City of Lubbock, Texas. Such bid security shall be so conditioned that if the Bidder is awarded the Contract and is unable or fails to furnish performance and ' payment bonds and execute the Contract within ten days after date of award, the security shall revert to the Owner as compensation for damages which the Owner suffers because of such failure by the Bidder. I IB-1 r kh 5. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS With the execution and delivery of the contract documents, the Contractor shall furnish, on the forms provided herein, bonds, as required by paragraph GC-34, executed by an approved surety company authorized to do business in the State of Texas, acceptable to the City of Lubbock, and accepted according to the latest list of companies holding certificates of authority from the Secretary of the Treasury of the United States of America. 6. INTERPRETATION OF BIDS No bid will be considered which fails to supply all information indicated, or which has any limitation or provisions placed upon it by ' the Bidder. In case of a difference between the written words and the figures in the Proposal, the amount stated in written words will be considered as the bid price, without recourse on the part of the Con- tractor. In case of ambiguity or lack of clearness in the proposal, the Owner will adopt the most advantageous construction thereof or reject the bid. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any ' or all bids, if it is deemed to be in the best interest of the public. Further, the Owner reserves the right to reject any bids because of informality or to waive such informality if such action is in the public interest. 7. DISPOSITION OF BIDS ' The Owner expects to make award of the contract as soon as pos- sible after the opening of bids, but specifically reserves the right to hold all Proposals for a period not to exceed thirty (30) days, before ' making an award. No Proposal, having been opened may be withdrawn prior to expiration of this thirty -day period. The Owner will retain the bid security of the three lowest bidders for a period not to exceed 30 days. ' 8. EXAMINATION OF SITE Prior to submission of a Proposal, each Bidder shall have made ' a thorough examination of the site of the work and of the plans and specifications, and shall have become informed as to the location and nature of the proposed construction, labor conditions and all other matters that may affect the cost and time of completion of the work upon which he bids. Bidders shall make such investigations of the nature of the project as they deem necessary and shall assume all responsibility for fully informing themselves of the character of ma- terials which will be encountered. 9. INTERPRETATION OF SPECIFICATIONS PRIOR TO BIDDING . Any question arising, during the advertising period, as to meaning or intent of the specifications will be answered by an addendum p' which will be sent to all who have placed a deposit and have been fur- nished plans and contract documents. in IB-2 10 The receipt of each addendum shall be acknowledged by the Bidder in the space provided and each addendum shall be enclosed with the Proposal when it is submitted. All addenda shall become a part of these contract documents. The results of a soils investigation at the project site is in- cluded in these specifications. The results of the soils investiga- tion is included for the convenience of the Contractor. The soils investigation information is not guaranteed, and no claims for extra work or damages will be allowed if the actual soil or material condi- tions are found to vary from those indicated in the soils investigation. 10. REFUND OF DEPOSIT FOR DOCUMENTS Plans, specifications and contract documents may be obtained as provided in the Notice to Bidders. Refund of the deposit will be made as specified in SPECIAL PROVISIONS. 11. DISQUALIFICATION FO BIDDERS Any one or more of the following causes may be considered as sufficient for the disqualification of bidder and the rejection of his bid or bids: ' More than one proposal for the same work from an individual firm, partnership, or corporation under the same or different names. Evidence of collusion among bidders. Lack of competency as revealed by the financial statement, exper- ience, or plant and equipment statements submitted. Lack of responsibility as shown by past work judged from the stand- point of workmanship and progress. Uncompleted work which, in the judgement of the Owner, might hinder or prevent the prompt completion of additional work, if awarded. For being in arrears on existing contracts, in litigation with the Owner, or having defaulted on a previous contract. IB-3 01 BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS Place City of Lubbock, Texas Date August 15, 1979 Proposal of C. B. Thompson Construction Company (hereinafter called "Bidder") a Texas (State) corporation/ -psr'tne9h$/-as--- (STRIKE OUT INAPPLICABLE TERMS) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called "Owner")' Gentlemen: The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the con- struction of Pump Station Number Ten and Reservoir having examined the plans and specifications with related documents and the site of the proposed work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the proposed project including the avail- ability of materials and labor, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, ma- terials, and supplies, and to construct the project in accordance with the Contract Documents, within the time set forth therein, and at the prices stated below. These prices are to cover all expenses incurred in per- forming the work required under the Contract Documents, of which this pro- posal is a part. Bidder hereby agrees to cdmmence work under this contract on or before a date to be specified in written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 270 consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications. Bidder further agrees to pay as liq- uidated damages, the sum of $500.00 for each consecutive calendar day thereafter as hereinafter provided in Paragraph 32 of the General Conditions. C-1 Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: Addendum No. 1 and Addendum No. 2 The undersigned Bidder agrees to perform all of the work described in the specifications and shown on the drawings as required for comple- tion of the project for the lump sum price of: One Million Seven Hundred Ninety -Three Thousand Dollars and No Cents ($ 1,793,000.00 _) In the event that the quantities of any of the following work items are changed from those shown on the contract drawings, additions to or deductions from the contract price shall be determined by applying the following unit prices to such changes in quantities: 1. Structural Excavation, per Cubic Yard $ 6.00 2. Class A Concrete, per Cubic Yard $ 60.00 3. Unclassified Concrete, per Cubic Yard $ 38.00 4. Form Surface, per Square Foot $ 1.75 5. Reinforcing Steel, per pound $ 0.35 The above unit prices shall include all labor, materials, bailing, shoring, removal, overhead, profit, insurance, etc., to cover the finished work of the several kinds called for. Changes shall be processed in ac- cordance with Paragraph GC-52, Method A, of the General Conditions. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and.to waive any informalities in the bidding. The bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be with- drawn for a period of 30 calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. C-2 Upon receipt of written notice of the acceptance of.this bid, Bidder will execute the formal contract attached within 10 days and deliver a Surety Bond or Bonds as required by the General Conditions. The bid security attached in the sum of 5% of Total Bid ($ ) is to become the property of the Owner in the event the contract and bond are not executed within the time above set forth, as liquidated damages for the delay and additional ex- pense to the Owner caused thereby. Respectfully submitted: By f , (Signature) (SEAL - If bid is by a corporation) C. B. Thompson Construction Co. (Title) P.O. Box 6546 Lubbock, Texas 79413 (Business Address) NOTE: Each Bidder shall complete page C-4, "Schedule of Equipment and Subcontractors" as bound with the Specifications. C-3 SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENT AND SUBCONTRACTORS EQUIPMENT TO BE FURNISHED: This proposal is based on furnishing and installing equipment supplied by the manufacturers as listed below: Equipment Manufacturer Ball Valves Bingham-Williamette Flow Meters B.I.F. Transmitters and Receivers B.I.F. Chlorination Equipment Wallace & Tiernan Major Electrical Equipment General Electric SUBCONTRACTORS: This proposal is based on subcontracting certain portions of the work as listed below. (If the Bidder proposes to do any of the scheduled por- tions of the work, the Bidder's name should be shown as subcontractor.) Portion of Work Subcontractor Address Electrical Work Amco Electric Lubbock Mechanical Work The Anthony Co. Lubbock Excavation Walter Jarnigan Lubbock Masonry Prestressed Concrete D & L Masonry Growe-Gulde Lubbock Amarillo C-4 STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO ARTICLE 5160 OF THE REVISED CIVIL STATUTES OF TEXAS AS AMENDED BY ACTS OF THE 56TH LEGISLATURE, REGULAR SESSION, 1959 1.1 KNOW ALL HEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that C. B. Thompson Construction Company (Hereinafter called the Principal (s), as Principal (s), and (hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the One Million Seven Hundred Ninety - amount of Three Thousand & 00/100------------------------ Dollars ($ 1,793,000.00 ) lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof,_the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal_ has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the • o Tw day of A Q &QS-T 19 79 , to furnish all necessary materials, machinery, equipment, superintendence, and labor for constructing a pump station, ten million gallon reservoir, and related items for the City of Lubbock, Texas and said Principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. J;0W, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the Performance Bond - Page E-1 I,. provisions of Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas as amended by Acts of the 56th Legislature, regular session 1959, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal(s) and Surety(s) have signed and sealed this instrument this �4' day of A oco s T 19 79 C, a LF INSu /IJeE pAA) Surety *By OUP .:,U 2Tl5 I o/40A) Title) ,47-rokA-)EV- IA)- FAC7- C. B. Thompson Construction Co. Principa Title) By: Titla By: (Title) The undersigned surety company reprepents that it is duly quali- fied todo business in Texas, and hereby designates _ [4 Iget%,5. P-n XQAj an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. 1.I.4c Z�vsu.ea t7.,E 1PAvy Surety *By: Title �rro—A)EA/- FW C 7- Approved as to Form City of Lubbock By�AtZ_e A��6 0 ity toy *Vote: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company there must be on file a certified extract from the by-lawa showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. Performance Bond - Page E-2 STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO ARTICLE 5160 OF THE REVISED CIVIL STATUTES OF TEXAS AS AMENDED BY ACTS OF THE 56TH LEGISLATURE, REGULAR SESSION, 1959 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that C. B. Thompson Construction Company (hereinafter called the Principal (�), as Principal (s), and n (hereinafter called the Surety (s), as Surety (s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the One Million Seven Hundred Ninety - amount of Three Thousand & 00/100--------------------------- Dollars ($ 1,793,000.00 ) lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof) the.said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written con- tract with the Obligee, dated the- ��day of_-,4 UCat) S-[- , 19 79, to furnish all necessary materials, machinery, equipment superintendence, and labor for constructing a pump station, ten million gallon reservoir, and related items for the City of Lubbock, Texas and said Principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and mater- ial to him or a sub -contractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Article 5160 of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas as Payment Bond - Page F-1 amended by Acts of the 56th Legislature, Regular Session, 1959, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the pro- visions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 3o -fH day of AU GoST 19, 2 . ,/Z,LEiZ;VSU,eANCE �oMD.9,uf/ Surety *By: Tit e) Cuer�.s G'o,+'oN '%Tro,eA)EY-1N-F.9er C. B. Thompson Construction Co. Princi 4 By: �� Oi>r� / pf�►� J. -(Ti tic) By: (Title) By: (Title) The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qual- ifMer/s to do business in Texas, and hereby designates 20X0N an agent- resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of pro- cess may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. 9,U/_F �N.5Z1"iVL?E 2AI-22D Alf/ Surety By: (Title) Approved as to form: 4r7-,O eVEY- /A/- 1r.9er City of Lubbock 'By � �-t. City Attorney *Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. Payment Bond - Page F-2 POWER OF ATTORNEY - - KNOWIALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That GULF INSURANCE COMPANY, a corporation of the State of Missouri, hereinafter called Company, Does hereby appoint CURTIS COXON, ROBERT W. LONG, ROBERT N. GARRITSON, LUBBOCK, TEXAS its true and lawful Attorney -in -fact to make, execute, seal and deliver on its behalf, as surety, any and all bonds and undertakings of Suretyship. The execution of such bonds or undertakings in pursuance of these presents shall be as binding upon the Company as if they had been executed and acknowledged by the regularly elected officers of the Company. This Power of Attorney is issued pursuant to and by authority of the following resolution of the Board of Directors of the Com- pany, adopted effective September 29, 1961, and now in full force and effect: "Resolved that the President or any Vice President or any Secretary may appoint Attorneys -in -fact in any State, Territory or Federal District to represent this company and to act on its behalf within the scope of the authority granted to them in writing, which authority may include the power to make, execute, seal and deliver on behalf of this Company as surety, and as its act and deed any and all bonds and undertakings of suretyship and other documents that the ordinary course of surety business may require, including authority to appoint agents for the service of process in any jurisdiction, State or Federal and authority to attest to the signature of the President or any Vice Presi- dent or any Secretary and to verify any affidavit or other statement relating to the foregoing, and to certify to a copy of any of the by-laws of the Company and to any resolu- tions adopted by its Board of Directors; and any such Attorney -in -fact may be removed and the authority granted him revoked by the President or any Vice President or any Secretary or by the Board of Directors." This Power of Attorney and Certificate of Authority is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by authority of the following reso- lution voted by the Board of Directors of the Gulf Insurance Company at a meeting duly called and held on the 24th of July, 1973. "Resolved that the signatures of Warren J. Kwedar, President, or of Frederick Boger, Senior Vice President, or of Arthur C Werden, Vice President, or of Jack W. May- nard, Vice President, or of William E. Elston, Vice President, or of Douglas Simpson, Secretary, or of R. C. Fetherston, Secretary, and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Attorneys -in -fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such power of attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company In the future with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached." rAvilRl� s we ,ereof, the Company has caused this Power of Attorney to be signed and its corporate seal to be affixed by its autho- del: his �" day of 19 • loth August 76 --I'. • S .f�i ? �L. S•. U�•• ��; B y JACK W. MAYNARD VICE PRESIDENT ST1lT6.,QR, it XAS )i ss: COUNTY OF DALLAS On this 10 th day of August 1g 76 before me. a Notary Public of the State and County aforesaid, residing therein, duly commissioned and sworn, personally came the above named officer of the Company, who being by me first duly sworn according to law, did depose and say that he is that officer of the Company described in and which executed the foregoing instrument; that he knows the seal of the Company: that the seal affixed to such instrument is the corporate seal of the Company; and that the corporate seal and his signature as such officer were affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority and direction of the Company. n (SEAL) My commission expires the 1S t day of June CLIFFORD R. BEARD TARY PUBLIC ty 77 �ANCF CERTIFICATE °CjN' i dersi d, do hereby certify that the original Power of Attorney of which the foregoing ��••� g g is a true and correct copy is in full �1 d of �) .• the foregoing resolution is a true and correct transcript from the records of the Company, and that the above feed officer Wbl -t the date of execution of the foregoing Power of Attorney authorized to execute this Power of Attorney. J; I►7trte€, I have hereunto subscribed by name and affixed the corporate seal of the Company this day 19 J` '•:SS 00�Q;: ',,SEAL) •••••� DOUGLAS SIMPSON SECRETARY Form 1 S 977 (0.711 I 2M a CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE TO: CITY OF L,rtQaO��< Date O '02%- 79 Type of L u BP GA , TEXAS ProjectGfWOAR �dNrRA�TO� THIS IS TO CERTIFY THATC A 7-40" SO* 0^)SrR&4CX;*C0': f? y,/ •�• �Ok �ys'�' (Name and Address of Insured) � a BAV C /r rAx . �9y/3 is, at the date of this certificate, insured by this Company with respect to the business operations hereinafter described, for the types of Insur- ance and in accordance with the provisions of the standard policies used by this Company, and further hereinafter described. Exceptions to stand- ard policy noted on reverse side hereof. &µcF TYPE OF INSURANCE Policy No Effective Expires Limits of Liabilit men' s WC S903 7yo i ensat on Liftity Contingent Liability �op �s' %IiTS9s Sy7� sFE ABoyrF IV7-1 Build os CARES k S� ob AO J,r r 7 LL L2 79 S T,,r,4_ -o R V person $ Oo, peo 91 accident 1 person $ 1 accident $ Other AV v The foregoing Policies (do) (do not) cover all sub -contractors. Locations Covered: Z;-.-)( f�S Description of Operations Covered: GzW'4rA-91 C�.vTr��►G7�� -- The above policies either in the body thereof or by appropriate endorse- ment provide that they may not be changed or cancelled by the insurer in less than the legal time required after the insured has received written notice of such change or cancellation, or, in case there is no legal re- quirement, in less than five days after the insured has recieved such written notice. THREE COPIES OF THIS CERTIFICATE MUST BE SENT TO THE OWNER 141MI DGIS - se rIA-Bo V'0- me of Insurer) By Title G-1 EXPERIENCE RECORD List of Projects, similar to that covered by Proposal, which Bidder has successfully completed: Amount of Date Name and Address Contract Award Type of Work Completed of Owner $2,100,000 Hotel 1974 Hilton Inn, Lubbock 538,000 Bank 1974 First National, Lamesa 829,000 Heli-port 1975 Ft. Hood, Corps of Eng. 208,000 Swimming Pool 1975 City of Lubbock 639,000 Student -Union Bldg. 1975 Central Texas College .1,200,000 Base Supply Facility 1975 Reese AFB, Corps of Eng. 986,000 Dental Clinic 1976 Ft. Hood, Corps.of Eng. 1,699,000 Voc. Tech School 1978 South Plains College 727,000 Stadium Ticket Office 1978 Texas Tech List of Projects Bidder is now engaged in completing: Amount of % Name and Address Contract Award Type of Work Complete of Owner $1,516,000 Jr. Hi -School 99 Sweetwater School Dist. 3,697,000 Hospital 51 Scurry County Court 754,000 City Hall 70 City of Hereford 1,872,000 Communications Center 21 Corps of Engineers 1,764,000 E.E. Building 26 Texas Tech University 271,000 Warehouse 05 United Parcel Service H-1 M E GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT GC-01. OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or the expression Party of the First Part, or First Party, are used in the contract docu- ments, it shall be understood as referring to the Owner as de- scribed in the Contract. GC-02. CONTRACTOR Whenever the word Contractor, or the expression Party of the Second Part, or Second Party, is used, it shall .be understood to mean the person, persons, co -partnership or corpor- ation so defined in the contract and who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or to his or their legal re- presentatives. GC-03. ENGINEER Whenever the word Engineer is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to Parkhill, Smith and Cooper, Inc., Consulting Engineers, Lubbock and El Paso, Texas, Engineer of. the Owner, or such other Engineer, Supervisor or Inspector as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular. GC-04. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders (Advertisement), Instructions to Bidders, Proposal, signed Agreement, Performance Bond, Payment Bond, General Condi- tions of the Agreement, Special Provisions, Technical Specifica- tions, Plans, and all modifications thereof incorporated in any of the documents before the execution of the agreement. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is called for by any one shall be as binding as if called for by all. In case of conflict between any of the Contract Documents, priority of Interpretation shall be in the following order: Sign- ed Agreement, Performance Bond, Special Bonds (if any), Proposal, Special Provisions, Notice to Bidders, Instructions to Bidders, Technical Specifications, Plans and General Conditions of the Agreement. GC-05. SUB -CONTRACTOR The term Sub -Contractor, as employed herein, in- cludes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor, and it includes one who furnished material worked to a special de- sign according to the plans or specifications of this work, but does not include one who merely furnishes material not so worked. GC-06. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall served if delivered in person to th e be deemed to have been duly individual or to a member of GC - 1 4W PW the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intend- ed, or if delivered at or sent by registered mail to the last busi- ness address known to him who gives the notice. GC-07. WORK Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, ow tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, pow- .,. er, fuel, transportation and other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract docu- ments. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as' to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have a well known technical or trade mean-' ing shall be held to refer to such recognized standards. GC-08. WORKING DAY M A "Working Day" is defined as any day not including Sundays or any legal holidays, in which weather or other conditions, so not under the control of the Contractor, will permit construction of the principal units of the work for a continuous period of not less than seven (7) hours between 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. 1r GC-09. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED By the term "substantially completed" is meant that the structure has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. GC.10. LAYOUT OF WORK_ Except as specifically provided herein, the Contrac- tor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accom- plish this work in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. The Engi- neer will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at the Contractor's .., request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the re- sponsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the plans and specifications. GC-11. ENGINEER'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Engineer shall su- pervise all work included herein. He has the authority to stop. the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the pro- per execution of the contract. In order to prevent delays and dis- putes and to discourage litigation, it is further agreed that the Engineer shall in all cases determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under this contract. He shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall in all cases decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this GC-2 1 contract on the part of said Contractor. The Engineers estimates and findings shall be the conditions precedent to the right of the parties hereto to arbitration or to any action of the contract, and to any rights of the Contractor to receive any money under this contract; provided, however, that should the Engineer render any decision or give any direction, which in the opinion of either party hereto, is not in accordance with the meaning and intent of this contract, either party may file with said Engineer within thirty (30) days his written objection to the decision or direc- tion so rendered, and by such action may reserve the right to sub- mit the question so raised to arbitration as herein provided. It is the intent of this agreement that there shall be no delay in the execution of the work, therefore, the written decision or di- rections of the Engineer as rendered shall be promptly carried out, and any claim arising therefrom shall be thereafter adjusted by arbitration as hereinafter provided. The Engineer shall, within a reasonable time, ren- der and deliver to both the Owner and the Contractor a written decision on all claims of the parties hereto and on all questions which may arise relative to the execution of the work or the in- terpretation of the contract, specifications and plans. Should the Engineer fail to make such decision within a reasonable time, an appeal to arbitration may be taken as if his decision had been rendered against the party appealing. Whenever the words "directed", "required", "permit- ted", "designated", "considered necessary", "prescribed", or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation, or prescription, of the Engineer is intended; and similarly, the words "approval", "ac- ceptable", "satisfactory", or words of like import shall mean ap- proved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Engineer. Whenever in the specifications or drawings accompany- ing this agreement, the terms of description of various qualities relative to finish, workmanship, or other qualities of similar kind which cannot, from their nature, be specifically and clearly de- scribed and specified, but are necessarily described in general terms, the fulfillment of which must depend on individual judgment, then in all such cases, any question of the fulfillment of said specifications shall be decided by the Engineer, and said work shall be done in accordance with his interpretations of the meaning of the words, terms or clauses defining the character of the work. CC-12. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION It is agreed by the Contractor that the Engineer shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors as the said Engi- neer may deem proper to inspect the material furnished and the work done under this agreement, and to see that the said material is fur- nished, and said work is done in accordance with the specifications GC - 3 therefor. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and as- ' sistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or in- spectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instruc- tions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and the accompanying plans ' and specifications, provided, however, should the Contractor ob- ject to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or in- spector, the Contractor may within six (6) days make written ap- peal to the Engineer for his decision. GC-13. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants all satisfactory to the Engineer. The ' superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to him shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Adequate supervision by competent and responsible ' representatives of the Contractor is essential to proper perform- ance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. Important directions ' shall be confirmed in writing to the Contractor. Other directions shall be so confirmed on written request in each case. GC-14. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and 4greed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature and lo- cation of the work, the conformation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the charac- ter of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, the general and local conditions, and ' all other matters which can in any way affect the work under this contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent or employee of the Owner, either before or after the execu- tion of this contract shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. GC-15. CHARACTER OF WORKMEN ' The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent men, skillful in the performance of the type of work re- quired under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that when- , ever the Engineer shall inform him in writing that any man or men on the work are, in his opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, or dis- orderly, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and ' shall not again be employed on the work without the Engineer's writ- ten consent. GC-16. CONTRACTOR'S BUILDINGS The building of structures for housing men, or the erection of tents or other forms of protection, will be permitted GC - 4 only at such places as the Engineer shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structures shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. GC-17. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of la- borers on work, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Engineer, and their use shall be strictly enforced. GC-18. SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer with such promptness as to cause no delay in his own work or in that of any other Contractor, three copies unless otherwise specified, of all shop and/or setting drawings and schedules required for the work of the various trades, and the Engineer shall pass upon them with reasonable promptness, making required corrections. The Con- tractor shall make any corrections required by the Engineer, file with him four corrected copies and furnish such other copies as may be needed. If the Contractor and/or the Manufacturer desires additional approved sets, the number of final copies submitted shall be the four copies for the Engineer plus the copies desired by the Contractor and/or Manufacturer. The Engineer's approval of such drawings or schedules shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from drawings or specifications, un- less he has in writing called the Engineer's attention to such deviations at the time of submission nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors of any sort in shop drawings or schedules. GC-19. PRELIMINARY APPROVAL The Engineer shall not have the power to waive the obligations of this contract for the furnishing by the Contractor of good material, and of his performing good work as herein de- scribed, and in full accordance with the plans and specifications. No failure or omission of the Engineer to condemn any defective work or material shall release the Contractor from the obligations to at once tear out, remove and properly replace the same at any time prior to final acceptance upon the discovery of said defective work or material; provided, however, that the Engineer shall, upon request of the Contractor, inspect and accept or reject any ma- terial furnished, and in event the material has been once accepted by the Engineer, such acceptance shall be binding on the Owner, un- less it can be clearly shown that such material furnished does not meet the specifications for this work. Any questioned work may be ordered taken up or removed for re-examination, by the Engineer, prior to final acceptance, and, if found not in accordance with the specifications for said work, all expense of removing, re-examination and replacement shall be borne by the Contractor, otherwise the ex- pense thus incurred shall be allowed as Extra Work, and shall be paid for by the Owner, provided that, where inspection or approval is specifically required by the specifications prior to performance of certain work, should the Contractor proceed with such work GC - 5 without requesting prior inspection or approval, he shall bear all expense of taking up, removing and replacing his work if so directed by the Engineer. GC-20. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is further agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the En- gineer as unsuitable or not in conformity with the specifications, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Engineer, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or other- wise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with this contract. GC-21. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form, dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying performance bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with, except as provided for unit price items under "Esti- mated Quantities". If the amount of work is either increased or decreased, and the work can fairly be classified under the specifi- cations, price adjustment for such increase or decrease shall be made. according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price, if any, established for such work under this contract, except as provided for unit price -items under "Estimated Quantities"; other- wise, price adjustment for such changed work shall be made as pro- vided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or mate- rial already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for any actual loss occasioned by such change, due to actual ex- pense incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. GC-22. RIGHT OF ENGINEER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work or the rate of progress required under this contract, the Engineer may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency, and'the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Con- tractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase his force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give .reasonable assur- ance of compliance with the schedule of progress. GC - 6 GC-23. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Engineer shall furnish the Contractor with an adequate and reasonable number of copies of all plans and speci- fications without expense to him, and the Contractor shall keep one copy of the same constantly accessible on the work, with the latest revisions noted thereon. GC-24. OWNERSHIP OF DRAWINGS All drawings, specifications and copies thereof furnished by the Engineer shall not be reused on other work, and with the exception of the signed contract sets, are to be return- ed to him on request, at the completion of the work. All models are the property of the Owner. GC-25. ADEQUACY OF DESIGN It is understood that the Owner believes it has employed competent engineers and designers. It is, therefore, agreed that the Owner shall be responsible for the adequacy of the design, sufficiency of the Contract Documents, the safety of the structure and the practicability of the operations of the completed project; provided the Contractor has complied with the requirements of the said Contract Documents, all approved modifi- cations thereof, and additions and alterations thereto approved in writing by the Owner. The burden of proof of such compliance shall be upon the Contractor to show that he has complied with the said requirements of the Contract Documents, approved modifi- cations thereof and all approved additions and alterations there- to. GC- 26. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner reserves the right to enter the property or location on which the works herein contracted for are to be constructed or installed, by such agent or agents as he may elect, for the purpose of supervising and inspecting the work, or for the purpose of constructing or installing such collateral work as said Owner may desire. GC-27. COLLATERAL CONTRACTS The Owner agrees to provide by separate contract or otherwise, all labor and material essential to the completion of the work specifically excluded from this contract, in such manner as not to delay the progress of the work, or damage said Contrac- tor, except where such delays are specifically mentioned elsewhere in the Contract Documents. GC-28. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of this contract that all work must be done and all material must be fur- nished in accordance with the generally accepted practice, and in the event of any discrepancies between the separate contract docu- ments, the priority of interpretation defined under "Contract Docu- ments" shall govern. In the event that there is still any doubt as GC - 7 to the meaning and intent of any portion of the contract, speci- fications or drawings, the Engineer shall define which is intended to apply to the work. GC-29. DAMAGES In the event the Contractor is damaged in the course of the completion of the work by the act, neglect, omission, mis- take or default of the Owner, or of the Engineer, or of any other , Contractor employed by the Owner upon the work, thereby causing loss to the Contractor, the Owner agrees that he will reimburse the Contractor for such loss. In the event the Owner is damaged in the course of the work by the act, negligence, omission, mistake or de- fault of the Contractor, or should the Contractor unreasonably de- lay the progress of the work being done by others on the job sa as to cause loss for which.the Owner becomes liable, then the Contrac- tor shall reimburse the Owner for such loss. GC-30. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or rr; policies of workmen's compensation insurance with an insurance com- pany licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workman's Compensation Law of the State of Texas. , The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precautions for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall com- ply with all applicable provisions of Federal, State and Municipal , safety laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of the As- sociated General Contractors of America except where incompatible with Federal, State or Municipal laws or regulations. The Contrac- tor, his sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and save harmless the Owner and all its officers, agents, and .employees and the Engineer and his agents and employees from all suits, actions or claims of any character, name and description brought for or on account of any injuries or damages received or sustained by any per- son or persons or property, on account of any negligent act or fault of the Contractor or any Subcontractor, their agents or employees, in the execution and supervision of said contract and project which is the subject matter of this contract or on account of the failure of the Contractor or any Subcontractor to provide necessary barricades, warning lights or signs, and will be required to pay any judgment with costs which may be obtained against the Owner or any of its of- ficers, agents or employees, and/or the Engineer, his agents and em- ployees. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole respon- sibility of the Contractor, in his sole discretion as an independent contractor; the inclusion of this paragraph in the agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owner, the Engineer or their representatives concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended only as reminders to the Contractor ' of his duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Owner or the Engineer. GC - 8 GC-31. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole _< cost and expense throughout the life of the contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Such insurance shall be car- ried with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a Sub- contractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operations of each Subcontractor. a. Workman's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance As required by statute, covering all employees em- ployed on the work whether employed by the Contractor or a Sub- contractor. b. Contractor's Public Liability and Property Damage Liability Insurance Providing for a limit of not less than One Hundred Thousand Dollars ($100,000) for all damages arising out of bodily injuries to or death of one person, and subject to that limit for each person, a total limit of Three Hundred Thousand Dollars ($300, 000) for all damages arising out of bodily injuries to or death of two or more persons in any one accident, and regular Contractor's Property Damage Liability Insurance providing for a limit of not less than Fifty Thousand Dollars ($50,000) for all damages arising out of injury to or destruction of property in any one accident, and subject to that limit per accident, a total (or aggregate) li- mit of One Hundred Thousand Dollars ($100,000) for all damages arising out of injury to or destruction of property during the po- licy period. C. Automobile Insurance Providing for a limit of not less than One Hundred Thousand Dollars ($100,000) for injuries, including accidental death, to any one person and, subject to the same limit for each person a total limit of Three Hundred Thousand Dollars ($300,000) on account of one accident, and automobile property damage insurance in an amount not less than Fifty Thousand Dollars ($50,000). d. Proof of Carriage of Insurance Before work on any contract of subcontract is start- ed, each Contractor and Subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval three (3) certificates covering each insurance policy car- ried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above require- ments, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company, setting forth: 1. Name and address of the insured. 2. The location of the operations to which the insurance applied. GC - 9 /p r. 3. The number of the policy and the type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certifi- cate. 4. The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder, on the date borne by such certi- ficate. S. A statement that the insurance of the type ' afforded by the policy applies to all of the operations of whatever character, which are undertaken by the insured during the perform- ance of this contract, provided such operations are required in the performance of the contract. 6. A provision that the policy may be canceled ' only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in this policy stating when, not less than ten (10) days there- after, cancellation of such policy shall be effective, with copy to the Owner of letter of intent. GC-32. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed, by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and the time for completion as specified in the contract of the work to be done hereunder are ESSENTIAL CONDITIONS of this contract; ' and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work em- braced in this contract shall be commenced on a date to be specified in the "Notice to Proceed." The Contractor agrees that said work shall be pro- secuted regularly, diligently, and uninterruptedly at such rate of progress as will insurq full completion thereof within the time specified. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that -the time for the completion of the work described herein is a reasonable time for the completion ' of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. If the said Contractor shall neglect, fail or refuse to complete the work within the time herein specified, or any pro- per extension thereof granted by the Owner, then the Contractor does hereby agree, as a part consideration for the awarding of this contract, to pay to the Owner the amount specified in the contract, not as a penalty but as liquidated damages for such breach of con- tract as hereinafter set forth, for each and every calendar day ' that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated in the contract for completing the work. �. The said amount is fixed and agreed upon by and be- tween the Contractor and the Owner because of the impracticability and extreme difficulty of fixing and ascertaining the actual dam- ages the Owner would in such event sustain, and said amount is GC - 10 6. agreed to be the amount of damages which the Owner would sustain and said amount shall be retained from time to time by the Owner from current periodical estimates. It is further agreed that time is of the essence of each and every portion of this contract and of the specifica- tions wherein a definite and certain length of time is fixed for the performance of any act whatsoever; and where under the con- tract an additional time is allowed for the completion of any work, the new time limit fixed by such extension shall be of the essence of this contract. Provided, that the Contractor shall not be charged with liquidated damages or any excess cost when the Owner determines that the Contractor is without fault and the Contractor's reasons for the time extension are acceptable to the Owner; Provi- ded, further, that the Contractor shall not be charged with liquida- ted damages of any excess cost when the delay in completion of the work is due: a. To any preference, priority or allocation order duly issued by the Government; a b. To unforeseeable cause beyond the control and with- out the fault or negligence of .the Contractor, including, but not restricted to, acts of God, or of the public enemy, acts of the Owner, acts of another Contractor in the performance of a contract with the Owner, fires, floods, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, strikes, freight embargoes, and severe weather; and -� C. To any delays of Subcontractors or suppliers oc- casioned by any of the causes specified in subsection (a) and (b) of this article: Provided, further, that the Contractor shall, within ten (10) days from the beginning of•such delay, unless the Owner shall grant a further period of time prior to the date of final settlement of the contract, notify the Owner, in writing, of the causes of the delay, who shall ascertain the facts and extent of the delay and notify the Contractor within a reasonable time of its decision in the matter. GC-33. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all material embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipu- lations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the prices set forth in the Proposal hereto attached, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such prices in full for furnishing all material and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also for all expenses incur- red by him, and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this Agreement, the attached specifications, 'the drawings and the requirements of the Engineer. GC — 11 GC- 34. BONDS It is further agreed by the parties to this contract that the Contractor will execute bonds in the sum of 100% of the total contract price, for the satisfactory performance of the work and payment of all labor, materials, and equipment in accordance with this contract on the forms provided for this purpose, executed by an approved surety company authorized to do business in the State of Texas, and acceptable according to the latest list of com- panies holding Certificates of Authority from the Secretary of the Treasury of the United States of America, and it is agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are furnish- ed and approved by the Owner. GC-35. LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES Unless otherwise specified, all loss or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circum- stances in the prosectution of the same, or from unusual obstruc- tions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own expense. GC-36. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The said Contractor shall take proper means to pro- tect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties, in any way encountered, which might be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this Agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construc- tion; and he shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjoining property. The Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner against any claim -or claims for damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, arising or growing out of the performance of the contract, but any such indemnity shall not apply to any claim of any kind arising out of the existence or character of the work. GC-37. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUB -CONTRACTORS, LABORERS, MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES The Contractor agrees that he will indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of sub -contractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, material - men and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, pow- er tools, and all supplies, including commissary, incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this contract. When so desired by the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If the Contractor fails so to do, then the Owner may at the option of the Contractor either pay directly any unpaid bills, of which the Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of GC - 12 money deemed reasonably sufficient to liquidate any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payments to the Contractor shall be resumed in full, in accordance with the terms of this contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this paragraph be construed to impose any obligations upon the Owner by either the Contractor or his surety. GC-38. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENTED INVENTION The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable le- gal agreement with the patentee or owner. The Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copy- rights and shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that the Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the pro- duct of a particular manufacturer or manufacutrers is specified or required by the Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then the Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner harmless from any loss on account of thereof. If the material or process speci- fied or required by the Owner is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless he promptly gives such information to the Owner. GC-39. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall.at all times observe and comply with all Federal, State and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and shall in- demnify and save harmless the Owner against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations whether by the Contractor or his employees, except where such violations are called for by the provisions of the Contract Documents. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall promptly notify the Engineer in writ- ing, and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Engineer, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom. In case the Owner is a body poli- tic and corporate the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or in the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into con- tract, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract, to the same effect as though embodied herein. GC-40. ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING The Contractor further agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the ful- fillment of this contract and that he will not assign by Power of GC - 13 Attorney, or otherwise, or sublet said contract without the written consent of the Owner, and that no part or feature of the work will ' be sublet to anyone objectionable to the Engineer or the Owner. The Contractor further agrees that the subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of ' this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from his full ob- ligations to the Owner, as provided by this Agreement. . GC-41. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION ' It is the meaning and intent of this contract, un- less otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute his work at such times and sessions, ' in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conducive to economy of construciton; provided, however, that the order and the time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall ' be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the proposal; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract ' or by his own force, the Engineer may direct the time and manner of constructing the work done under this contract so that conflict will be avoided and the construction of the various works being ' done for the Owner shall be harmonized. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may ' be reasonably be requested by the Engineer, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor proposes to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several t parts of the work, and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. GC-42. EXTENSION OF TIME ' Should the Contractor be delayed in the completion of the work by any act or neglect of the Owner or Engineer or by ' any employee of either, or by other contractors employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strikes, lockouts, fires and unusual delays by common carriers, or unavoidable cause ' or causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by any cause which the Engineer shall decide justifies the delay, then an extension of time shall be allowed for completing the work, sufficient to compensate for the delay, the amount of the extension to be deter- mined by the Engineer, provided, however, that the Contractor shall give the Engineer prompt notice in writing of the cause of such delay. GC-43. HINDRANCES AND DELAYS No claims shall be made by the Contractor for dam- ages resulting from hindrances or delays from any cause (except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner for his own conven- ience) during the progress of any portion of the work embraced in this contract. In case said work shall be stopped by the act of r owl GC - 14 the Owner, then such expense as in the judgment of the Engineer is caused by such stoppage of said work shall be paid by the Owner to the Contractor. GC-44. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. GC-45. ESTIMATED QUANTITIES This Agreement, including the specifications, plans and estimate, is intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing the proposals offered for the work. It is understood and agreed that the actual amount.of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract may differ some- what from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of such work done and the material furnished. Where payment is based on the unit price method, the Contractor agrees that he will make no claim for damages, anti- cipated profits, or otherwise on account of any differences which may be found between the quantities of work actually done, the ma- terial actually furnished under this contract and the estimated quantities contemplated and contained in the proposal; provided, however, that in case the actual quantity of any major item should become as much as 25% more than, or 25% less than the estimated or contemplated quantity for such items, then either party to this Agreement upon demand, shall be entitled to a revised consideration upon the portion of the work above or below 25% of the estimated quantity. A "Major Item" shall be construed to be any indivi- dual bid item included in the proposal that has a total cost equal to or greater than ten (10) percent of the total contract cost, computed on the basis of the proposal quantities and the contract unit prices. Any revised consideration is to be determined by agreement between the parties, otherwise by the terms of this Agree- ment, as provided under "Extra Work." GC-46. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the loth day of each month the Engineer shall prepare a statement showing as completely as practicable the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including ,1 GC - 15 up ON the last day of the preceding month; said statement shall also in- clude the value of all sound materials delivered on the site of the work that are to be fabricated into the work. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the 15th day of the. current month the total, amount of the Engineer's statement, less 10 percent of the amount thereof, which 10 percent shall be retained until final payment, and further less all previous .� payments and all further sums that may be retained by the Owner under the terms of this Agreement. It is understood, however, that `i in case the whole work be near to completion and some unexpected .w and unusual delay occurs due to no fault or neglect on the part of the Contractor, the Owner may --upon written recommendation of the Engineer --pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained percentage to the Contractor; or the Contractor at the Owner's op- tion, may be relieved of the obligation to fully complete the work, and thereupon, the Contractor shall receive payment of the balance due him under the contract subject only to the conditions stated I under "Final Payment." GC-47. USE OF COMPLETED PORTIONS The Owner shall have the right to take possession of , and use any completed or partially completed portions of the work, nonwithstanding the time for completing the entire work or such por- tions may not have expired but such taking possession and use shall ' not be deemed an acceptance of any work not completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. If such prior use increases the cost of or delays the work, the Contractor shall be entitled to such extra compensation, or extension of time, or both, as the Engineer „rk may determine. GC-48. FINAL COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE Within twenty (20) days after the Contractor has w given the Engineer written notice that the work has been completed, or substantially completed, the Engineer and the Owner shall in- spect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be completed or substantially completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Engineer shall issue to the Owner and the Contractor his Certificate of Completion, and thereupon it shall be the duty arc of the Owner within ten (10) days to issue a Certificate of Accep- tance of the work to the Contractor. GC-49. FINAL PAYMENT Upon the issuance of the Certificate of Completion, ..� the Engineer shall proceed to make final measurements and prepare final statement of the value of all work performed and materials '. furnished under the terms of the Agreement and shall certify same to the Owner, who shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 20th day after the date of the Certificate of Completion, the balance due the Contractor under the terms of this Agreement, provided he has fully performed his contractual obligations under the terms of this contract; and said payment shall become due in any event upon 1 GC - 16 said performance by the Contractor. Neither the Certificate of Acceptance nor the final payment, nor any provision in the Contract Documents, shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for ful- fillment of any warranty which may be required in the Special Pro- visions of the Speifications. GC-50. PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect himself from loss on account of: a. Defective work not remedied. .� b. Claims filed or reasonable evidence incidating possible filing of claims. C. Failure of the Contractor to make payments pro- perly to subcontractors or for material or labor. d. Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor -- provides a Surety Bond satisfactory to the Owner, which will protect the Owner in the amount withheld,.payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. GC-51. DELAYED PAYMENTS $' Should the Owner fail to make payment to the Con- tractor of the sum named in any partial or final statement, when payment is due, or should the Engineer fail to issue any statement on or before the date above provided, then the Owner shall pay to the Contractor, in addition to the sum shown as due by such state- ment, interest thereon at the rate of six (6) percent per annum, unless otherwise specified, from date due as provided under "Par- tial Payments" and "Final Payments", until fully paid, which shall fully liquidate any injury to the Contractor growing out of such delay in payment, but the right is expressly reserved to the Con- tractor in the event payments be not promptly made as provided un- der "Partial Payments", to at any time thereafter treat the contract as abandoned by the Owner and recover compensation, as provided under "Abandonment of Contract", unless such payments are withheld in accordance with the provisions of "Payments Withheld." GC-52. EXTRA WORK The term "Extra Work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Engineer or Owner to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work shown upon the plans, or reasonably implied by the specifications, and not covered by the Contractor's Proposal, except as provided under "Changes and Alter- ations" herein. GC - 17 It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all Extra Work under the direction of the Engineer when presented with a written Extra Work Order signed by the Engineer, subject, how- ever, to the right of the Contractor to require a written confirma- tion of such Extra Work Order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid the Contractor for performing said Ex- tra Work shall be determined by one or more of the following methods: Method A - By agreed unit prices; or Method B - By agreed lump sum; or Method C - If neither Method A nor Method B be agreed upon before the Extra Work is• commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the "actual field cost" of the work, plus fifteen (15) percent. In the event said Extra Work be performed and paid for under Method C, then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, and materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on ma- chinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such Extra Work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such Extra Work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Work- men's Compensation, and all other insurance as may be required by any law or ordinance, or directed by the Engineer or Owner, or by them agreed to. The Engineer may direct the form in which accounts of the "actual field cost" shall be kept and the records of these accounts shall- be made available to the Engineer. The Engineer may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise these matters shall be determined by the Con- tractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100 percent, unless otherwise specified, of the latest schedule of Equipment Ownership Expense adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practicable, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the Written Extra Work Order. The fifteen (15%) of the "actual field cost" to be paid the Contractor shall cover and compensate him for his profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the "ac- tual field cost" as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." GC - 18 No claim for Extra Work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by the Engineer. In case any orders or instructions, either oral or written, appear to the Contractor to involve Extra Work for which he should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, he shall make written request �w to the Engineer for written order authorizing such Extra Work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute Extra Work, or as to the payment therefor, and the En- gineer insists upon its performance, the Contractor 'shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep an accurate account of the "actual field cost" thereof, as provided under Method C. The Contractor will thereby preserve the right to submit the matter of payment to arbitration as herein - below provided. GC-53. TIME OF FILING CLAIMS It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Engineer within fifteen (15) days after the Engineer has given any directions, order or instruc- tion to which the Contractor desires to take exception. The Engi- neer shall reply to such written exceptions by the Contractor and render his final decision in writing. In case the Contractor should appeal from the Engineer's decision, any demand for arbitra- tion shall be filed with the Engineer and the Owner in writing within ten (10) days after the date of delivery to Contractor of the Engineer's final decision. It is further agreed that final „ acceptance of the work by the Owner and the acceptance by the Con- tractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any claim by either party, except where noted otherwise in the Contract Documents. GC-54. ARBITRATION All questions of dispute under this Agreement shall be submitted to arbitration at the request of either party to the dispute. The parties may agree upon one arbiter, otherwise, there shall be three, one named in writing by each party, and the third chosen by the two arbiters so selected; or if the arbiters fail to select a third within ten (10) days, he shall be chosen by a Dis- trict Judge serving the County in which the major portion of the project is located, unless otherwise specified. Should the party demanding arbitration fail to name an arbiter within ten (10) days of the demand, his right to arbitrate shall lapse, and the decision of the Engineer shall be final and binding on him. Should the oth- er party fail to choose an arbiter within ten (10) days, the Engineer shall appoint such arbiter. Should either party refuse or neglect to supply the arbiters with any papers or information demanded in writing, the arbiters are empowered by both parties to take ex parte proceedings. The arbiters shall act with promptness. The deci- sion of any two shall be binding on both parties to the contract, unless either or both parties shall appeal within ten (10) days GC - 19 from date of the award by the arbiters, and it is hereby agreed that each party shall have the right of appeal and all proceedings shall be according to and governed by arbitration statutes of Tex- as. The decision of the arbiters upon any question submitted to arbitration under this contract.shall be a condition precedent to any right of legal action. The decision of the arbiter or arbi- ters may be filed in court to carry it into effect. The arbiters, if they deem the case demands it, are authorized to award the party whose contention is sustained, such sums as they deem proper for the time, expense and trouble inci- dent to the Appeal, and if the Appeal was taken without reasonable cause, they may award damages for any delay occasioned thereby. The arbiters shall fix their own compensation, unless otherwise provided by agreement, and shall assess the cost and charges of the arbitration upon either or both parties. The award of arbi- ters must be made in writing, and shall not be open to objection on account of the form of proceedings or award. GC-55. ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within ten (10) days after written notifica- tion from the Owner, or the Engineer, or if the Contractor fails to comply with the orders of the Engineer, when such orders are consistent with the Contract Documents, then, and in that case, where a performance bond exists, the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work, and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. After receiving said notice of abandonment, the Con- tractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, togeth- er with any materials and equipment under contract for the work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety on the construction bond, or another contractor in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefor (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under "Extra Work"), it being under- stood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. Where there is no performance bond provided or in case the Surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion hereinbefore provided for,.within ten (10) days af- ter service of such notice, then the Owner may provide for comple- tion of the work in either of the following elective manners: a. The Owner may thereupon employ such force of men and use such machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials GC - 20 and supplies to said Contractor, and expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this con- tract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall recieve the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this con- tract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or b. The Owner under sealed bids, after five (5) days notice published one or more times in a newspaper having general circulation in the county of the location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefor. However, should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than what would have been the cost to complete under this contract, the Contractor and/or his Surety shall be credited therewith. When the work shall have been substantially complet- ed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and Certifi- cates of Completion and Acceptance, as provided hereinabove shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by the Engineer as being correct," shall then be pre- pared and delivered to the Contractor and his Surety, whereupon the Contractor and/or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement, within fifteen (15) days after the date of such Certificate of Completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner, had the work been completed by the Con- tractor under the terms of this contract; or when the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them tr the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or sL_plies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/ or his Surety fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time desig- nated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice there- of, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials, shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety at the respective addresses designated in this contract provided, however, that ac- tual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall CC - 21 be held at the risk of the Contractor and his' Surety subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the cre- dit of the Contractor and his Surety. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies, which remain on the work, and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, to their pro- per owners. The books on all operations provided herein shall be open to the Contractor and his Surety. GC-56. ABANDONMENT BY 014NER In case the Owner shall fail to comply with the terms of this contract, and should fail or refuse to comply with said terms within ten (10) days after written notification by the Con- tractor, then the Contractor may suspend or wholly abandon the work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools and equipment, and all materials on the site of work that have not been included in payments to the Contractor and have not been wrought into the work. And thereupon the Engineer shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the Contractor, which estimate shall include the value of all work actually completed by said Contractor (at the prices stated in the attached proposal where unit prices are used), the value of all partially completed work at a fair and equitable price, and the amount of all Extra Work performed at the prices agreed upon, or provided for by the terms of this contract, and a reasonable sum to cover the cost of any provisions made by the Con- tractor to carry the whole work to completion and which cannot be utilized. The Engineer shall then make a final statement of the balance due the Contractor by deducting from the above estimates all previous payments by the Owner and all other sums that may be retained by the Owner under the terms of this Agreement and shall certify same to the Owner who shall pay to the Contractor on or before thirty (30) days after the date of the notification by the Contractor the balance shown by said final statement as due the Contractor, under the terms of this Agreement. GC - 22 SPECIAL PROVISIONS 1. SCOPE OF WORK The work to be accomplished under these specifications, including the plans, consists of the construction of improvements to the water works system of the City of Lubbock, Texas. The water works improvements to be included in this project consist of construction of a ten million gal - Ion concrete reservoir, construction of a pump building, relocation of pumps, electrical work, yard piping, site grading, and all related work items required to provide a complete project as specified herein and as shown on the drawings. 2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS All work covered by this contract shall be done in accordance with the Contract Documents defined and described in General Conditions. The drawings included in these documents consist of those drawings titled "City of Lubbock, Texas - Water Works Improvements - Pump Station Number Ten and Reservoir," dated July 1979. 3. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION The construction covered by these specifications shall be "substantially completed" within 270 calendar days after the date of the written Notice to Proceed. The Contractor may commence work up- on receipt of the executed contract and shall commence work not later than the tenth (loth) day after the date of the Notice to Proceed, provided such Notice to Proceed shall not be issued prior to execu- tion of the Contract by Che Owner. The term "substantially completed", as defined in GENERAL CON- DITIONS, is further defined, for this project, to mean that degree of completion which, after all major structures and work are completed and all equipment is installed and operable, will permit continuous functioning of all elements of the project, in accordance with speci- fied requirements and without shut -downs for repairs or adjustments. Thus the date of substantial completion should coincide with the first day of the initial operation period of the last element of the project to be put into service. This may occur before all elements of the pro- ject have been fully completed and made ready for acceptance. However, for the project to be considered substantially complete, the work re- maining to be done before final acceptance shall consist only of minor construction items, cleanup, and minor adjustments to equipment, which do not interfere with operation. After the project has been substantially completed, the Contrac- tor shall dilligently prosecute the remainder of the work to final completion. The Certificate of Completion for the project will not be issued until all elements of the project have been fully completed, in accordance with the specified requirements, and all cleanup has been satisfactorily accomplished. SP-1 4• PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES Existing underground pipe lines, electric conduits and struc- tures are shown on the drawings. However, it is possible that all underground facilities are not shown or are not shown in the proper location. Therefore, it is necessary that the Contractor exercise more than the usual caution in all excavation operations, to the end that existing underground facilities are protected from damage. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all underground facilities, which are shown on the drawings or which can be located with reason- able effort or which are brought to the attention of the Contractor, in any manner. He will not be held responsible for such underground facilities, with respect to which he could, otherwise, have had no knowledge. The Contractor shall direct his efforts toward protecting existing facilities. 5. PROVISION CONCERNING ESCALATOR CLAUSES Proposals containing any condition which provides for changes in the stated bid prices due to increase in the costs of materials, labor, or other items required for this project, will be rejected and returned to the Bidder, without being considered. 6. AVAILABILITY OF PLANS 6-1 For Bidders It is intended that all parties with an interest in the type of work included in the project covered by these documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid or subbid. Documents may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders. Drawings for general distribution are half-size (12" x 18") but full-size (24" x 36") drawings are available. Complete sets of documents may be obtained from the Engineer upon request, ac- companied by a deposit of $30.00, for documents with half-size drawings, or $50.00, for documents with full-size drawings. The full amount of the $30.00 deposit will be returned, provided the documents are returned to the Engineer in good condition, within a reasonable time after the date for receiving bids. Upon return of documents with full-size draw- ings, under the conditions noted above, $30.00 of the $50.00 deposit will be refunded. Requests for documents should state the type of draw- ings desired. 6-2 For the Contractor The Contractor will be furnished five (5) sets each of full- size and half-size drawings and ten (10) sets of specifications for his use during construction. This shall include all plans and specifications furnished to material suppliers and subcontractors but does not include the executed contract copies. Plans and specifications for use during construction will be furnished directly only to the Contractor. The Con- tractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to sup- pliers, subcontractors, or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work. SP-2 Should additional sets of documents be desired, they may be - purchased, by the Contractor only, at the following prices; Half-size Drawings $ 5.00 per set Full-size Drawings $20.00 per set Single Sheets of Drawings $ 1.00 per sheet Specifications $ 5.00 per set ., 7. PAYMENT t- Payment for the work will be made on the basis of the Proposal on which award is made and which is included in the Contract. All payments will be made in accordance with the provisions of GENERAL CONDITIONS governing such payments, as modified by the provision con- cerning equipment, as distinguished from materials, immediately fol- lowing, and as modified by Paragraph SP-26. The statement, or estimate, of total value of work done and ma- terials on hand, prepared for each partial payment, shall include ninety-five percent (95%) of the invoice price of all equipment to be incorporated in the work, which is on hand on the last day of the pay- ment period. Thus partial payments will include 95% of the invoice price of equipment on hand less the percentage retainage withheld in accordance with Paragraph SP-26. Equipment items will be carried, on . the partial payment statements, as "On Hand" until they are installed and operated, with all required Maintenance and Operation Manuals, Parts Lists, Installation Drawings, and other required data, delivered to the Engineer. They will then be carried as work done, subject to the specified retainage, until all equipment has met all required per- formance tests and final acceptance is made on the entire work. 8. AFFIDAVIT OF BILLS PAID Prior to final acceptance of the project by the City of. Lubbock Texas, the Contractor shall execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials, and incidentals incurred in the construction of this project have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending of which he has been notified. 9. PROTECTION AGAINST LOSS TO THE OWNER CAUSED BY DELAYED COMPLETION Since delayed completion will put the Owner to additional expense for engineering, inspection, administration and other services during such period as the work may be in progress beyond the time agreed upon for completion, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for such additional expenses, in the amount of Five Hundred and 00/100 Dollars ($500.00) for each day that substantial completion of the project is delayed beyond the time agreed upon for such completion, provided that due allowance shall SP-3 be made for such extension of time as may be granted under the provisions of GENERAL CONDITIONS for extensions of time. However, it is specifi- cally provided that mere failure of a supplier to deliver materials or equipment will not be considered as grounds for an extension of time, except when such failure is due to one or more of the circumstances set out in GENERAL CONDITIONS as grounds for granting an extension of time. Reimbursement to the Owner for such delayed completion shall be made by withholding, permanently, from the Contractor's total compensa- tion the amount of such reimbursement, determined as provided herein. In addition to this reimbursement) -the Contractor shall indemnify the Owner and save and hold him harmless against any and all claims,lia- bility, damages, causes of action, recoveries and expenses of every kind resulting in any manner (directly or indirectly), from the failure of the Contractor to complete the work within the time agreed upon, pro- vided such failure to complete is due to the acts, or failure to act, of the Contractor, and is not due to fires, floods, strikes, lockouts, acts of God, or other circumstances not under control of the Contrac- tor. 1_0. SALES TAX ON CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT The Owner is an exempt organization under the Limited Sales, Ex- cise and Use Tax Act, and all materials, supplies and other tangible personal property incorporated into the project or used or consumed in the Performance of the contract are, therefore, exempt from such tax. Bidders are referred to Ruling No. 95-0.09 of the Comptroller of Pub- lic Accounts for information concerning the procedures required for claiming and obtaining exemption from this tax in connection with this project. 11. MATERIALS AND WORKMA NS H I P The intent of these specifications is that only materials of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifica- tions may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not re- lieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of High quality and protecting them adequately until incorporated in the structure. The presence or absence of the Engineer or his representative on the construction site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsi- bility of complying with these specifications. The specifications for materials and methods set out the minimum standards of quality which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. 12. LINES AND GRADES 12-1 General The Engineer will provide horizontal and vertical control points for use by the Contractor in laying out the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the .points after they are set by the Engineer. SP-4 Items to be constructed in this project have been located on the drawings with respect to the east and south boundaries of the project site. The Engineer will establish lines along the east and south bounda- ries of the project site when the Contractor is to begin work. The Con- tractor shall advise the Engineer at least one week in advance of the date that he will need the lines. The vertical control point for this project is an Y chiseled on the northeast curb return at the intersection of Eighty -Second Street A- and Memphis Avenue. The location and elevation of the point are shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. +� The Engineer will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at the Contractor's re- quest, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the plans and specifi- cations. 13. LIMITATION OF WORK AREA The entire area within the project site as delineated on.the draw- ings is available to the Contractor for his operations. All of the Con- tractor's temporary buildings and material and equipment storage shall be located within the limits of the project site. 14. WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for providing all water required for construction of the project. 15. ELECTRIC POWER The Contractor shall make his own provisions for his electrical requirements and shall pay for all electricity consumed during the con- struction of the project. The Owner will pay for all electricity con- sumed by permanently installed equipment connected to his electrical system at the plant. 16. SANITARY FACILITIES The Contractor shall provide adequate toilet facilities for the use of his workmen and shall maintain such facilities in a clean and h sanitary condition throughout the construction period. Such facilities shall be conveniently located for use of the workmen and the entire area shall be maintained in a clean and sanitary condition. After completion of the work, all temporary toilet facilities shall be removed from the site. SP-5 17. COST BREAKDOWN Prior to the date for preparing the first Application for Payment, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer a complete breakdown of his contract prices for all lump sum bid items, showing the amounts assigned to the various trades, equipment units and structures, in sufficient detail for use in preparation of partial payment Applications. This breakdown shall be prepared after consultation with the Engineer, and it shall meet the Engineer's approval. Such breakdown will be used through- out the construction period for preparation of partial payment Applica- tions. 18. BARRICADES, WATCHMEN AND SAFETY MEASURES The Contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work, as may be necessary. Barricades shall be painted in two contrast- ing colors and, from sunset to sunrise, at least one light shall be maintained at each barricade. The work small be carried on, at all times, in a manner which will minimize danger to the public or the work- men. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due.to failure of barricades, signs, lights and watchmen to pro- tect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be im- mediately removed and replaced by the Contractor at his own cost and ex- pense. The Contractor's responsibility for the maintenance of barri- cades, signs, lights and for providing watchmen, shall not cease until the date of Engineer's Certificate of Acceptance. 19. ENGINEER'S FIELD OFFICE The Contractor shall furnish an office at the site of the work for use by the Engineer. The building shall be provided immediately after work on the project is begun and shall'remain in place until the project is accepted as complete, unless its earlier removal is author- ized by the Engineer. It shall be floored and roofed, weather -tight and constructed in a workmanlike manner. All windows shall be screened .and a screen door shall be provided in addition to the regular door. It is contemplated that the building will be constructed of the same kind of material as that used by the Contractor for his office and job buildings. It shall be an independent unit, detached from any of- fice, storage or warehouse building occupied by the Contractor. The building shall be for the sole use of the Engineer and the inspecting force. Should the building be destroyed or damaged in any manner, ex- cept through causes due to negligence of the occupying engineering force, the Contractor shall immediately restore it to its original state. Upon the completion of the project the building will remain the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the project site. SP-6 The building shall not be less than 120 square feet in floor area and shall have not less than two (2) glass windows and one (1) door. A table not less than 3' wide and 6' long shall be provided. The Contractor shall provide a suitable heater operated either by electricity or LP gas and shall provide fuel for the heater. GUARANTEES The Contractor warrants and guarantees that all work, materials - and equipment will be of good quality and free from faults or defects and in accordance with the Contract Documents. Upon receipt of writ- ten instructions from the Owner, he will correct all faults and defi- ciencies in the work and remedy all variations from the Contract Docu- ments, which appear within one year after substantial completion, at no cost to the Owner, and will also comply with the terms of any spe- cial guarantees provided in the Contract Documents. The Owner will give prompt written notice of observed defects. The warranties and guarantees provided for in this paragraph shall be in addition to any other remedies provided by the Contract Documents or by law. If the Contractor, after notice, fails to proceed promptly to comply with the terms of this guarantee, the Owner may have the work corrected and the Contractor and his Surety shall be liable for all expenses incurred in such correction. 21. PROGRESS SCHEDULE Prior to the first partial payment, the Contractor shall fur- nish to the Owner an estimated construction progress schedule in a form satisfactory to the Owner. The progress schedule shall show the proposed dates of commencement and completion of each of the various items of work and the anticipated amount of each monthly payment that will become due the Contractor in accordance with the progress sched- ule. 22. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR COMPLETE FACILITY Attention of all Bidders is called to the fact that manufac- turers may not necessarily include, in their proposals for equipment to be furnished, all the materials or devices required for a complete, usable facility. It is also probable that equipment offered will re- quire some change in the structure in which the equipment will be in- stalled, or in supporting members, electrical and mechanical acesso- ries, piping or miscellaneous work required for the complete installa- tion. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design of any such changes. Complete drawings of proposed changes shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to construction. SP-7 It is the intent of these specifications that a complete work- able facility, functioning in accordance with the specified purposes, be furnished and constructed by the Contractor for the prices stated in the Contract. Therefore, it is the direct responsibility of the Contractor to furnish, install and construct the complete facilities required by the plans and specifications and to take account of all subsidiary requirements of the equipment furnished to the end that the entire facility functions in accordance with the specified requirements. 23. ORIGIN OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT All structural steel, reinforcing steel, mechanical equipment and electrical equipment shall be produced or manufactured within the United States. 24. PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF FACILITY The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, all means of con- struction, and any and all parts of the work, whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date of the Engineer's Certificate of Completion. 25. CLEANUP During construction, the work area and each major element of the plant shall be kept as free of construction debris as practicable. Care shall be exercised to remove all debris from tanks and pipe lines, parti- cularly where such debris might damage equipment if not removed prior to placing the facilities in operation. After completion of construction, all structures and the entire work area shall be cleaned of all debris, and such debris shall be removed from the Owner's property. Disposal of the debris shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 26. SPECIAL PROVISION REGARDING RETAINAGE The following special provisions regarding retainage shall apply to this contract in lieu of the provisions in Paragraph GC-46: (a) Retainage shall be equal to 10% of the total amount of the Engineer's statement until construction is 50% complete; (b) After construction is 50% complete, retainage shall be reduced to 5% of the total amount of the Engineer's statement provided that the Contractor is making satisfactory progress and there is no specific cause for greater withholding; ti4W.11 (c) After the project has been accepted as substantially coin- pleted as defined in Paragraph 3, SPECIAL PROVISIONS, the retained amount may be further reduced below 5% to only that amount which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is necessary to assure prompt completion of the project. However, the retainage will not be reduced below 1% until final completion and acceptance of the project. ._. (d) A cash bond or irrevocable letter of credit may be accepted in lieu of all or part of the cash retainage required under items 2 or 3 above. 27. SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS Subsurface soil explorations were conducted by Terra Testing, Inc. Three test holes were drilled at the project site. A copy of the soils report prepared by Terra Testing, Inc., is included in the Appendix of these Specifications. The approximate locations of the borings are shown in the report. The borings were made in order to secure information for use during and the design of the project. The fact that the Boring Logs are included herein does not constitute a warranty by the Owner or the Engineer as to .� the subsurface conditions which might be encountered during construction of the project. It is the responsibility of the Bidder to satisfy himself as to the subsurface conditions. 28. WAGE RATES Attention is called to the fact that there must be paid on the project not less than the general prevailing rates of wages as set out below; however, the inclusion of such minimum schedule of wages does not release the Contractor from compliance with any State Wage Law that may be applicable. The Contractor must abide by the Wage and Hour Laws of the State of Texas and may not pay less than the rates legally prescribed z.. or as set forth herein, whichever is higher. SP-9 DLCISSD)r 1X1.�fA?R.4D6Z F.Q4Iii'EI�. QPWRATOP.S OUP 2 oUP 3 UP L � 5 ,oaP7 _ UP 7 u 7 a : Fa;c_ t Sala n*�fr 9~ktie brQc• p.r�...r. $12.44 71 10.3% a l.SI U.15 n 10.11. 1. GZ 11.22E 71 l0. 32 1. r, la.51 7S 1D,3: a 1.m 10.04 7% 10. 31 A 1. n , E.13 7% 10.3 a2.69 7� iO.r, s 1.9% 13.13 7% . 32 ¢ L 9% 1: lSar�inee doing aRrrlt, erJ mac2'.'se bandlf.r� < 2r7, caDlx ya,.>,'r-*n, bxlicoptr_- +3:�i.-rs s?a,-'lAs to CMa bore OtTP 2. AI.'1 types of ones, 7 s of l iaet. cableways, @-ss'linrs, apntones, all t--,es of eba"Is, rr+cl¢, txx^�� la, tmnabI mara;mes, iat With the tovets, vcr2 21E ava:, all V overeat ¢mtss, build- koiets (d_-u*le d..t=,Cedalla, �I t~;c'.�oes in ts�^�el, all frnnt and rs 3-i c.7. =t o.:=, L» 6crz ;�, P, lPS tf-,,, ba::Xhoes, that Czptuiits, teb plsrt epe ate (cc�e eke) d-i11sx_i ooa2aL^nd *ia*s y Q J 1]a, xory 20 ft. L� ^t and orer zz-hh' to + 2: Caare7ors, buudir.g Raiat! (c;z,6 �� e=r aril tmxMicrul1r., r_adere, him er lov pressure bail wc11 drillan, ball- ^zsra r.0 „tors, asF.halt pleat ^-, -"lb> e (high grade f4,18bin ), itol: witch type t:c-r_her, all l- 4 ,r3er j-ii�r, yds., rpchsaio-veldere, to= patrols, t^'411 b`iper If atr'.nced suta�v ,;rri',Le,.00rn drill :o--kUft tzmkv tinder 20 ft. 2L fix^."n e '_az Ire &bmm ,,-... L.- valti=c F:a+-ti+ieiie-, -2 `2•?iL'S.C, Y'S.�L'.�.',FJI'gj�"'"^+..e.6 b&_$tj!'s, f tractors, form I. grade-s 13aera1e rr�cr+-res, readniahizig== + t tic br st'ng oacir n-c zcIlers, me -AM ;!ulVoriai;;g Ir, pars= 1= a, eeetL'�C' ar, t (far j�ler aacsiiiirmt), «ac"I V-4 . to atv a truck Cilan drk ha_ -Ps Cp=Wa :a bmaaab �^ &-II bxl. •w ? 7: t12 adt� Loans (4sc3r.�.irS i���'�. Via, eUo� 140 ft. and r +. MOUP -A: 150 ft. =A ever GP�GP 200 ft. csd ever a. iy fL�lid le: My Tees's Day, ftat^:+sl bry, Zadrp¢n oe Day. Labor 21ey, !� agiving Dal. and C)-sistu s DRY. 3rs dad toss o 4=90? works the Uy be - on sad a.^ter tha halid.V. SCPERMLIS DECISIM STATE: Texas COI27TIES: Stetevide DECISION NO.: MM-40% DAT°; Date of publication Sumrsedes Decision No, SX78-4025, data' ?Urch 31, 197E, in 43 rR 13739. D:$=u,TYICN CT WD2 : See "Ar" Covered by Various UMes" E 1 VM 2 OIH 3 zaq,- 4 W. r 5 (s.•ic l4ak I..k uc b.c�c bu 6t..AT I�N..ic I Ftw lFt.o I� - S 3.On z 3 DO $ - 3 95 � Air Tool lien •apbalt Heateraar, 3.95 3.30 3. 4.V 3,50 3.55 .00 j Asphalt Raker 4.45 4.15 .70 i Asphalt Sbovalsr 3.00 3, 2.65 2.95 11I satchina Plant Scalemen .05 4,50 4,2 3.60 4.00 Eatterbccer­d Getter 3,QO 3.65 L65 3.50 Carp --.ter .255.35 4.5n 4,65 4.55 Car,wtor Belpar .30 4.00 4.0n 3.60 3.5( Garr_retm rinisher (Paving) 5.25 4.25 4,25 4.25 (}moats ri nisher Helper (Paving) 7 3.35 3.25 3.03 1 3.45 C-c,cmte rinirher (Structures) .Sa 4.5.0 4.45 4,15 I 4,10 0mc-r,ete I:ainher Helper (FLrnctures) Al 3.50 4.00 3.6C 3.50 C.•acrete Rubber - - 9.1 3.5C bl act rl at sn 6.75 7.50 ... 7.25 31setri I an Helper 3.8o - 3.' 3.50 ?irc�an ( - - - Pcr, builder (Stracturaa) 5 4.65 4.60 5 4.55 1v,r- Builder Helper (S-ruczurec) 4 - 4.00 35 3.50 Pam+ UDn .. (Paving ®d Osrb) 4 - - 5 f 4.00 `etas S1t^ter (Paving and Garb) Q 4.70 4.E5 5 + 4.15 Iota :.suer nol.per (paving and Omrb) 3 4,00 4.00 I 3. 1 3. so v Pore tatter (Scrtaros) 5.50 4.65 4.1 4.40 po:,V Latt.7 6slper (Struaa=es) 4.10 1.60 1 3.5 3.60 tad.rac, C.� 3.00 3.00 2.65 2.95 Leboror. Drility liu,. 3.EA 3.70 3.30 3.20 tLaml.oia Snilder. Dick 4.00 3.00 3.25 4.C5 ' c 5.00 4.50 4.25 4.7C 4 acbralt Helper .3 4,65 3.65 3.35 4.DO GEler 4.50 4,05 3. Do 4.05 QTml 4.00 3.7 3.85 3.55 I`a:.ntsr (St nctnra) 4. bO - 6. 5.00 4.90 i Ftiater lslpes (Sttactmraa) - - 3. 4,00 3,CO S!ilsdri.tr�a - - 3.40 4.75 ripalsyer 4.90 A-00 5 3.50 .50 31,peleyer flelpar 4.35 3.50 50 3.00 01) 1PTu tic 11artarasm, - n0 rv,"are,mn 5.00 5.00 .50 4.50 4 5 .airr'a--nun Helper - - 3.50 3.45 2. 5 F..aiaforcing Steel Se. --ter (raving) 4,35 - - 3.00 3. Rtinforcing StetI Sattar (2ruct-xes 4.90 A. 4.4C 3.80 4. leinforciag Steel Setter Aelpet 3.25 - 3.5C 3.25 3. j Steel i:orket (Structural) - - 3,75 3.50 4.15 ' Stoat ibrksr &alper (Stzvctnral) - - - 3.5n O.ci.Nr v..arr TX78-4094 Sign Erector Sign Erector Helper Spreader Box !tan Swavper Po.rr Egsipaent Opersterer Asphalt Distributor Asphalt Paving Xachine Br000 or Sweeper Operator Dulldoser, 150 HP and Lees Bulldozer, over 150 HP Cone nets Paving Curing Kaehins Concrete Paving Finishing Machine Concrete Paving Form Grader Concrete Paving Camg Vibrator Concrete Paving Grinder Concrete Psviag Joint Yachins Concrete Prvieg Joint Sealer Concrete Paving Loogitvdinal Float Concrete Paving Mixer eb Concrete Paving Sae Concrete Paving Spreader F� Paving Sub Grader I--' Crane, Clamshall, Bac*hoe, Derrick, Dr4gline, Shovel (lose tbon 1h M Crane, Clarmhell, Backhoe, Derrick, Drag'.ire, S.io'vel (14 CT and Over) Crusher or Screening Plant Operator Elevating Grader Form loader Foundation Drill Operator (Crawler )bunted) Fo,andsti m Drill Operator (Track )bum t ed ) Poundatioo Drill Operator Heloer Front End Loader (2' CY and Less) Front End Loader (Over . CY) Fbist (Double D-ue and Leas) Mixer (Over 16 CP) Ydxer (16 CF and Laos) Motor Grader Operator. ?Ins, Grade Motor Grader Operator fuse Crete Par 2 ONE 1 ZWE 2 �'Z 3 Zan 4 ZOWE 5 5.61c U.I. ecic B.sie B.+le K_fy Nearly ht I N.vdy Nasrl Ra+ec Rsiss .ee Race. I R 4.00 9- 9 4 9 3.75 S 3 35 3.50 - 3. 3.25 4.80 4.40 4. 3.90 .50 .25 3.75 - 3.40 .50 .75 4.20 4.25 3.55 4.00 05 4.25 4.25 3.70 4.30 .85 4.00 3.65 3.75 3.50 .8 4.10 4.00 4.00 4.00 4.50 4.50 4.50 4.50 7 - - 4,40 4,00 4.35 - 4.80 - 5 - 4.60 S - - 4.10 4 4.00 4.50 - - - 4.35 • 4.25 - - .1 %00 4.40 4.30 4.00 I 5.25 5.00 5.00 5,00 4.50 4-35 4,10 75 3\4. .1 4.00 4.10 - - - 5.35 5.85 4. 4.00 I 6.73 6.50 5 - 4.00 4.DO - 4.65 4.7.5 .95 3.90 5.Z5 4.70 .50 4.55 .00 3.10 4.65 - - - 5.50 S.SO 5.00 S,ZD5:05 500 4Z5 450 A.ci.c._ z..arr TX78-4094 Power Egoipamt Operators (Coot'd)1 ,Roller, Steel Wheel (Plant -rim Pavearants) Roller, Steel Wheel (Other -Flat Wheel a Taa4lag) 1e11sr, Prraatie (Self-Propellad) Serspers (17 CT and Leas) Serupera (0eer I7 CT) Self-Propalled Hsao6i aLde Bnoe TraKter (Crawler Type) 150 HP 6 Lees Tractor (Crawler Type) over 150 H7 hector (Pnegmat.10 80 HP i Lase Tractx (Pneumatic) aver 84 HP Traveling FAxrr Trenching Mao.hine. light TreanbdN hoobina. Seavy me&= Drill, Baring Maeii:u or Post Role Driller Operator TrwA nriv+rsx_ Riesla Axle, Light 9ingle Axle. Rorvy Tandaa Intl• or Seadtrailer Losmbvy Tr c-y4* :loch Vibrator )ten (Band Type) LLd, kwm (Truck Scala) Welder %ride]/ Helpat Pet, 3 rA C;. W .A LE i MIE 2 �!E I i =,M 4 6-4. a.m. sic B.cic Baas Nwd7 "-,IT t N..rlr I Meu>�i R.re R.>.rc R e Rees R n .35 3.50 3.80 3.50 j 3.00 .1 3.90 3.60 I 3.35 3.DO 3.50 3.55 3.30 3.25 4.00 4.00 4. 3.75 4.50 4-50 4. 4.50 - 3.50 3.00 4 3.25 3.50 3.Z5 3 3.50 3.35 30 3.55 4 4.30 3.80 .80 4.Z5 3 3.70 3.75 25 3.00 4.00 4,00 3. 5 3.25 4.25 ♦.OQ A. 3.10 4.25 4.35 3.7 3.50'I • - - 4. 4.73 4.10 4.00 4.00 4.00 1 4. 3.50 3. 3.35 3.15 4.14 4,D5 3.7 4.11 - 3. 3.45 5.W 3.60 i 4,05 00 3.50 4.25 - .75 - 3. 3.05 - - - ( 3. I 3.50 3.50 3.25 3.05 5.50 5.25 4.65 4,60 4.60 - I 1 3.25 I - i 3.50 I I ( .3 50 " I i I I 1 Cn b I N B.Nnrae Nafa.e CX7b-4094 �ovrr Lgcion� Operators (Cont•d): Fuller, Steri eel (Plant-M x PeoRemnts) Aoller, SLealAh\�CY) t l%eel or Ta-pin Yoder, Pn--=xtiled) Scrapers (17 CT Scrapers (Over 1Teif-Propalled H fide Bur Tractor (Crreler Type) 150 FP Lees Tractor (Crooner Type) we_- 150 Tractor (PSessatic) 80 EP sad Ina Tractor (P-.a tic) over BO EP Travrlita Mixer Trooc.hdng FAchlne, Light - Trer.chiag Machine, Eaavy Qagca Drill. Boring haehine wr Frei Bole Driller Cpsator Track Drivers: M r-gle Jr -le. Light &Angle Axle, Earvy Tar_ida b1e. or &miteailer _ Lat?u�-rl.nat Iran dt-ldx Vinrh Ythratvr Ken '(Prod ¢7pe) Waig?mn (Truck:Zcalu) Welder . Helder RalFer tyn 12 Tam 16 , , Soak wale 5e0c bask s:e *--4y ' +fe..1y h.-IT K--Hr N«',r Rsa+ Rea. Ee+.a 1 Rs*as I Rr+.s S I 4.75 4.50 5.00 -.ES 4.50 3.B5 4.50 0 >-A_W _ 4.10 4.25 A. A.55 DR„^ISIOti NO. :X79r 4O94 , Page 13 ARrA COVER- PR VARIMS Za7-5 ZYt 1 - Archer, Armstrong, Drylor, Briscoe, Carson,, Cas-tro, CAileree R, Cl.,, Collf^.Fawrtt, Da21a::, Deaf SeSt`, Donley, Gray, Fall, iimnrford, VArdem-., Rartlry, Restpltiil, Retehinam, Lipscomb, Y4-itre e, Yriore, Och:ltree, GlcL*. , !=a=er, Potter, Rena;l, Ro Derts, Mnermu ' &vim'ler, Sfiseler, kichi u 6 Wilbarger Cmntiss D=S.RIr- n OF 5 :: Rervy (escludfr.g tunnels 6 doss) and F4;h.we Cmatructicn. (Goo? not include bui id lr.;, structures in rest area Ftt`jects) and Pn Ing 6 Ur_litfes Inc!denti_ to General Building Construction. Tti■ rage daterrlr..ation does not apply to any rest — tisl er-.z.-tctIm (s!role family hoses end garde. tTpe roa-tx:ta up to and imciudir.g 4 stcrlsa). W:T , - Bdley, 5--3-. C-"Irar,, Cottle, Cmaby, Davy, D!chcns, Ti sherd Floyd, 7oard, Gaines, Garza, Hale, Hsmkel 1, Hockisy, Jones, Rent, FSr.g, Fnor-, L mb, Iubuo::., Lynn, Dlotlmy, Scurry, Sbackelford, Stephens, Stonewall, Tanya, Mmclac^x, Yoakum 6 _Young Cos. MY-M.IP^I0i OF :ran.,: Heaay (L-.tlud'_ng tuzntle 6 Lana) and hlghvey Ccnstrv:tior. (coos not include tr:ilrs c6 ot-vcteres in rest ersa p=ojectci and Pa:-inr L Uci"ti ee I: Jdencal to ener Gal Building Z. ostructiza on. This wage deter-tim does not s;'ply to an, ree!dcntial construction (single faryly hones and garden type spartaents up to and 1ntl=*ing 4 stories). ZME 3 - Andress, Brow , Callahan, Coke, Colee n, Ce�che, Coocho, Crme, Crockett, Last - lend, Srr r, Erath, Glasscock, Rnvrrd, It!on, F1-iblt, Leering, %.rtin, Ye Cul ioct., li-arc, lidln.-id, YSLls, �_tchal i, Bolen, 7? aaan,, Y-mela, San, Saba, Sellalch-, StarljrLL, Sutton, Green, Vptm, Yard 6 Winkler Counties L?-5_7'S Ti InR OF I%.=: Yerw (excluding tunnelt 6 da-as nd Pyghway Conetructfon (does not include tullding structures in rest area projects) and Paving 6 Utilities Incidental to General building Cecutrnctim. T:.is sage dete�:n.t:m does not apply to any residercial oeasr tracts a-. (single fa 17 bass a:sC gari c. :ype spa --Men ,ts up tc and including 4 stories) (fib Er. evscvr, D-lberanz, Ll Pram-. Rod mpc t, .7aff Aavis, P+ms, Pmtidio, Leaves - 6- Tarrvl2 C ,miss 0! VritC: EiglFr Cao scrvLCm (car not include building structures ir east eras prrjacta) and Pavino, 6 Utilities Incidental to General Building Constructim. T1ie tmCa d*tcTlenation does not apply to cy re Lideital tonstruction (dnglm folly bones And Sa_-des type ape. -tarts cp to and ixluding 4 stories). 'slot to 9e rmed for Imilities Incidents: t.o Genxral Buildin; Construction St L1 Peso County RAT- 5 si sales u, End r_a, N a-, Canal. Ditwit, Adward a, Frio, Cuadalupe, Lend:11, S:er, , Zi�ay, I.a Sane,-isvL_ek, MI-M-11sn, Vadiru, Anal, Uvalde, Val Varde, 1Y_laar. 6 Uvaia cca. p:SCRIl=OH O? Lr312': B.rvy (eseludiag taanels 6 dares) and Fiighvty Construetlm (Seea not includa bu.ild.ing scrucc.ux-z it rest area projects) -d Paving L U-111tiem Incidental to C.=a-el Building Caaatructim. T'his wage dete-rmdn.tion does not apply to mrc res:dentlal ematroctim (aieale fes:ily hou-g acid garden type apartsrmis up to ne includira 4 stories) ap W 110DIFICATIUtIS P. 25 DECTSIOY M78-4114 - tiod. A4 Safie f rinq• Benefits Payments Educafl an (43 PR 4920E - October 20, 1975) Hov,ly Lubbock County, Texas Rates H 3 W Pensions I vacation andor Appr. Tr, Chance: Asbestos workers $10.50 .80 .95 .07 Carpenters 9.50 .48 .50 .01 Ironworkers: Structural; Ornamental; Rein- forcing 9.40 .55 1.00 .10 All ironworkers on Jobs 30 miles or more from the city of Lubbock 9.525 .55 1.00 .10 Power Equipment Operators: Group 1 8.175 .40 .625 40 Group 2 9.075 .40 .625 .10 Group 3 9.475 .40 .625 .10 DE^ISI1N IM78-4115 - Hod. 93 (43 FR 56408 - December 1, 1978) Collin, Da1Taa,,Denton, Ellis, _ Grayson, Rood,Fnant, Johnson, d Kaufman, Palo Pinto; -Rockwall, I � Tarrant 6 Wise Cos., Texas^..,,�� t•• Chan!e: Bricklayers 6 stonemasons:�•�..� Lone 1 10.10 Carpenters: Zone 1 - Carpen 10.43 .55 `~ .005 1(iiiwwrights 10.83 .55 .40 .005 P ledrivermen 10.93 .55 .40 .005 metal workers - Zone Z 10.86 7 DE LcS ,, atdv77- ;n83 - Mod. • 47 (42 FR 53172 - September 30, 1977) Statewide, "deco Virginia Change_ ._ Brlcklav`cs b Stanemasdns: Area 2 Area 3 Area 6 Electricians: Area 1 Wiremen Cable Splicerst* Area 3 Wiremen Cable Splicers ° Area 6 Contracts under $I2,000; Wiremen Contracts ovpY 912,000: Wiremen Cable SpI"Seers Area 7 Wiremen Cable Splicers Area 8 WIrenen Cable Splicers Area 9 W! remelt Cable Splicers Area 10 Wiremen Cable Snl icers Area 11 Wiremen Area 12 Wiremen Area 13 Wtrcmen 7,onworker Arca 3 Area 6 '.1 nc Xvnstnutton: Ar 3 incmon b Onc•rntnr, f ;�i,tc Splicore C rnnnd:oon FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL 44, NO. 4-FRIDAY, JANUARY 5, 1979 110DIFICAT1011S P. 26 Baste Hourly Fringe Benefits Payments Ed.c.4i e Rates H 3 W Pensions Vacation ont7ar Appr. Tr. 11.53 .55 .50 a 03 11.09 .65 .62 .02 11.25 .60 / f 13.00 .50 3"+.27 04 14.30 .50 37+.27 .04 10.05 .50 3 .52 2.02 .03 11.055 .50 3'+.52 2.02 .03 6.05 .5 3?+1.02 1.52 .02 .50 3�+1.02 1.52 .02 �10.45 10.60 .50 3%+1.02 1.52 .02 11.10'/ .50 37+1.27 1.27 .04 11/5,, .50 3";-1.27 1.27 .04 �1.82 A1 .50 3"+,82 1.02 .04 2.41 -50 3%+.82 1.02 .04 12.27 .50 37+.82 1.02 .04 12.88 .50 3;;+,82 1.02 .04 12.02 .50 3'+.82 1.02 .04 12.62 .50 3';+,82 1.02 .04, 10.90 .80 32+,66 1% 10.90 .80 3'+.60 17 11.50 .90 3-.+,60 1% 11.17 .90 1.?0 .01 10.05 .70 .75 3 1Y.00 .GO 3'i1.27 1.27 12.10 .f;0 l't1.27 1.?1- 8.50 Ao ,�I_ 7 1.11 I100IFICATITIS P. 11 D!?^ISrCW 07X78-4C68 - Y4d. 06 Basle Fringe Be Af. Poyments (43 FR 38287 - August 25, 1978) Hourly I 8doearion Wichita. County, Texas Rates H & M Prrsions Vacation end/or fl Apo,. Tr. Chance Sollemakerb, S11.05 .80 1.00 .02 D"CTSI^V t?,X78-4C40 -Hod. 93 (43 FR 31364 - Septa.:.ber 15. 1978) Bowie County, Texas Change: Boile:makers 11.05 .80 1.00 ,02 DBClSIC9 ITX78-4091 . Hod. 03 (43 FR 41365 - September 15, 1973) , Cregg County, Texas Boi:ermakers 11.05 .80 1.00 02 D'_-TSIC!i YrX78-4095 - Mod. 93 (43 FR 43241 - September 22,.1978) Ector & MidIand Cos., Texat Change: i. �1 Bolle:,akcre / .1.05 .80 1.00\., .02 CEC7S'TC' 91'X?8-4096 - Mod. 47 , (43 FR 43242 'September 22, 1978) Bell, Bosqu/, Corycll, Falls, Hill 6 McLennan Cos., Texan \ _ Chan B Iding Construction: \ Boilermakers 11.05 .80 1.00 ,Q2� ECI SIOI: eM7A.4114 - `Sod f 3 (43 FQ 49ZG8 - October 20, 1978) Lubbock County, Texas Chanpe: Boilermakers 11.05 .80 1.00 .02 HOOIFICATIOIIS P.12 DECIS107 M78-4115 - Hod.' 71 (43 FR 55408 - December 1, 1978 Collin, Dallas, Menton, Ellis, Grayson, Food, Hunt, Johnson, Kaufman, Palo Pinto, Rockwall, Tarrant & Wise Cos., Texas Change Boilermaker$ EIevator constructocS; Y.echanics Helpe7s FED&RAL REGISTER, VOL 43, NO. 242-FR1DAY, DECEMBER 15, 1978 Ba sie Ha dy Fringe fleaefits Payment, Education Rates H & M Pensions Vacation and/or Appr. Tr. $I1.05 .30 1.00 .02 9.91 .745 .35 47.+a+b .02 707JR .745 .35 4'/.+a+b .02 M MODIFICATIONS P. 14 ?STIR+ M78-4012 - Ind, 15 Basle Fringe Benefits Pay,nents (4 P1 38278 - August 25, 1978) Hoorir Edo..tion Braz s County, Texas Rates H & W Pea aiens Vocation and/or Appr. Tr. Change• Electric ans $12.25 .55 1 10.. .06 D_CISIJ ^T1:78.�4084 - lied, 05 (43 F^ 33201 - 1978) Galveston & He..Texas %Aju25, +.lectricians Co. 12.25 .55 107,1 .06 p:;ISI V 4777R-40?5 - H, 0 -(43 .P, 332S3 - August 25,,1978) Travis County, Texas Chance: Elect icians & cable atlicera 11.50 Line Construction: Linemen 11'56 ;60 3z 1/2: Groundmen 6:16 .60 37. 11M Groundmen (1st year) 5.78. 60 37. DE.ISSI'N 4Ty.73-4037 - 11nd, #4 - \ (43 Y% 38285 - August 25, 1978) A mstrong, Carson, Castro, Child- ress, Collin inmrth, Dallam, Deaf Smith, Donley, Gray, Hans - ford, Hartley, Hemphill, lbtch- inacn, Lipscomb, more, Ochil- tree, Oldham, Potter, Randall,. nobarts, Sherman, Staixher & Wheeler Cos., Texaa�/'�\ Chanote: Electricians: Zone 1 - 21 triciana 11.08 .60 T'+.25 1/Z: c4le enlicero 12.19 .60 32+.25 1/2„ Line Conapiv ction - Zone 2t Linea' r/ 11.08 .60 3/.+,25 1/2: Cable/s,licerr ,12.19 .GO 3:+.25 1/2R S ro,,mxi tan : 're than 1 year experience 7.29 .60 37.+.25 1/2: Be than 1 year experience 6.39 .60 3i.+.25 112'. 0p.-hole dig6cr, line trucit, 8.48 .60 3:+,25 1/2. Plat bed truck driver 6.34 .GO 3:+,25 1/25 MODIFICATIONS P. 15 DECISI-N '�7TS78,-4096 - Tied, 06 I Basic (43 FR 43242 - Suntember .22, 1978) Hooray Bell, Bosque, Coryell, ielis, r� Retes Ilill & McLennan Cos„ Texas - Chan-,e: 9uilding Construction: Electricians - Zone 1 $10.00 Zone 2 11.50 DECISI�?' 6=75-4114 - tbd. 02 (43 FR 49200 - October 20, 1978) Lubboclt County, Texas Change: Cement masons 8.15 Electricians - Electricians 10.70 Cable a!,licers 10.95 Line construction: Linemen 10.70 ?lu7bers & steanfitters 10.30 DECISION #ll'f75128 - Mod. {/2 (45 F= 46480.B-- October 6, 1978) Statewide Utah Fringe Bewefits Peyreents!� - � Edoce lien H & M Pees{eas Vacation and/or App. Tr. .60 3% '\� 1/4% Sa .60 37. .60 X. .60 3% .50 1 .45 Changet Asbestos Workers ;12.11 .77 Ironworkers: Fence Erectors; Ornamental; Reinforcing; Structural 11.35' .70 Painters: Remaining part of State: Brush; Roller 10.20 .51 Brush (swing stage); Brush (steel and bridge); Spray Sandblaster; Steeplejack 10.50 .51 Spray (swing. stage); Spray (steel and bridge); Sand- blaster (swing stage) 10.75 .51 Wall[overing Hanger 10. 45 .51 Refrj geration and Air Condition 1 /rn8 11.50 .66 FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL 43, NO. 232-FRIDAT, DECEMBER 1, 1978 1.25 .30 .30 .30 .30 1.00 CT / C) W Cie O M r.o I 1 O .05 .02 .02 .02 .02 .06 1100IFICATIOtIS P. 7 D_ 'SInV 7Y78=4079 -taFringe Benefits Par- d, r5 8esic (41 FR 35d84 - August 11, 1978) Hourly Educafion Bee, lobe" 6 Nueces Cos., Tcxas Rates X A, TIP ensions Va<ari.n a-L,'or Appr. Tr. Ciame• Bricklay -s: KleberG 6 Nieces Cos. $ 9.31 .28 ,30 ` .05 2arbl c, til 6 terrazzo workers 8.68 , ,02 Plasterers 10.45 .01 D=3I; T"78-408 (43 . 33285 - la a 25, 1973) Armstron-, Carson, cro, Child rags, Jo1lin-scorth, Ilan, l Leaf Smith, Donley, Cra ford, Hartley, Herphill,(utch- inson, Lipscomb, Moore, Cchil- tree, Oldham.., Potter, 2aada�` Roberts, S`.ernan, Swisher 6 ::.ieeler Cos., Texas Ch ar,, 3ricklayers & stonemasons 10. 0 ,=1 .40 Carpenters: Zone 1 - Carpenters 10,X0 .40 .01 t iillvri ghts Ldi.65 ,40 .01 -'r':",9-4088 - :ad, '4 (43 F:< 3.,27 - August 25, 197 •j :lichita County, Tc:tas ! Asbestos workers g 10.93 .40 \76 .03 Power-'quiprent Oper tors: Croup 1 7.r75 .40 .0 5 .10 Group 2 Q.775 .40 52 .10 Group 3 9.175 .40 ..625 10 y(4} F 15, 1978) Bo'.+ie 7C..TcxBo-ficA3b ort ers ' 10.93 .40 .76 N ,03 % er i.quipmcnt O,,crAtors: \02 rrup 1 8.065 4") 1.00 Group 2 9.40 .40 1.00 1 6'rnap 3 9.&0 .40 1.00 .10 "1001FICATIONS P. 8 D!:^TSI')':-` (-78-4096 - 1:nd. "3 1 Boua (43 FR 43242 - Szp^emSec 22, 1978� Hourly Bell, Bosque, Cor..el1, Fa11s;. Rat. Bill 6 1.cLennan Cos., Texas Char.^e: Building aE CSa.action: ram'. -workers - Zone 2 $10.93 D_CIS.n'e: "Tn73-4114 - l:nd. jl (43 FR 49200 - October 20, 1978) Lubbock County, Texas Charne: Po,'cr Zquiprent Operators: Fring. Ben.fits Pa -ft-- Education mslons Vocation and/or lAppr. Tr. .40 .76 Group 1 7.875 ` .40 j ,625 Group 2 8.775 I .40 I .625 Group 3 9.175 .40 .625 DECISTGn�ZZ79-2110 - MOD. $1 (43 FR 4922Q,,October 20, 1978) Ashland, Bay eld and Douglas CounCies, Wisco sin ADD, Laborers: Ashland County o T General Laborer $ 8.18 Concrete Work and carrying reinforcing or any steel .Z} Mason Senders, Bricklayers' Helpers, Sewer Diggers, , Pipeiayers, Operating small mixers or mixing by hand, 101 Operating po,er tools suet( as jackhammers, yibraydi, air spade and forklift A ` 8.33 All work on tower,°' or scaffold 40 feet or mo-above the ground.! d Blockin digging, raising and st�bYing work in basements and r ,houses 8.28 �r .40 45 .40 45 KO 45 1 .40 .10 .10 .10 z O n T .02 N .02 .02 11 1 IN IF 11 FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL. 43, NO. 214-FRIDAY, NOVEMBER 3, 1978 ro I r' V SION No. TN78-1091 Fringe Benefits Pormenrs Boric rqulPME.:1T OPERATORS: HOV1lr Rotes H & W Pensions Vaeefion Educ?t on and/or Appr. Tr. = 9.725 .50 .50 .10 CLAS class 9.295 .50 .50 l o CCLAss c 8.595 .50 50 10 cLAss D 8.195 .50 .50 .10 CLASS A -Shovels backhoes, drzglines, cranes, gantrls, gradall, winch with boon, motor pa tro trenching machine (18n & over), pil 'cL^iver, tug boat operator, mechanics heavy), central mixing plant, loc�otive engineer, strattle carriers, c e drills (over 3e), tower crane, hydro cranes, ruatin western and similar iNp cranes, drilling of piling(tugGer, earth freczinr, equipment, 3 drum hoist,\side boom, dredge operator (engineer), hopto, pump erete, mucking machines, eways, central compressor plant, derrick, boat, concrete pump, welders (me from the craft), helicopter operator, well point system, sweeper, bulldozers, .pans, scrapers,fyrk lift, & front end loacer. CLASS B - Trenching machines (16'% and smalle�), tandem rollers, pavers, mobile mixers (rubber tired, mobile, mi ld on joep), back filler, blade Graders, din - key operator over 10 tons, elevatift< & triers, winches (operated from tracks or tractors, without booms and powe d,ly other than the truck), distr:.buiors, bituminous surfaces, 1 and 2 drum hoi,#- , grout pumps, motor boat, swit:hx.an, earth compactors (motorized - Buffalo- iisfield type). CLASS C - Locomotive fireman (on boilers 1" h.p. and over), air compressor stat, tiorary), earth drills, scale operator^ractors (40 h.p. and less), motor crane driver and oiler, pumps (larger t an 4"), dinhey operators (10 tons aad less), oilers on gantrys, & greasers. 1 CLASS D - Air compressor operator, mechanic helper, locomotive fireman, wel- ding machine operator, d ck hand, & elevator operat s FOOT`.I01T $: a. Seven Paid Holidais: New Year's Day; Memorial Day; Independence Day; Labor Day; ThankzGiv Day; Friday after Thankcgiving Day; Christ as Day. b. Enploycr coat ibutcs h% of the basic hourly rate for 5 ycaro or orc of service, or,!�fj6 of the basic hourly rate for 6 months to 5 yearn ecrvice as Yacattiica5 Pay Credit. SUPE1tS_DZA3 DECISION ' N STATE: Texas cOUNTY: Lubbock O D"CISIndi No.: TM78-4114 DATti: Date of r-rhlication 00 Supersedes Decision No. T.t78-4041, dnted April 14, 197si, in 41 FR 16133. DESCRIPTION OF 14ORK: nuildin-, Construction (does not include aingle family homes & garden typeapartments up to & including 4 stories). (See currant heavy & highraay general wage determination for Paving & Utilities Incidental to Building Construction). Fringe Benefits Peymants Beslt Hoerly Edocaften Rafe. H & W Pensiens Vocation end. °r Appr. Tr. ASBESTOS WORY,ERS $10.30 .75 .85 .07 BOI LIMI'.V ERS 10.55 .80 1.00 .02 BRICKLAYiZS & STONEWSONS 9.82 .30 .03 CAR ENTT_ZS 9.20 .48 .50 .01 CEIt27P I:ASONS 7.80 - ELECTRICIARS: Electricians 10.35 .60 37. 1/10: Cable splicers 10.60 .60 37. IRONWOR::ZRS: Structural; ornamental; Rein- forcin; 9.13 .55 1.00 .10 All ironworkers on jobs 30 mile.; or more from the city of Lubbock 9.255 .55 1.00 .10 LABORERS: i GP.'1P7 1 - Construction laborers, including excavation, nour ng concrete, car penter tenders, rcinforcin7, s'-orir^„ di;,-,in7, loading & unl�adin,- cnaterial wrecking buildings & all strut urss, & all construction laborers except thus nared below 5.525 ) .275 27 GROL'p 2 - Air tool on. (jackhar.-cer, dhraiior, tanper, brush hammer, cldnpin-, hammer, air or electric), power bu;;7, 7ipelc7er (concrete ti clay & all non-metallic pipe); handling, laying & cleanin; . =cute pipe �I 1 S.Et0 I .275 .27 '1I GROUP 3 - Mortar mixers, mason tenders, plasterer tenders, cement finisher tender, lather t.,-nders 5.725 .275 .27 Cp.'R':' 4 - Wagon drill 5.875 .275 .27 GROUP 5 - Blastcra & powder men 6.125 .275 .27 LAT'I.tRS 6.75 .20 .01 LINE CONSTZL'CTInN: Linemen 10.35 .60 37. 1/1M. Operators 80WIt .60 31: 1/107. Groundmen (pore than 1 year experience) 551M .60 37. 1/10: Groundn^_n (less than 1 year experience) 5(MTR .60 37. 1/107. Flat bed truck operator 70WR .60 37. 1/107. PAINT 'L;: Brush 8.24 Spray; Sandblasters 8.99 PLAST ::OiR3 7.00 STAM:TTrf:.^.S 9.95 .50 .45 .04 Rm F::R S 8.50 SIIF3r TS SP.L IARRERS 10.54 .50 .55 .11 TRUCK Md VERS 3.00 FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL. 43, NO. 204-FRIDAY, OCTOBER 20, 1978 page 2 DECISION NO. T':7^„4114 W7LDfRS - receive rate prescribed for craft nerfoiming operation to which welding is incidental. -0'WER EQUI rN..`'_4T OPERATORS CROUP 1 GROU? 2 GROUP 3 8auc Moa,ly Fringe Ben 4o, Pcrment: E2ucotion Rates M 8 W I Pr.,,loas Vacntioe end; or App,. Tr. $ 7.29 .30 .50 .10 8.10 .30 -.50 .10 8.50 .30 .50 .10 G:tCCP 1 - Oiler-Firecat GR�U? 2 - Air Ccmnressors, ?unp3, Welding Machines, Throttle Valves, LiUht Plants (3 to E m:aclines); :onve7or; ',la -,on Drill; :lnvators P.uildin;; Form Graders; 'oist, Sin;le Drum; ford Tractor ircludinr, blade and twwcr on rear; I'drers leas than 14 cubic feet; Screenin-, ?:unt ; Crus'uin7 Plants; Forh 14fto (short, under 25 feet); Concrete Pur.ps (all tY7es); 3obcat tyre equipm�.t; ?ord tractor or like with any attachments (excopt blade and rower on rear); All other equipaent of airilar nature coi7in3 ande_r the Lighe Equirm,mt :l.a.s3, wacn power o?crated CROP? 3 - 3ackho2; Drilling :achin^_s (all t/lice); Cecoptxtbiles; '.oist, two drums or more; Per!: Lifts (over 25 feet); Winch Trick; Si:t !Jheel Trick, when used con- tinuously for 5 days; I:irernobile; Locomotives; taxer, 14 cubic fact or over; Blade Graders, self-propelled; Cableways; Cranes -power o-aerated (to 107 ft. of boom); Derricks, power operated (all types); Gradall; Hy-Fo; ;;on-'ro; Paving Y.ixer (all tyres); Pila Drivers; Mobile Goncrece Mixers over 14 cu. ft.; Bull- dozers, Loaders, Tractorvators; Sera,.ers and fulls; :Jeldarc; Trene'dng lacldnes; Roller, tan tons or over; Air Comnreomors, runps, Uelding tachines and Li,Iit Plants (7 to 12 machines); Air Cormres-:or (. Air Tu;;:;er; Boilers, tc or rote fired by one man; llca,y Duty !Technnic; All nt'ier equipment of similar naa.ire coming under the Heavy _qulpnent Clans, w%en nosier operatod SUPERSEDEAS DECISION TATE: Wisconsin COUNTY: Statewide XCISION NUMBER: WI78-2104 DATE: Date of Publciatten i u;S��rsedes Decision Number WI77-2102 dated July 5,1978 in 42 FR 36781 ESCIPTION OF WORK: Highway and Airport Runway and Taxiway Construction (does/, not V.ttclude bridges over navigable waters; tunnels; buildings in highway rest/ area' and railroad construction) ffr a- ! BRICKLAYERS and STONEMASONS: Zone 1 - Barron, B�,yffalo, Burnett, Chippewle, Dunn, Esu Clair, Pepin, T'.ierce, Polk, Rusk, St. Croix and Sawyer Counties Zone 2 - Brown, Calumet, Poor, Florence, Fond Du Lac, ere= Lake, Kewaunee, Manitowoc', Marinette, Marquette, Oconto Outa£amie, Shawano, Waupaca Washara, and Winnebago Countiea Zone 3 - Green, Lafayette and Rock Counties Zone 4 - Crawford, Jackson, Juneau, La Cresse, Vernon, Trempealeau and Monroe Cos. Zone 5 - Walworth County Zone 6 - Dane, Grant, Iowa and Richland Counties Zone 7 - Milwaukee, Oxaukee, F Washington and Waukesha Cos Zone 8 - Columbia and Sauk Cos. Zone 9 - Kenosha and Racine Cos. Zone 10 - Sheboygan County Zone 11 - Ashland, Bayfield, Douglas and Iron Counties Zone 12 - Dodge and -Jefferson Counties Zone 13 - Adams,.Clark, Forest, Lrnglade. Lincoln., Marathon, Menominee, Oneida, Portage, Price, Taylor, Vilaa and Wood Counties CARPENTERS and PILEDRIVEP.MEN: Zone 1 - Ashland County Carpenters Piledrivermen s' Basic Moarly F,insa 8ene fits Parmeeti Edocatioe Rate$ M S W Pawlons Vacat%n and/o, App,. Tr. / $ 9.75 .65 �i/5 .04 i f "� 4 .40 .55 /65 X9. 3 ;' .65 .30 .25 9i 70�' .40 .25 51.25 i' '\ 60 'cv .60 .50 9.29 �165 .69 .50 •�W 10.61 1.07 .90 .56 10.10 .65 i .30 11.25 .60 60 .50 9.40 .650 .55 10.51 .75 \�51 9.85 .55 .25\ .40 10.05 .65 .30 9.44 .50 .35 .15 9.6A .50 .35 .15 , `S Z O 1 A f51 N FEDERAL REGISTER, VOL 43, MO. 204-FRIDAY, OCTOBER 20, 197E " r M . M SECTION 1 EXCAVATION. GRADING. AND SUBGRADE PREPARATION 1. GENERAL This section covers all site preparation, excavation, and construction of embankments required for the project; additional requirements pertaining to excavation, grading, and filling operations around the Pump Station Building are -presented in Section 10. All materials excavated shall be placed in embankments or disposed of as hereinafter specified. The work to be done includes preparation of all excavation and embankment sites, excavating all materials - required by the drawings, shaping of all work areas in accordance with the drawings and specifications, disposing of waste and clean- up of all work sites. The Contractor shall furnish all materials, equip- ment, tools, labor, superintendence and incidentals necessary to com- plete the work in accordance with the drawings and as specified herein. 2. EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES All excavation shall be made to the lines and grades as.shown on the plans and established in the field with provision being made for forming each side of all walls. Footings, unless otherwise shown, may be poured against earth bank except where a vertical bank cannot be maintained. If excavations are carried below subgrade, filling to subgrade shall be done with unclassified concrete con- taining not less than three (3) sacks of cement per cubic yard and not more than eleven (11) gallons of water per sack of cement. The walls of the excavation shall. be kept as vertical as pos- sible. Shoring, bracing or other special procedures shall be taken as necessary to protect existing structures. No separate payment will be made for any special procedure used in connection with the excavation. The cost of such procedures shall be included in the contract price for the work. Material which is suitable for topsoil shall be kept segregated from other material and stockpiled for use in final grading opera- tions. Other excavated material shall be used for filling and grading or shall be disposed of as specified. 3. BACKFILLING AND GRADING Backfilling and grading of the areas around the structures shall be to the lines and elevations shown on the plans. The backfill shall be made from materials obtained from excavation or from borrow. Rocks or boulders encountered in the excavation which are larger than 4" in greatest dimension shall not be used in constructing backfills. Such rocks or boulders shall be considered as waste material and shall be disposed of by the Contractor. Backfilling around the structure 1-1 shall be done by tamping. The fills shall be made by depositing the materials in layers not over 8 inches in thickness. Each layer shall then be wetted, bladed and rolled with an approved roller, or com- pacted with mechanical tampers, to a density of at least 95% of maxi- mum density at optimum moisture as determined by current AASHO T-99, Method B, except a density of 90% will be required for embankments not under concrete slabs. Particular care shall be exercised in compacting the fills under concrete slabs. The top 6 inches of fills not covered by buildings or slabs shall be made with topsoil obtained from the excavation. The area shall be uniformly finished and, in places not accessible to power equipment, hand finishing may be required. Prior to completion of the project, the entire area shall be cleaned of all stockpiles of materials, lumber, lumber scraps or other debris and the premises left with a neat and finished appearance, conforming to the elevations and grades shown on the drawings. 4. TOPSOIL All embankments not otherwise covered shall receive a 6-inch layer of topsoil selected from the excavations. The topsoil shall be wetted and smoothly bladed to the required lines and grades. Com- paction of the topsoil is not required. 5. DISPOSAL OF EXCESS EXCAVATION Excess excavation from the project shall be disposed of at a lo- cation that is adjacent to the east side of Quaker Avenue and that lies approximately between Seventy -Sixth Street and Seventy -Eighth Street. The area is approximately 700 feet long by 400 feet wide. The Engineer will delineate the exact boundaries of the area to be used for disposal. Excess excavation shall be placed in neat layers on the disposal site and shall be graded to drain. Contractor's equipment and vehicles traveling between the project site and the disposal site shall travel in the rights -of way of Eighty - Second Street and Quaker Avenue. 6. CLEAN UP After completion of all work in connection with the project, the entire work area, and any adjacent areas disturbed, shall be cleaned of all construction debris and such debris shall be removed from the site of this work and disposed of by the Contractor. All loose excavated materials shall be graded to uniform surfaces as shown on the drawings or established in the field. The entire area shall present a neat and clean appearance before acceptance. 1-2 SECTION 2 CONCRETE 1. GENERAL All cast in place concrete required for this project shall conform to the provisions of these specifications. Precast structural members required for this project are covered in Section 3. Additional informa- tion regarding the post -tensioned topping slab for the reservoir roof is presented in Section 4. The Contractor shall furnish all materials, equipment, labor, superintendence and incidentals necessary for the con- crete work as shown on the plans and specified herein. All materials shall be subject to test and inspection as specified herein. 2. CONCRETE MATERIALS TESTS 2-1 Preconstruction Tests Test certificates from an approved commercial laboratory shall be furnished on all aggregates proposed for use in this work. Aggregate tests shall be performed in accordance with ASTM Standards and shall cover all items specified. Such tests shall be made at least 30 days before beginning of concreting operations and the approval of the Engineer shall be secured before aggre- gates are ordered to be shipped. Tests made earlier than 30 days prior to the date of submission of the certificates will not be accepted. Certificates from an approved commercial laboratory shall also be submitted on test cylinders from the concrete mix- es proposed for use on the project. Tests shall be made on six cylinders for at least three slumps for each mix. Three cylin- ders for each design shall be tested at 7 days and three at 28 days. The Engineer's approval of mix design shall be obtained prior to placement of any concrete. The costs of all Preconstruction tests shall be borne I by the Contractor. Additional test certificates shall be fur- nished on both the aggregates and the concrete if the material source is changed or if construction tests indicate marked var- iations from the original tests. 2-2 Construction Tests Tests of the aggregates and the concrete will be made ' by the Engineer during construction to determine conformity with the specifications. Test cylinders will be made in accordance with the Method of Making and Curing Concrete Compression and Flexure Test Specimens in the Field (ASTM Designation C 31). The specimens shall be cured under standard moisture and temperature conditions in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 31. ' Strength tests shall be made, in general, for each day's run or for each 50 cubic yards of concrete if a day's run greatly 2-1 exceeds this amount but these tests may be made entirely at the discretion of the Engineer. The costs of all such testing will be borne by the City but the Contractor shall cooperate in secur- ing and storing samples and shall furnish all materials required for sampling. A strength test shall consist of four standard test cylinders made from a composite sample obtained in accordance with the requirements of ASTM Designation C 172. One of the cylinders shall be tested at seven days and three at 28 days. The test result shall be the average of the three 28 day speci- mens, except that, if one specimen in the test shows manifest evidence of improper sampling, molding, or testing, it shall be discarded and the remaining two strength averaged. Should more than one specimen representing a given test show definite defects, due to improper sampling, molding, or testing, the entire test shall be discarded. The result of the 28 day strength tests shall be used as the basis for accepting or rejecting the concrete represented by the test or for determining the penalty to be assessed against the Contractor as provided in paragraph 3-3. The results of.the 7 day strength tests will be compared with the 7 day strength of the preconstruction test cylinders for the class and slump of the concrete being produced. Should the 7 day strengths indicate a deficiency in the 28 day strengths, the Engineer may require a tem'Forary change in proportions to correct such deficiency. Such change shall remain in effect until the 28 day strength of the material in question is determined, at which time the change shall become permanent or shall be rescinded, depending upon the results of the 28 day test. The Engineer shall record the delivery ticket number for the concrete and the exact location in the work at which each load represented by a strength test is deposited.. The Owner shall bean all cost of Air Content and Slump tests at the job site and shall make and break all test cylinders required to determine compliance with the strength requirements of these specifications. The Owner will not.be responsible for any plant control required to produce concrete complying with these specifications. 3. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 3-1 Classes of Concrete All concrete, except as noted, shall be Class "A". Pipe encasement, duct encasement, and other similar miscellaneous concrete not otherwise designated, shall be unclassified concrete containing not less than three (3) sacks of cement per cubic yard and not more than ten (10) gallons of water per sack of cement. 2-2 3-2 Strength All mixes of all classes shall be designed to secure a dense, low -absorption concrete having not less than the fol- lowing compressive strength in pounds per square inch, as deter- mined by making and breaking standard 6-inch by 12-inch cylinders in accordance with the provisions of ASTM Designations C 31 and C 39. 28 Days Class "AA" (Subsurface Structural Concrete in Pump Bldg.) 5,000 Class "A" 4,000 Any concrete failing to meet these strength requirements shall be removed and replaced or a penalty shall be assessed against the Contractor as specified in paragraph 3-3, below. 3-3 Low Strength Concrete Any Class "A" or Class "AA" concrete incorporated in any part of the project which does.not meet the strength requirements specified in paragraph 3-2, above, shall be considered low strength concrete. Low strength concrete shall be removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor or a penalty shall be assessed against the Contractor as provided herein. All Class "A" concrete represented by a strength test of less than 3,500 psi and all Class "AA" concrete represented by a strength test of less than 4,500 psi shall be removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor. A penalty shall be assessed against the Contractor in accordance with the following schedule for all low -strength concrete _ that is permitted to remain in place. PENALTY SCHEDULE Class of Concrete Strength Test Penalty Class "AA" 5,000 psi or more - - - - Class "AA" 4,800 to 5,000 $ 4.00 per C.Y. Class "AA" 4,500 to 4,800 $10.00 per C.Y. Class "A" 4,000 psi or more - - - - Class "A" Less than 4,000 psi but 3,800 psi or greater $ 3.00 per C.Y. Class "A" Less than 3,800 psi but �. 3,500 psi or greater $ 8.00 per C.Y. It shall be assumed that each strength test of each ' class of concrete represents an amount of concrete equal to the total amount of each class of concrete poured during a day's run divided by the number of strength tests made for the respective classes of concrete. However, in no case will a penalty be as- sessed against more than 50 cubic yards because of any one low strength test. Any penalty assessed because of low -strength con- crete shall be deducted from monies due the Contractor under this contract. 1 2-3 The Engineer shall determine the exact limits of any ' low -strength concrete required to be removed and replaced under the provisions of this paragraph. The methods to be used in re- moving and replacing such concrete shall be approved by the Engi- neer and shall be such that the strength and water -tightness of the structure is not impaired. 4. CONCRETE MATERIALS ' 4-1 Cement I' Portland cement shall conform to the latest revision of ASTM Designation C 150, Type I or Type III, and shall be of an approved brand. Only one brand of cement will be permitted in exposed concrete. ' 4-2 Fine Aggregate Fine aggregate shall comply with the requirements of ASTM Designation C 33. The fine aggregate will be required to meet the ' specified soundness test. 4-3 Coarse Aggregate Coarse aggregate shall comply with the requirements of ASTM Designation C 33. The coarse aggregate will be required to meet the specified soundness and abrasion test. Gradation shall not be coarser op than Size Number 57 (1-inch to No. 4). The maximum size of the coarse aggregate used in any part of the work shall not be larger than one -fifth of the mini- mum dimension of the member for which the concrete is used, ex- cept 1-inch maximum size aggregate may be used in 4-inch slabs, nor larger than three -fourths of the minimum clear spacing be- tween individual reinforcing bars or bundles of bars. All walls of the reservoir and of the pump building pump pit shall be constructed with aggregate not larger than 1-inch maximum size. 4-4 Water Water shall be clear and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, organic matter, or other deleterious sub- stances. Plant effluent shall not be used in concrete mixes. 4-5 Water -reducing Admixtures A water -reducing admixture shall be used in all Class "AA" .A and Class "A" concrete. The admixture used shall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation C494 for Type A - Water -reducing admixture, Type D - Water -reducing and retarding admixture or Type E - Water- .r reducing and accelerating admixture. The type of admixture to be used in the different parts of the project shall be as direc- ted by the Engineer. The manufacturer shall furnish an affidavit certifying that the material furnished complies with this speci- fication. 1 2-4 4-6 Air -entraining Admixture An air -entraining admixture shall be used in all Class "AA" and Class "A" concrete. The air -entraining admixture shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation C 260. The air content of the concrete sampled'at the point of discharge from the transporta- tion unit shall be between 3 and 6 percent. The manufacturer shall furnish an affidavit certifying that the material furnished complies with this specification. 4-7 Storage of Materials Cement in sacks shall be stored off the ground in a dry, ventilated building. Bulk cement shall be stored in water- proof bins and shall be handled in a manner which will prevent accumulation of moisture. Cement which has hardened or partially set shall be removed from the site and not used in the work. Aggregates shall be stored separately and in such manner as to prevent segregation of sizes and to avoid inclusion of dirt and other foreign materials in the concrete. 5. REINFORCING 5-1 Bar Reinforcing Except where plain bars are specifically shown on the plans all bar reinforcing shall be deformed bars. The deformed bar reinforcing shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Desig- nation A 615, Grade 60. Plain steel bars shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation A 306, Grade 60. Any deformed bars delivered to the site of the work that are not marked in accordance with the requirements of ASTM Designation A 615 shall immediately be removed from the site. 5-2 Mesh Reinforcing Mesh Reinforcing shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation A 185. 5-3' Storing Reinforcing Reinforcement stored at the site shall be protected from accumulation of grease, mud, or other foreign matter and from rust producing conditions. Bars shall be free from loose flakey rust, scale, oil, mud or structural defects when incorpor- ated in the structures. 5-4 Fabrication and Placing of Bar Reinforcement Reinforcement shall be accurately fabricated to the di- mensions and shapes shown on the plans in accordance with the ACI Manual of Standard Practice unless variations are specifically shown on the plans. Four copies of fabrication shop drawings shall be furnished the Engineer in accordance with the require- ments of General Conditions and shall receive his approval be- fore any reinforcing steel is fabricated. 2-5 1 . Reinforcement shall be accurately placed and adequately supported by concrete, metal or other approved chairs, spacers, or ties and shall be secured against displacement. Reinforcement shall be placed in specified positions within the following tol- erances: Depth in structural slabs, flexural members, walls and columns: + 1/4 inch. Longitudinal location of bends and ends of bars: + 2 inches except that the required concrete cover at ends of members shall not be reduced. The concrete cover for reinforcing shall be in accord- ance with the requirements of the ACI Building Code (ACI 318-71) or as noted on the drawings. Splices shall be made as shown on the plans by lapping the bars the required amount and securely wiring them together. Where details of splices are not shown or where unanticipated splices are required, they shall be made in a location approved by the Engineer and the length of lap shall be as required by the ACI Building Code (ACI 318-71). 5-5 Placing of Welded Wire Fabric Welded wire fabric shall be placed with not less than 1 1/2 inch nor more than 2 1/2 inch cover. The methods used for proper placing of the fabric shall be subject to approval of the Engineer. Welded wire fabric shall overlap at splices a distance not less than the spacing of the cross wires plus 2 inches. 6. PROPORTIONS. 6-1 General Materials in the concrete shall be -so proportioned that a workable mix, which will readily fill all form angles and prop- erly embed the reinforcement without excessive manipulation, seg- regation or water gain, will result. The Contractor shall submit ,mix designs for each class of concrete as set forth in paragraph 2-1, above, stating the slump and proportional weights of cement, saturated surface dry aggregates, and water and the amount of water - reducing and air -entraining admixtures. High density and low water absorption shall also be obtained with the mixes proposed and harsh mixes or those with which the required finishes cannot be obtained will not be approved. Adjustments in the approved mixes shall be made during construction to compensate for variations in aggregates or whenever field tests indicate such adjustments are required. Changes in approved mixes required in order to bring the concrete into con- formity with the specifications shall be made by the Contractor with- out additional compensation. 2-6 6-2 Measurements Bulk cement shall be measured by weight to within 1% of the required amounts. Cement in standard sacks will be con- sidered as weighing 94 pounds and need not be weighed• Water shall be measured by*either weight or volume to within 1-112% of the required amount. Water reducing admixtures shall be measured and dispensed by readily adjustable mechanical dispensing equip- ment capable of being set to deliver the required amount and cut off the flow automatically. The equipment shall be of the type where the amount to be dispensed is visible in the container for ready check by the Engineer. All admixtures shall be measured and dispensed in the liquid state. Powdered admixtures shall be mixed with water in the proper amounts prior to use. Aggregates shall be measured by weight on a scale sepa- rate from that used for weighing cement. The individual aggre- gates, as weighed, shall be within 2% of the required amount and the total weight of the combined aggregates shall be within 1% of the required weight. IWater shall be measured by volume or by weight. The device for measurement of the water shall be readily adjusted and, under all operating conditions, shall have an accuracy with- P= in 1`/, of the required amount. The device shall be so arranged that the measurements will not be affected by variable pressures in the water supply line. The complete plant assembly -shall meet the approval of the Engineer, and facilities shall be provided for ready adjust- ment of aggregate weights for varying moisture content; accurate proportioning of water to cement; accurate control of all materials including positive shutoff where delivery to mixer is from bins; prompt removal of excess materials in hoppers; easy checking of weights of each separate aggregate; delivery to hopper of cement without waste; and for checking accuracy of measuring devices. 6-3 Proportions The actual quantities of materials used in each batch shall be in accordance with the approved mix design for the class and slump of concrete being produced. The amount of moisture in the aggregates shall be considered in determining the amount of water to be added to each batch. The total water content of any batch shall not exceed that of the approved mix design. Adequate means shall be furnished by the Contractor for determining and controlling the amount of water in the aggregate. 6-4 Control The Engineer shall have free access to the plant at all times and the Contractor shall furnish materials for samples of all tests required to determine conformity with the specifications. r , 1 2-7 1 Changes in the mix shall be made promptly whenever such tests indicate changes are required or whenever the quality of con- crete produced fails to meet the requirements. 7. SLUMP AND AIR CONTENT 7-1 General Slump tests and determinations of air content shall be made by the Engineer. The number or frequency of such tests shall be entirely at the discretion of the Engineer. If the slump or air content falls outside the specified limits, a check test shall be made immediately on another portion of the same sample. In the event of a second failure, the concrete shall be considered as not meeting the requirements of these specifications. 7-2 Slump The slump of all concrete shall be between 2 inches and 6 inches with the conditions of placement governing the exact slump to be used. In all cases the Engineer shall specify the slump to be used. When a 3 inch slump or less is specified, the allowable tolerance shall be 1/2-inch. When the specified slump is greater than three inches, the allowable tolerance shall be 1-inch. 7-3 Air Content The air content for air -entrained mixes shall be from 3 to 6 percent. The exact air content shall be as specified by the Engineer with a tolerance of 1-1/2 percent except that the air content shall, in no case, be outside the range given above. 8. MIXING & PLACING 8-1 Mixing Equipment Mixers may be stationary mixers or truck mixers. Ag- itators may be truck mixers or truck agitators. Each mixer and agitator shall have attached thereto in a prominent place a metal plate or plates on which are plainly marked, for the various uses for which the equipment is designed, the capacity of the drum or container in terms of the volume of mixed concrete and the speed of rotation of the mixing drum, blades or paddles. Stationary mixers shall be equipped with an acceptable timing device that will not permit the batch to be discharged until the specified mixing time has elapsed. Truck mixers shall be equipped with means by which the number of revolutions of the drum blades, or paddles may be readily verified. The mixer, when loaded to capacity, shall be capable of combining the ingredients of the concrete within the specified time into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass and of discharging the concrete with a satisfactory degree of uniformity. No mixer or agitator shall be used if the results of slump tests of indi- vidual samples taken at approximately the one quarter, and the 2-8 0 w three quarter points of the load differ by more than 2 inches. Mixers and agitators shall be inspected frequently for changes in condition due to accumulations of hardened concrete or mortar or to wear of blades. When any such change of conditions is found, the slump tests described above shall be repeated. Truck mixers shall have adequate water supply and meter- ing devices. No water shall be added to the concrete after the initial mixing water without the permission of the Engineer. 8-2 Mixing and Delivery When a stationary mixer is used for the entire mixing of the concrete, the mixing time for one cubic yard of concrete shall be one minute with an increased mixing time of 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or portion thereof. When a stationary mixer is used for partial mixing, the mixing time shall be a minimum of 30 seconds. Mixing shall be completed by truck mixer at mixing speed. Mixing time shall be measured from the time all cement and aggregates are in the drum. The batch shall be so charged into the mixer that some water will enter in advance of cement and aggregate, and all water shall be in the drum by the end of the first one fourth of the specified mixing time. Mixing at mixing speed shall begin immediately after all ingredients are in the mixer. For complete mixing in the truck each batch shall be mixed not less than 70 nor more than 100 revolutions of the drum. For partial mixing in the truck each batch shall be mixed not less than 50 nor more than 100 re- volutions of the drum. Mixing speed shall be as designated by the manufacturer. All revolutions after the prescribed mixing time shall be at agitating speed. The agitating speed shall be not less than one nor more than four revolutions per minute. The drum shall be kept in continuous motion from the time mixing is started until the discharge is completed. The maximum time interval between the introduction of the mixing water to the cement and aggregates, or the introduc- tion of the cement to the aggregates, and the placing of the con- crete in the forms shall not exceed the following: Air or Concrete Temperature (Whichever is higher) 90° F or above 750 F to 890 F 350 F to 740 F Maximum Time 45 minutes 60 minutes 90 minutes 2-9 1 Concrete shall not be placed when the ambient tempera- ture is less than 40° F and falling but may be placed when the ambient temperature is not less than 350 F if the temperature is rising. The temperature of the concrete at the time of placement in the forms shall be not less than 500 F nor more than 90° F. 8-3 Transporting Concrete shall be handled from the mixer to the place of final deposit in a manner which will prevent segregation and when practicable, shall be deposited in its final position with- out rehandling or flowing. All equipment used in transporting concrete shall be maintained in a clean condition. Concrete shall not be delivered from hoists by spout or trough, nor dumped into carts, with a free fall of more than 4 feet. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent separation or loss of ingredients while transporting the concrete. Runways for carts or buggies shall not bear upon the reinforcing or fresh concrete. Pumping and conveying of concrete .shall be done only after approval by the Engineer and with equipment which will insure a continuous flow without segregation. 8-4 Placing Concrete shall not be placed until all reinforcement is securely and properly fastened in its correct position. Form ties shall be checked and retightened where necessary. Forms and rein- forcement shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer before beginning placement of concrete. All embedded items shall be in place and anchored and the forms and reinforcement shall be cleaned and cleanout openings closed before such inspection. A representa- tive of the Engineer will be on the job during placement of con- crete and concrete shall not be placed unless the Engineer or his representative is present. Concrete shall be placed in a manner which will prevent segregation, thoroughly embed all reinforcement and fixtures, fill all angles in the forms and prevent formation of aggregate pockets or honeycomb. Placement in walls, columns or other deep forms shall be done through openings in the forms, spaced at frequent inter- vals, or through tremies so that the free fall shall not exceed 6 feet. Points of depositing the concrete shall be spaced so that the concrete surfaces can be kept level without flowing it into place. Concrete shall be placed with the aid of approved mechan- ical vibrating equipment. Vibration shall be applied directly to the concrete and shall be of sufficient intensity and duration to cause flow or settlement of the concrete, thorough compaction and complete embedment of reinforcement and fixtures. Supplemental forking and spading by hand may be required to secure dense uni- form surfaces and complete filling of corners and angles. Exces- sive spading or vibrating causing undue water gain or segregation 2-10 will not be permitted. If moderate working causes excessive water gain the mix shall be adjusted. Excess water shall be removed when it appears and concrete shall not be deposited in accumula- tions of such water. Where concrete in floors is deposited on the ground, the subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted and mois- tened before concrete is placed. A grill tamp shall be used on floor slabs. Completed sections shall conform to the details on the plans and the concrete shall be dense, uniform and free of aggregate pockets or honeycomb. Concrete in vertical walls shall be placed in contin- uous horizontal layers approximately 18 inches in depth. Not more than one hour shall elapse between the placing of successive lay- ers of concrete in any portion of a structure included in a con- tinuous placement. 8-5 Joints and Stoppages 8-5.1 General Construction and expansion joints shall. be con- structed at the locations and in accordance with the details shown on the drawings or as specified herein. If it becomes necessary to stop placement of concrete between joints, or if the Contractor desires for his own convenience to construct joints other than those shown, such joints shall be made only at locations approved by the Engineer and all such joints shall be constructed in accordance with the details shown on the drawings. However, all vertical walls shall be constructed without horizontal construction joints except as specifically shown on the drawings. A waterstop, as specified herein and as detailed on the drawings, shall be used in all joints in water containing structures except where it is specifically noted that waterstop is not required. All waterstops shall be contin- uous through all splices, bends, angles and intersections so that complete watertightness is secured, even if such details are not specifically shown on the drawings. Before concreting operations are resumed at any construction joint, or wherever fresh concrete is to be bonded to hardened concrete, the surface of the hardened concrete shall be cut or chipped to remove laitance and expose aggregate. The sur- face of the concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned, saturated, then slushed with a coating of neat cement grout against which the fresh 65concrete shall be placed before the grout has attained initial set. Epoxy bonding agents or other special procedures shall be used where noted on the drawings. Care shall be taken to insure that the first layer of new concrete contains sufficient mortar for adequate bond. 2-1.1 9. WATERSTOPS AND EXPANSION JOINTS 9-1 General Where waterstop is shown or required it shall be equal to the materials specified herein and of the widths shown on the draw- ings. All installation of waterstop, including splicing at joints, and intersections, shall be in strict accordance with the manufact- urer's recommendations, as approved by the Engineer. 9-2 Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstop The waterstop shall be fabricated from a plastic compound, the basic resin of which is polyvinyl chloride, with additional resins, plasticizers, stabilizers or other materials such that, when compounded, the material shall conform to the requirements of Corps of Engineers Specification CRD-C-572-74. PVC waterstop shall be of the serrated, center -bulb type. Four -inch and 6-inch waterstop shall be equal in dimensions and weight to Servicised/Durajoint No. 3 and No. 5, respectively. No reclaimed PVC, nor any PVC compound other than that specified herein shall be used. The manufacturer shall, with each shipment, furnish an affidavit certifying compliance with this specification. All installation, including splicing, joints, and inter- sections, shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, as approved by the Engineer. 9-3 Expansion Joint Material Where premould-ed expansion joint material is shown on the plans such material, unless otherwise noted, shall be a non - extruding and resilient bituminous joint filler composed of asphalt and granulated cork formed between two sheets of asphalt saturated felt and meeting the requirements of ASTIR Designation D 1751. Pre - moulded expansion joint material using cane or other fibers in lieu of granulated cork is not acceptable. 9-4 Joint Sealing Compound Where joints in concrete construction are shown to be sealed, the joint sealing compound shall be a cold -applied two -com- ponent polysulfide sealant specifically recommended by the manufacturer for use in continuously -submerged joints and for use in potable water containing structures. The handling, mixing and placing of the mater- ial and preparation of the joint proir to sealing shall be in strict accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. 2-12 a 9-5 Joint Construction All joints shall be constructed in a workmanlike manner with joints truly vertical or horizontal, as required, and at right angles to the axis of the member in which the joint occurs. Waterstop and/or expansion joint material shall be accurately positioned and held in position during placement of concrete. ' Special care shall be exercised to hold the waterstop in proper position and to carefully place the concrete around the Water - stop to insure proper embedment. Waterstop shall be held in place by means of clips or fasteners which do not puncture the waterstop. 10. FORMS 10-1 Material , Forms for all concrete work shall be of wood or approved metal forms. Wood sheeting, forming surfaces exposed to sight or weather, shall be plywood or plywood lined of a quality to produce smooth even surfaces. Whatever material is used shall produce a sightly surface, free from excessive form marks and shall meet the approval of the Engineer before use. The same type of form shall be used for all exposed portions of the work unless specifically ap- proved by the Engineer. ' Forms for round columns may be steel or Sonotube or ap- proved equal. Sonotube forms, if used, shall be checked for true alignment immediately before concrete is placed. 10-2 Construction Forms shall be constructed true to lines, grades and sections shown on the plans and shall be mortar -tight and suffi- ciently rigid to prevent displacement or sagging between supports. All exposed edges on all structures, including edges at all joints, shall be chamfered 3/4-inch unless otherwise noted on the plans. Column and wall forms shall be set plumb and true and rigidly braced to maintain them in correct position and alignment. Beam and slab centering shall be true and rigid and all spans shall be crowned 1/16-inch for each 4 feet of span length unless other- wise shown on the plans. This camber shall be maintained during concrete placement and "tell tales" shall be provided, and checked during placement, to insure that the forms remain in proper posi- tion. Temporary openings for cleaning and inspection shall be provided at the base of vertical forms or other places where nec- essary. Such openings shall be neatly and securely closed before concrete is placed. ' 10-3 Form Ties Form ties approved by the Engineer shall be adjustable in length and of such type as to leave no metal within 1-inch of the surface, and shall not be fitted with lugs, cones, washers or other device acting as a spreader which will leave a hole larger than 7/8-inch in diameter or a depression back of the exposed sur- face of the concrete. Wire tires will not be permitted without specific permission from the Engineer. s� 2-13 Ties which are to be pulled from the concrete shall not be used on walls of water tight structures. Where such ties are used, they shall be coated with cup grease or other -approved ma- terial to facilitate removal. Ties shall not be withdrawn, bro- ken off or otherwise removed until the concrete has hardened sufficiently to avoid spalling or other damage to the concrete. Cutting ties back from the face of the concrete will not be per- mitted. Tie rod holes shall be plugged as specified below. 10-4 Wetting and Oiling The inside surface of forms shall be coated with a non- staining mineral oil or other approved coating and shall be cleaned and oiled after each use. Forms which have dried out between uses shall be recoated just prior to placing of concrete. Excess oil or grease shall be wiped from the form surface. If forms have dried out so that the joints have opened, they shall be thoroughly soaked with water prior to placing of concrete. 10-5 Removing Forms Forms may be removed only upon approval of such removal by the Engineer. In general, removal of wall and column forms will be permitted within 24 hours, but only if no further loads are to be placed.on such members and if removal of forms and ties will not damage the concrete. Forms for flexural members shall remain in place for 14 days. Adequate reshoring shall be placed under such members when forms are removed and shall remain in place twenty-eight (28) days or until the concrete has attained its design strength. The design strength shall -be determined from the standard test cylinders molded, cured and broken in accordance with ASTM Designation C 31. The strength of the con- crete in the structure at any age shall be assumed to be equal to the average strength of two test cylinders of the same age, cured as specified in paragraph 9(c) of ASTM Designation C31. The Contractor shall bear all costs of molding, curing and break- ing cylinders for the purpose of determining form removal time. The Contractor may elect to not use concrete test cylinders to determine form removal time and, in this event, forms or shoring shall remain in place beneath flexural members for 28 days. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, in all form removal, to prevent structural damage or marring of the concrete surfaces. 11. PATCHING Concrete work obviously out of horizontal or vertical align- ment or which shows serious surface defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. Patching of minor de- fects will be permitted provided such patching removes the defect. Immediately after removing forms the concrete shall be inspected 2-14 for defects. All defects permitted to be patched and all form tie holes shall be patched before the concrete is thoroughly dry. Defective areas shall be chipped away to a depth of not less than one inch with edges perpendicular to the surface. This and the surrounding area shall be wetted to prevent absorption of water from the patching mortar. The patching mortar shall be of the same materials and of the same proportions as used for the con- crete except that the coarse aggregate shall be omitted and the amount of water used shall be as little as is consistent for prop- er handling and placing. The mortar shall be re -tempered with- out the addition of water by allowing it to stand for one hour and mixing to prevent setting. The mortar shall be thoroughly compacted into place, screeded off slightly higher than the sur- rounding surface and left undisturbed for a period of one to two hours. Final finishing shall conform to the finish of the sur- rounding areas. Form tie holes shall be patched with this same mortar, the holes being completely filled and the mortar tightly packed into the hole. Holes passing entirely through the concrete shall be filled by forcing the mortar through from one side to the other. Mortar shall be struck off flush with burlap or canvas and the patch finally finished to conform to the surrounding surface. 12. FINISHING 12-1 Exposed, Formed Surfaces For the purpose of this specification, Exposed, Formed Sur- faces are defined as follows: (1) All exterior walls exposed to view, from the top of the wall to six inches below finished grade; (2) All exposed concrete in the pump building; (3) Valve manhole interior surfaces; (4) Other surfaces normally exposed to view and.not specifi- cally classified below as unexposed surfaces. Exposed, formed surfaces shall have all tie rod holes filled, fins and rough edges removed, and all defects removed or patched prior to finishing. Exposed, formed surfaces in the pump building shall be finished as indicated in Section 10 of the specifications; other ex- posed, formed surfaces shall be finished as described in this paragraph. After surface preparation, exposed formed surfaces shall be moistened and then receive one brush coat of the following finish coating: Liquid Latex Bonding Agent 1 part White cement 2 parts Natural cement 2 parts Masonry sand 2 parts Water 1 part 2-15 The proportions of white and natural cement may be varied , as directed by the Engineer to obtain the desired color. The Con- tractor shall make test applications of the finish coating on unex- posed concrete surfaces for inspection by the Engineer to establish ' the color and texture which will be required on the exposed surfaces. The coating shall be finished by brushing in vertical, ' parallel strokes leaving the coating with a uniform appearance in color and texture. Immediately prior to final acceptance of the project, ' all Exposed, Formed Surfaces shall be washed down with clean water and scrubbed as required to leave all such surfaces with a clean, neat, and uniform appearing finish, uniform in color and texture. 12-2 Unexposed Vertical Surfaces For the purpose of this specification unexposed vertical sur- 0 faces are defined as follows: (1) Those covered by earth fill below a line six inches below finished grade; (2) Inside of the water reser- voir; and (3) Inside wall surfaces of miscellaneous boxes. Unexposed vertical surfaces shall have tie rod holes filled, fins and rough edges removed and all defects removed or patched. 12-3 Floors, Slabs and Walkways Special care shall be used in finishing these surfaces to ob- tain true plane surfaces with no pockets or depressions except at floor drains. Where floor drains are shown, the floor shall be carefully rr� graded to slope to the drain. Any such area which does not drain pro- perly shall be corrected by removal and replacement of the concrete. The floor of the water reservoir shall be finished with a wood float and then given a broom finish, free from projections and float marks. Walkways shall be brushed, after troweling, to provide a "non-skid" surface. Building floors shall be given a hard, smooth trowel finish. The post -tensioned topping slab on the roof of the water reservoir shall as be given a medium broom finish. 13. CURING AND PROTECTING ., 13-1 Curing M The purpose of curing procedures is to provide the most favorable conditions practicable for development of the strength of the concrete without the formation of cracks or other defects. Such favorable conditions include the maintenance of proper mois- ture conditions and protection from large changes in temperature. The procedures specified herein are designed to maintain these favorable conditions and will be strictly enforced to this end. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer fully as to . the methods and procedures proposed for curing and have full ap- proval of the methods, equipment, and materials prior to placing 2-16 1 concrete. The Contractor shall have, at the site of the work, the proper equipment and material in adequate amounts to cure the concrete properly, prior to being given permission to place concrete. Poor curing facilities or lack of attention to the proper curing of concrete shall be cause for the Engineer to stop all con- struction on the job until proper curing is provided. The curing period for all concrete begins immediately after placing and/or finishing operations are completed. Delay in initiation of curing measures will not be tolerated. All con- crete shall be kept wet, and shall be protected from large changes in temperature, for a period of 7 days after placement unless Type III cement is used in which case the curing period shall be 3 days. Curing measures shall consist of the following, unless similar measures which are demonstrated to achieve the same or better results are approved by the Engineer in writing: 13-1.1 Walls �. Wall forms shall remain in place 24 hours, but shall be removed within 48 hours after placement of the concrete. Forms shall be kept wet at all times until they are removed. ' Immediately after removal of the forms defects shall be repaired and tie rod holes patched. Wall surfaces shall then be sprayed with a membrane curing compound. Materials and application shall be as speci- fied in the following .' paragraph. 13-1.2 Floors and Slabs Floors and slabs may be cured by covering with sheeting materials or by spraying with membrane curing compound. Sheeting materials used for curing slabs shall ' conform to ASTM Designation C 171 and may be waterproof paper, white opaque polyethylene film or white burlap -polyethylene sheet. ' All surfaces shall be thoroughly wetted with a fine spray of water before being covered with the sheeting material. Covering shall be laid with light-colored side up. Covering shall be lapped not less than 12 inches and securely weighted down or shall be lapped not less than 4 inches and taped to form a con- tinuous cover with completely closed joints. Sheets shall be weighted to prevent displacement or billowing from winds. Cov- erings shall be folded down over exposed edges of slabs and se- cured by approved means. Sheets shall be immediately repaired or replaced ' if tears or holes appear during the curing period. 2-17 Curing compound shall conform to AASHO M 148, Type 2, Class B, except where the concrete is to receive sub- sequent treatment. In such cases a compound which will not interfere with adhesion of the subsequent treatment shall be used. Before applying curing compound, tops of joints that are to receive sealant shall be tightly closed with temporary material to prevent entry of the compound and to prevent moisture loss during the curing period. The compound shall be applied on damp surfaces as soon as the moisture film has disappeared. The curing compound shall be applied by power spraying equipment using a spray nozzle equipped with a wind guard. The application of curing compound by hand - operated pressure sprayers will be permitted only on odd widths or shapes of slabs and on concrete surfaces exposed by the removal of furors. The compound sha11 be applied in a two -coat, continuous opera- tion at a coverer of not more than 300 square feet per gallon for each coat. When application is made by hand sprayers, the second coat shall be applied in a direction approximately at right angles to the direction of the first coat. The compound shall form a uni- form, continuous, adherent film that shall not check, crack, or peel, and shall be free from pinholes or other imperfections. Surfaces subjected to rainfall within 3 hours after compound has been applied, or surfaces damaged by subsequent construction operations within the curing period shall be immediately resprayed at the rate specified above. Surfaces coated with curing compound shall be kept free of foot and vehicular traffic, and from other sources of abrasion and contamination during the curing period. 13-1.3 Miscellaneous Structures The requirements specified above apply to the major structures of the project. Small isolated structures may be cured by any of the methods specified above, but curing by applica- tion of a membrane curing compound, immediately after finishing, shall generally be used. Material and application shall be as speci- fied above. 13-2 Protecting Concrete shall be protected against all adverse condi- tions, including weather, and against mechanical damage, until completion of the project. Any such damage incurred shall be promptly repaired by the Contractor at his own expense, in a manner approved by the Engineer. Concrete shall be protected against low temperatures by maintaining a placement temperature not less than 50' F. and by maintaining a temperature of not less than 45° F. for three (3) days after placement. The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality and strength of the concrete placed during cold weather and any concrete placed by frost action shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. Concrete shall also be protected against Pat extremes of high temperature, low humidity and wind movement, by means of the curing methods specified herein or other methods approved by the Engineer. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to anticipate, as nearly as possible, changes in weath- er conditions which would affect the placement and protection of the concrete. He shall be prepared at all times with proper ma- terials, equipment and personnel, to protect freshly placed con- crete when sudden changes in the weather make such protection necessary. Failure to have available proper materials, equipment or personnel for expeditious placement and adequate protection of the concrete will be grounds for postponement of placing of concrete. 14. EMBEDDED ITEMS All anchor bolts, pipe, pipe sleeves, conduit, manhole frames, grating angles, anchors, insets or other fixtures required by the plans or these specifications to be embedded in the concrete shall be accurately set in place and securely maintained in such posi- tions during placement of concrete. It shall be the responsibil- ity of the Contractor to coordinate the work of all trades or sub- contractors to the end that all such items are properly placed ' prior to placement of any concrete. 15. CLEANING, DISINFECTING AND TESTING STRUCTURES =' 15-1 Cleaning Upon completion of the structures, they shall be thor- oughly cleaned of all debris and dirt and the walls and floors washed down. The Contractor shall furnish all piping, hoses, pumps, and other equipment required to wash the structures and to pump the wash water from the structures. ' 15-2 Testing Water -containing structures shall be filled with water ' and tested for water tightness as soon as practicable after com- pletion of the structure. If any structure loses water at a rate exceeding 0.25 gallon per square foot of wetted concrete surface in 48 hours, the leaks shall be found and repaired. The test shall be repeated or extended after repair of leaks until the rate of leakage is less than specified above. M Any visible leakage through exposed walls of the var- ious structures shall be corrected even though the structure suc- cessfully passes the above specified leakage test. Water for testing shall be obtained from the existing plant effluent with the Contractor furnishing all pumps and piping required for filling the structures. 11 2-19 W M No 15-3 Disinfection Immediately prior to testing of the chlorination manhole and the reservoir for watertightness, all interior surfaces of the chlorination manhole and the reservoir shall be disinfected. Dis- infection shall be accomplished by spraying all interior surfaces, including walls, floor, ceiling, columns, and beans with a solution M containing not less than 100 mg/l of chlorine. The chlorine solu- tion shall be made using HTH or other approved disinfecting agent. The chlorination manhole and the reservoir shall be filled with water for the watertightness test following disinfection. Dis- infection shall be repeated if either structure is emptied and reentered and shall be repeated after each reentry. 2-20 1 11 W Mii W 10 SECTION 3 PRECAST OR PRECAST PRESTRESSED CONCRETE 1. GENERAL This section covers all precast or precast prestressed concrete structural members for the project. The extent of precast concrete work is shown on the drawings and in schedules. This section establishes general criteria for materials, mixes, and evaluations of precast or precast prestressed concrete, fabricated dimensional tolerances, in- stallation procedures, and inspection standards. All precast or,pre- cast prestressed members shall comply with the provisions of these specifications and to the provisions of the codes, specifications and standards referenced herein, except as otherwise shown. The Contractor shall furnish all materials, equipment, labor, superintendence and incidentals necessary for the precast or precast prestressed concrete structural members as shown on the plans and as specified herein. 2. QUALITY ASSURANCE 2-1 Codes and Standards All precast and precast prestressed structural members shall be fabricated, transported, and erected as specified herein and in compliance with the provisions of the following codes, specifi- cations and standards: ACI 301 - "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings". ACI 311 - "Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection". ACI 318 - "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete". ACI 347 - "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork". ACI 304 - "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete". Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard Practice". Prestressed Concrete Institute, "Manual for Quality Control" MNL 116. Building code requirements which are more stringent than the above listed codes and standards, shall be used. 2-2 Fabricator Qualifications The fabrication of all precast concrete units and all precast, prestressed concrete units shall be performed by a single 3-1 firm which has had a minimum of 5 years successful experience in the fabrication of units similar to those required for this project. The fabricator must maintain sufficient production capacity to produce the required units without causing delay in the progress of the project. The fabricator must be an active member of the Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI). The fabricator shall produce precast and precast, prestressed units at a fabricating plant engaged primarily in the manufacturing of similar units. Fabrication shall comply with PCI MNL-116 "Manual for Quality Control" for the production of precast concrete units. 2-3 Erector Qualifications The erection of all precast or precast, prestressed concrete members shall be only by a firm which has had a minimum of 2 years successful experience in the erection of units, similar to those required for this project. 2-4 Fabrication Tolerances 2-4.1 General Precast and precast, prestressed concrete units fabricated for the project shall conform to the dimensions, cross - sections and lengths as shown on the drawings. Units having any dimension greater or less than required will be rejected if the appearance or function of the structure is adversely affected. Re- jected units will be removed and replaced or repaired as required to meet the construction conditions. 2-4.2 Precast Structural Beams Precast structural beams shall be fabricated to the following tolerances unless otherwise indicated. Length: ± 1/2" Width: ± 1/4" Depth: ± 1/4" Horizontal Alignment: ± 1/4" Camber Deviation from design camber; ± 1/8" per 10 ft. Position of Tendons; ± 1/8" Position of deflection points for deflected strands; ± 6" Position of weld plates; ± 1/2" 3-2 Position of handling devices; ± 6" Position of projecting dowel bars or inserts; ± 1/2" Squareness at ends; ± 1/2" 2-4.3 Double Tee Units Precast, prestressed double tee units shall be fabricated to the following tolerances unless otherwise indicated. Length: ± 1/2" Width: ± 1/4" Depth: ± 1/4" Stem Width: ± 1/8" Flange Thickness: +1/4" or -1/8" Position of block -outs: ± 1/2" Horizontal alignment; 1/4" up to 40 ft. length, 3/8" in 40 ft. to 60 ft. length Camber deviation from design camber; ± 1/4" per 10 ft., but not greater than f3/4" Differential Camber between adjacent members; 1/4" per _ 10 ft., but not greater than 3/4" Position of Tendons; ± 1/8" Position of Inserts; ± 1/2" Position of handling devices; ± 6" Position of deflection points for deflected strands; ± 6" Stem to edge of top flange; ± 1/8" Position of weld plates; ± 1" Squareness of ends; ± 1/4" Distance between stems; ± 1/8" 2-5 Installation Tolerances Precast or precast, prestressed units shall be installed without exceeding the following tolerance limits: Variation from Plumb: 1/4" in any 20' run or story height; 1/2" total in any 40' or longer run Variation from Level or Elevation; 1/4" in any 20' run; 1/2" in any 40' run; total ±1/2" at any location 3-3 No so Variation from theoretical Position in Plan; + 1/4" maximum at any location Offset in Alignment of Adjacent Members at any Joints; 1/16" in any 10' run; 1/4" maximum 3. SUBMITTALS 3-1 Shop Drawings Shop drawings showing complete information for the fabri- cation and installation of precast and precast, prestressed units shall be submitted to the Engineer. Shop drawings shall indicate member dimensions and cross-section; location, size and type of .rein- forcement, including special reinforcement and lifting devices necessary for handling and erection. r The Contractor shall provide layout, dimensions, and a identification of each unit corresponding to the sequence and pro- cedures of installation. Welded connections shall be indicated by AWS standard symbols. Inserts, connections, and joints, including accessories and construction at opening or block -outs in the units shall be detailed. The location and details of anchorage devices that are to a be embedded in other construction shall be provided. Templates shall be furnished if required for accurate placement. A complete set of the manufacturer's design calculations prepared by a registered engineer shall be submitted for all precast or precast, prestressed units to verify structural adequacy of members and connections. go Shop drawings for precast or precast, prestressed structural units shall include manufacturer's data for spur and land conditions required, and for setting plans and anchorage details. r.► 4. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING s Precast or precast, prestressed units delivered to the project site shall be delivered in such quantities and at such times as will assure the continuity of the installation. Units shall be stored at the project site in a manner that will insure against cracking, dis- tortion, staining, or other physical damage, and so that markings are clearly visible. Units shall be lifted and supported only at de- signated lift points. 5. JOB CONDITIONS W Prior to installation of any precast or precast, prestressed units, the Erector shall examine all parts of the supporting structure, 3-4 00 the conditions under which the precast concrete work is to be erected, and shall notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Erection shall not commence until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Erector and to the Engineer. Dimensions of the supporting structure shall be verified at the project site and the final shop drawings shall be adjusted to reflect actual field conditions. Design modifications may be made only as necessary to meet field conditions and to ensure proper fitting of the work, and only as accept- able to the Engineer. The general design concept shall be maintained as shown without increasing or decreasing sizes of members or altering profiles and alignment. Anchorage items which are to be embedded in other construction shall be delivered to the project site before the start of such work. Setting diagrams, templates, instructions and directions required for installation shall be provided. 6. FORMWORK Forms or form facing material utilized for precast or precast, prestressed units shall be metal, plastic, wood or other acceptable material that is non -reactive with concrete and which will produce the required finish surfaces. Forms shall be accurately constructed, mortar tight, and of sufficient strength to withstand all pressures due to concrete placing operations, temperature changes, and when prestressed, pre -tensioning and detensioning operations. Formwork shall be maintained to provide completed units of the shapes, lines, and dimensions indicated, within the specified fabrication tolerances. Unless forms for prestressed concrete units are stripped prior to detensioning, the forms shall be designed so that stresses are not induced in precast units due to deformation of concrete under prestress or to movement during detensioning. 7. REINFORCING MATERIALS Reinforcing steel, steel wire, welded wire fabric, supports and prestressing tendons shall be as specified herein. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold -drawn steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric 3-5 Supports: Supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing shall be provided and shall comply with CRSI recommenda- tions. Supports which are in contact with forms shall have legs which are hot -dip galvanized, plastic protected or stainless steel protected. Prestressing Tendons: ASTM A 416, Grade 270, Uncoated, 7-wire stress -relieved strands. Strands similar to these but having the size and ultimate strength of wires increased so that the ultimate strength of the strand is increased approximately 15 percent, or strand with increased strength but with a fewer number of wires per strand, may be used at the manufacturer's option. 8. CONCRETE MATERIALS Concrete materials for precast units shall conform to the speci- fications in Section 2, "Concrete", and shall have a minimum compressive strength of 5,000 psi. Precast prestressed units shall have a minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi prior to release and a minimum com- pressive strength of 6,000 psi in 28 days. 9. CONNECTION MATERIALS Connection materials required for fabrication, erection -nd in- stallation shall be as specified herein. Steel Plates: ASTM A 283, Grade C, structural quality, hot -rolled carbon steel. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, low -carbon steel bolts, regular hexagon nits and carbon steel washers. All exposed steel units shall be finished with a coating of gal- vanizing repair compound after all welding is completed. Bearing Pads: Bearing pads for precast and precast, pre- stressed concrete units shall be of the size and thickness indicated on the drawings. Pads shall be elastomeric pads, of a vulcan- ized, neoprene elastomeric compound, molded to size or cut from a molded sheet, 70 shore A durometer, ± 5%. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I, and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 440. 3-6 10. CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A concrete mix design for precast or precast, prestressed units shall be prepared and submitted in accordance with Section 2, "Concrete". Design mixes may be prepared by an independent testing facility or by qualified precast manufacturing plant personnel, at the manufacturer's option. 11. FABRICATION 11-1 General Only precast or precast, prestressed units fabricated in compliance with manufacturing and testing procedures, quality control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances, as specified herein for the types of units required, will be accepted for use on the project. 11-2 Built-in Anchorages and Inserts Built in anchorage devices and inserts shall be accurately positioned and secured to the formwork. Anchorages and inserts shall be located so that they do not affect the position of the main reinforce- ment or the placing of concrete. Relocation of bearing plates shall not be permitted unless approved by the Engineer. 11-3 Cast -In Holes Openings larger than 10 inches in diameter or 10 inches square shall be cast in precast units in accordance with final shop drawings. Other smaller holes will be field cut by trades requiring them. 11-4 Concrete Placement Prior to the placement of reinforcement, all form surfaces shall be coated with a bond breaking compound. Form -coating compounds shall not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion. Form -coating compounds will be applied in accord- ance with the manufacturer's instructions. Reinforcement shall be free of loose rust, mill scale, earth and other foreign materials which reduce or destroy the bond with concrete. Reinforcement shall be accurately positioned, supported and secured against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Reinforcement shall be located and supported by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangars as required. Reinforcement shall be placed to obtain at least the minimum coverages for concrete protection. Wire ties shall be set so that ends are directed into the concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. 3-7 Pretensioning of tendons for prestressed concrete may be accomplished either by a single strand tensioning method or the multiple - strand tensioning method. Pretensioning shall comply with PCI ILNL-116 requirements. Concrete shall be placed in a continuous operation to prevent the formation of seams or planes of weakness in precast units, and placement shall comply with the requirements of AC? 304. Placed con- crete shall be thoroughly consolidated in each precast and precast, prestressed unit by internal and external vibration without dislocation or damage to reinforcement and built-in items. 11-5 Curing Accelerated concrete hardening to reduce the curing time re- quired for prestressed units may be employed by curing the units with low-pressure steam, with steam vapor, with radiant heat and moisture, or other similar processes. Detensioning of the prestressed units shall not be performed until the concrete has attained a minimum strength of 4,000 psi as established by test cylinders. If the concrete - has been heat -cured, detensioning shall be performed while the concrete is still warm and moist, to avoid dimensional changes which may cause cracking or undesirable stresses in the concrete. Detensioning of pre- stressed tendons may be accomplished either by gradual release of the tensioning jacks or by heat cutting the tendons, using a sequence and pattern to prevent shock or unbalanced loading. 11-6 Finishing Precast and precast, prestressed units shall have a normal plant run finish produced in forms that impart a smooth finish to the concrete. Small surface holes caused by air bubbles, normal form joint marks, and ndnor chips and spalls will be tolerated, but no major or unsightly imperfections, honeycombs, or structural defects will be permitted. Unformed surfaces shall be float,finished to a smooth uniform surface. Precast prestressed units which will receive concrete topping after installation shall be finished with a scratch finish. Following the initial strikeoff, the units shall be scarified trans- versely to provide ridges approximately 1/4" deep. 11-7 Precast Beams Precast concrete units shall be produced under a rigidly inspected process acceptable to the Engineer. Units shall be free of voids and honeycombs, with straight true edges and surfaces, finished as specified. Where ends of strands will not be enclosed or covered, cut flush and cover with a high strength mortar bonded with an epoxy resin bonding agent. 3-8 10. CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A concrete mix design for precast or precast, prestressed units shall be prepared and submitted in accordance with Section 2, "Concrete". Design mixes may be prepared by an independent testing facility or by qualified precast manufacturing plant personnel, at the manufacturer's option. 11. FABRICATION 11-1 General Only precast or precast, prestressed units fabricated in compliance with manufacturing and testing procedures, quality control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances, as specified herein for the types of units required, will be accepted for use on the project. 11-2 Built-in Anchorages and Inserts Built in anchorage devices and inserts shall be accurately positioned and secured to the formwork. Anchorages and inserts shall be located so that they do not affect the position of the main reinforce- ment or the placing of concrete. Relocation of bearing plates shall not be permitted unless approved by the Engineer. 11-3 Cast -In Holes Openings larger than 10 inches in diameter or 10 inches square shall be cast in precast units in accordance with final shop drawings. Other smaller holes will be field cut by trades requiring them. 11-4 Concrete Placement Prior to the placement of reinforcement, all form surfaces shall be coated with a bond breaking compound. Form -coating compounds shall not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion. Form -coating compounds will be applied in accord- ance with the manufacturer`s instructions. Reinforcement shall be free of loose rust, mill scale, earth and other foreign materials which reduce or destroy the bond with concrete. Reinforcement shall be accurately positioned, supported and secured against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Reinforcement shall be located and supported by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangars as required. Reinforcement shall be placed to obtain at least the minimum coverages for concrete protection. Wire ties shall be set so that ends are directed into the concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. 3-7 Pretensioning of tendons for prestressed concrete may be accomplished either by a single strand tensioning method or the multiple - strand tensioning method. Pretensioning shall comply with PCI MNL-116 requirements. Concrete shall be placed in a continuous operation to prevent the formation of seams or planes of weakness in precast units, and placement shall comply with the requirements of ACI 304. Placed con- crete shall be thoroughly consolidated in each precast and precast, prestressed unit by internal and external vibration without dislocation or damage to reinforcement and built-in items. 11-5 Curing Accelerated concrete hardening to reduce the curing time re- quired for prestressed units may be employed by curing the units with low-pressure steam, with steam vapor, with radiant heat and moisture, or other similar processes. Detensioning of the prestressed units shall not be performed until the concrete has attained a minimum strength of 4,000 psi as established by test cylinders. If the concrete has been heat -cured, detensioning shall be performed while the concrete is still warm and moist, to avoid dimensional changes which may cause cracking or undesirable stresses in the concrete. Detensioning of pre- stressed tendons may be accomplished either by gradual release of the tensioning jacks or by heat cutting the tendons, using a sequence and pattern to prevent shock or unbalanced loading. 11-6 Finishing Precast and precast, prestressed units shall have a normal plant run finish produced in forms that impart a smooth finish to the concrete. Small surface holes caused by air bubbles, normal form joint marks, and minor chips and spalls will be tolerated, but no major or unsightly imperfections, honeycombs, or structural defects will be permitted. Unformed surfaces shall be float finished to a smooth uniform surface. Precast•prestressed units which will receive concrete topping after installation shall be finished with a scratch finish. Following the initial strikeoff, the units shall be scarified trans- versely to provide ridges approximately 1/4" deep. 11-7 Precast Beams Precast concrete units shall be produced under a rigidly inspected process acceptable to the Engineer. Units shall be free of voids and honeycombs, with straight true edges and surfaces, finished as specified. Where ends of strands will not be enclosed or covered, cut flush and cover with a high strength mortar bonded with an epoxy resin bonding agent. 3-8 Units shall be adequately reinforced to resist all trans- porting and handling stresses. Cooperation with other trades for the installation of items to be cast -in the precast structural beams shall be maintained. The Contractor shall be notified of items not received in ample time so as not to delay the work. ` 11-8 Double Tee Units Precast, prestressed concrete units shall be plant fabri- cated under a rigidly inspected process acceptable to the Engineer. Units shall be free of voids or honeycombs, with straight true edges and surfaces. Where ends of strands will not be enclosed or covered, they shall be cut flush and covered with high strength mortar bonded to the unit with epoxy bonding agent. Precast, prestressed concrete units to which the concrete post -tensioned topping slab will be applied shall receive a scratch finish as specified. Units shall be adequately reinforced to resist all trans- portation and handling stresses. Weld plates shall be cast in the units where required for anchorage. Block -outs and appurtenances for opening shall be as in- dicated on the drawings and in accordance with precast untit manufacturer's recommendations. Cooperation with other trades shall be maintained for the installation of items to be cast in the precast prestressed units. 11-9 Identification Permanent markings shall be provided in precast units to identify pick-up points and orientation in the structure, complying with the markings indicated on the final shop drawings. The date of casting shall be imprinted on each unit where it will not show on the finished structure. 11-10 Quality Control The precast unit manufacturer shall institute quality control procedures for the manufacture, inspection, and testing of precast units in compliance with the recommendations of PCI MNL-116. If requested, copies of test reports and/or certifications for materials and quality control testing of precast units shall be furnished to the Engineer. 12. INSTALLATION OF PRECAST BEAMS AND PRECAST PRESTRESSED DOUBLE TEES Bearing pads shall be installed where indicated, as precast units are being erected. Pads shall be set on level, uniform bearing surfaces - and maintained in correct position until precast units are placed. 3-9 Open spaces at connections shall be grouted after precast units have been placed and secured, using a cement grout composed of 1 part portland cement, 2-1/2 parts sand, and enough water to properly mix the ingredients, allowing for hydration. Forms or other acceptable methods shall be used to retain the grout in place until it hardens. Spaces shall be packed with a stiff grout material, by tamping until voids are completely filled. Grout shall be finished smooth, plumb, and level with adjacent concrete surafces. Grouted joints shall remain damp for not less than 24 hours after its initial set. Precast units shall be lifted, placed and secured in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and final shop drawings, keeping units level, plumb, and aligned. The erection procedures and sequence of erection shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as acceptable to the Engineer. Units shall be aligned and levelled by methods, procedures, and equipment recommended by the manufacturer and within the specified tolerances. Cutting holes or installing sleeves larger than the size permitted by the manufacturer for penetrations will not be permitted. No rein- forcing or strands shall be cut without specific approval of the manu- facturer and the Engineer. Field cut holes for openings that do not disturb reinforcing or strands shall be in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. Damaged exposed surfaces shall be repaired as specified herein. All required welding shall be in compliance with AWS D 1.0 and D 12.1, including qualification of welders. Units shall be protected from damage by field welding or cutting operations and non-combustible shields shall be provided as required. Damaged metal surfaces shall be repaired by cleaning and applying a coat of liquid galvanizing repair compound to exposed surfaces. 13. PLANT QUALITY CONTROL EVALUATIONS Precast or precast prestressed units having any dimension greater than required will be rejected if the appearance or function of the structure is adversely affected, or if the larger dimensions interfere with other construction. Rejected units shall be repaired or removed and replaced as required to meet the construction conditions. The strength of precast units will be considered potentially de- ficient if the manufacturing process fails to comply with any of the requirements which may affect the strength of precast units, including the following: Failure to meet compressive strength test requirements. Reinforcement, and pretensioning and detensioning of tendons of prestressed concrete, not conforming to specified fabrication re- quirements. 3-10 Concrete curing, and protection of precast units against extremes in temperature, not as specified. Precast units damaged during handling and erection. Precast or precast prestressed units which do not conform to the specified strength requirements shall be replaced with precast or pre- cast prestressed units that meet the requirements of this section. Pre- cast products which do not meet the dimensional tolerances of this speci- fication shall be rejected at the option of the Engineer, if they cannot 1 be satisfactorily corrected. The Contractor shall also be responsible for the cost of corrections to any other work affected by or resulting from corrections to the precast concrete work. � I � I � I I 3-11 J ' SECTION 4 POST -TENSIONED CONCRETE TOPPING SLAB 1. GENERAL ' This section covers the requirements for the post -tensioned con- crete required for the project. The extent of the post -tensioned con- crete work is as shown on the drawings and as described herein. The post -tensioned topping slab shall be constructed on top of precast, pre- stressed structural tees and shall be frictionally bonded to the tees to result in a composite section. The post -tensioning shall produce a minimum effective stress of 200 psi in the topping slab. This section establishes general criteria for materials, mixes, evaluation of concrete, dimensional tolerances, installation procedures and inspection standards. The post - tensioned topping slab shall comply with the provisions of these specifi- cations and to the provisions of the codes, specifications and standards, referenced herein, except as otherwise shown. The Contractor shall fur- nish all materials, equipment, labor, superintendence and incidentals ' necessary for construction of the post -tensioned topping slab, complete in place. 2. QUALITY ASSURANCE 2-1 Codes and Standards The post -tensioned topping slab shall be constructed as speci- fied herein and in compliance with the provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards: ACI 301 - "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings". ACI 311 - "Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection". ACI 318 - "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete". ACI 347 - "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork". ACI 304 - "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete". Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Stand- ard Practice". Prestressed Concrete Institute, "Manual for Quality Con- trol" MNL-16. Post -Tensioning Institute, "Post -Tensioning Manual". 4-1 2-2 Supplier Qualifications The post -tensioning materials supplier shall be a firm which has had a minimum of 5 years successful experience in providing the mater- ials, equipment and supervision required for construction of similar in- stallations. The supplier shall be an active member of the Post -Tension- ing Institute. The Contractor, at his option, may perform the post -tensioning operation, under the suppliers recommendation and supervision, provided he can comply with the provisions of this specification and can produce a finished product of high quality workmanship. 3. SUBMITTALS 3-1 Shop Drawings Shop drawings showing complete information for the fabrication and installation of the post -tensioned topping slab shall be submitted to the Engineer. Shop drawings shall indicate dimensions and cross sections; location, size and type of reinforcement and tendons; location and size of embedded items and conduit; locations and dimensions of expansion joints; and the proposed order and sequence of construction. Shop drawings shall also indicate the effective compressive force resulting from the post tensioning operation. A complete set of the suppliers design calculations prepared by a registered engineer shall be submitted for the post -tensioned construction to verify the adequacy of tendons, spacing, and anchorage members. As previously stated, the post - tensioning slab shall maintain a minimum effective compressive stress of 200 psi. 4. JOB CONDITIONS Prior to the installation of any materials for the.post-tensioned slab, the supplier shall examine all portions of the supporting structure, the conditions under which the post -tensioned concrete work is to be con- structed, and shall notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detri- mental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Construction shall not commence until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the supplier and to the Engineer. Conduit and other embedded items required for construction shall be delivered to the project site before the start of the work. Setting in- structions, diagrams, templates, instructions and directions required for installation shall be provided. Post -tensioned tendons shall be accurately placed and secured as required, within the specified tolerances, by ade- quately supporting the tendons. 4-2 5. MATERIALS 5-1 Prestressing Strands Strands used in post -tensioning tendons shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A416, "Specifications for Uncoated Seven -Wire Stress - Relieved Strands for Prestressed Concrete," Grade 270. 5-2 Unbonded Tendons Unbonded tendons, including the complete assembly of the anchorage and prestressing steel and sheathing, shall be used for the pro- posed construction. The anchorages of unbonded tendons shall develop at least ' 95 percent of the minimum specified ultimate strength of the prestress- ing steel. Elongation under ultimate load of the tendon shall not be less than 2 percent measured in a minimum gauge length of 10 feet. Unbonded tendons shall have the prestressing steel permanently protected against corrosion by a properly applied coating of galvanizing, epoxy, grease, wax, plastic, bituminous material or other approved material. Sheathing for unbonded tendons shall have the tensile strength and water -resistance sufficient to resist unrepairable damage and deter- ioration during transportation, storage and installation. The sheathing shall prevent the intrusion of grout and the escape of coating material and shall be a continuous tube or spirally wrapped. The ultimate strength for unbonded tendons shall not be taken greater than the ultimate capacity of the anchorages or couplings. 1 5-3 Bearing Stresses The average bearing stresses of the concrete created by the ' anchorage plates shall not exceed the values allowed under Section 3.1.7 of the Post -Tensioning Institute, "Post -Tensioning Manual". Any special reinforcement, required for the performance of the anchorage, shall be indicated by the tendon supplier on the shop drawings. 5-4 Specification Compliance Requirements Certified mill test results and typical stress -strain curves shall be submitted for prestressing steel, when requested. The typical a stress -strain curve shall be obtained by approved standard practices. 5-5 Concrete Materials ' Concrete materials for the post -tensioned topping slab shall _ conform to the specifications in Section 2, "Concrete," and shall have a minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi. Post -tensioning operations ' shall not commence until the concrete reaches a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi. 1 4-3 6. CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 6-1 Formwork Forms utilized for the post -tensioned topping slab shall be metal, plastic, wood or other acceptable material that is non -reactive with concrete and which will provide a smooth finished surface. Forms shall be drilled to receive tendon stressing hardware and bearing plates in accordance with the shop drawings. Fabrication and placement details provided by the post -tensioning supplier will show end anchorage details, bolt hole dimensions, tendon identification, spacing, stressing data, clearance requirements for the stressing equip- ment and anchorage blockout dimensions. 6-2 Placing Tendons Pre -assembled tendons shall be placed as a unit prior to placing concrete. Supporting ties for pre -placed tendons shall be of adequate size and stability to support the tendon weight and to securely hold the tendons in place during concrete placing operations. The ten- dons shall be spaced as indicated on the approved shop drawings in the center of the topping slab. Tendons shall be placed vertically within + 1/8-inch of the locations as indicated on the shop drawings. Hori- zontal deviations necessitated by openings, inserts, or other miscel- laneous items shall have a radius of curvature of not less than 21 feet. Care shall be taken in unloading and handling the tendons to prevent damage to the sheathing. Any damaged tendons will be repaired or replaced prior to concrete placement operations. Concrete cover between tendons and openings in the slab shall not exceed six inches. Non -prestressed reinforcing steel shall be added as indicated on the shop drawings, as recommended by the post -tensioning materials supplier in these locations. Additional reinforcing steel required at anchorage areas shall be as recommended by the materials supplier, or as directed by the Engineer. 6-3 Concrete Placement The Contractor shall supply the Engineer with a proposed placing schedule which shall indicate the location of all construction joints required for the topping slab. This schedule shall be approved by the Engineer prior to commencement of any concrete placing operations. Placement and curing shall be in accordance with the refer- enced codes and standards contained herein and in accordance with Section 2, "Concrete", of these specifications. An acceptable concrete curing com- pound shall be applied to the concrete topping slab immediately after the final strike -off and finishing operation. No concrete shall be left exposed for a period exceeding 30 minutes after finishing. The curing compound utilized shall be an all -resin compound, approved by the Engineer, which will not impair bonding of a surface finish to be applied under a future contract. 4-4 Expansion joints of an approved type material will be located at the locations indicated on the drawings. The expansion joints shall be formed by using pour strips adjacent to the post -tensioned slabs and shall result in a one -inch joint, accounting for creep and shortening of the post -tensioned slab. Prior to placing any concrete, tendon profiles shall be checked and adjusted as required. Horizontal alignment shall be checked to insure minimum horizontal deviations and proper concrete cover at openings. Care shall be exercised to prevent concrete from entering .pockets, sheathing, or anchorage hardware. Concrete shall be placed in such a manner that tendon alignment and reinforcing steel positions re- main unchanged. Special care shall be given in consolidation of concrete at tendon anchorages to assure uniform consolidation and compaction; and to eliminate any voids behind the bearing plates. 6-4 Tendon Stressing If stressing is not to be performed by the post -tensioning materials supplier, all necessary stressing equipment shall be furnished by the supplier and delivered to the job site so as not to cause delays in the construction schedule. The stressing operation shall begin only after laboratory tests indicate that the concrete has reached a compressive strength of 3,000 psi. Tendons shall be stressed only when proper data and exper- ienced personnel are present. The stressing shall be carefully monitored in accordance with a stressing data chart provided by the post -tensioning materials supplier. Stressing shall be monitored by two methods: the force in the • tendon at the anchorage and by the theoretical elongation of the tendon. In calculating the theoretically elongation, the actual modulus of elas- ticity of the strands used for the project shall be utilized and compen- sation for friction losses shall be considered in translating tendon elongation measurements into tendon forces. The tendon force measured at the anchorage shall agree with + 5 percent with the tendon force calculated by elongation measurements. Should stressing reveal that voids exist and that bearing plates are receding into the concrete, all pressure on the equipment ' shall be removed at once and the damage areas will be repaired and at- tain the required strength before restressing the tendon. Stressing shall proceed in a sequence and order so as not to cause undue eccentricities and stresses in the post -tensioned topping slab. The stressing operation shall result in providing a minimum effective compressive stress of 200 psi in the post -tensioned slab. 4-5 6-5 Protection of End Anchorages Additional reinforcing steel shall be placed at pocket or edge strips as indicated on the shop drawings. Forms shall be set securely against previously placed concrete, to insure the accurate placement of cover concrete in recesses, pockets and edge strips. All exposed end anchorages and wires shall be protected by an approved epoxy coating, mastic, or concrete cover. Calcium chloride shall not be used in concrete used to protect end anchorages. Cover concrete with as low a slump as possible shall be utilized to avoid excessive shrinkage, and shall be well vibrated to insure compaction around end anchorages. 6-6 Surface Finish and Tolerances The post -tensioned concrete topping slab shall be constructed accurately to the lines and grades as shown on the drawings. The concrete shall be spread as soon as it is placed, and it shall be struck -off and screeded by an approved finishing machine. After the concrete has been struck -off and consolidated, it shall be further smoothed, trued, and consolidated by means of a longitudinal float. The topping slab shall receive a medium broom final finish. After the floating operation is completed, but while the concrete is still plastic, the sur- face shall be tested with a 16-foot straightedge. Any depressions shall be immediately filled with freshly mixed concrete, struck -off, consolidated and refinished. High areas shall be cut down and refinished. Special attention shall be given to insure that the surface across joints conforms to the requirements for smoothness. All areas shall be tested with a 16- foot straightedge and any areas showing high spots of more than 1/4-inch shall be ground down with an approved grinding tool. Where the departure from the correct cross section exceeds 1/2-inch, or impedes surface drainage in any manner, the concrete shall be rejected. All surface testing shall be done prior to the stressing oFera- tion, so that damaged or non -conforming areas can be repaired as required. 4-6 SECTION 5 METERING. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS 1. SCOPE This section of the specifications governs the requirements of the flow metering and instrumentation, reservoir level monitor- ing, pump control and motor -operated valve control. All instrumentation and control facilities required by this section of the specifications shall be furnished complete by one contractor or sub -contractor and he shall be completely responsible ' for detail design of the system, for furnishing and installing all components required for operation in accordance with these speci- fications, for testing and start-up of the system, and for all other incidental items required to comply with this section of the specifi- cations. It is the intent of these specifications to provide for the installation of a complete and operable system which will satisfy the functional and other requirements of the specifications. This section of the specifications does not contain an itemized list of all the necessary components of the systems and it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine the exact components required to conform with the functional requirements. Also, it is not intended to imply that the drawings show all wiring, conduit and devices required for the instrumentation and control systems. All such items required for a complete and operable system, shall be furnished and installed for the lump sum price bid for the pro- ject. 2. PUMP DISCHARGE FLOW METERING ' 2-1 Venturi Tubes (VT-1, VT-2) The metering primary shall be of the pressure differ- ential producing type utilizing pure static pressure sensed at the inlet and throat. Devices amplifying the differential by causing change in the direction of the flow at the cross sections where in- let and/or throat static pressure is sensed shall not be considered. The tube coefficient shall be constant for pipe Reynolds number of 75,000 and greater and independent of beta ratio. The metering tube shall be an insert type tube. It shall be designed for installation within the pipeline at a flanged joint with no special equipment or foundations required. The tube shall be provided with integral gaskets. 1 5-1 The tube shall include a sharply angled conical section followed by a 7 degree throat cone, a cylindrical throat section, and a divergent truncated recovery section. The tube Shall be con- structed of thermosetting polyester plastic, reinforced with not less than 25 percent glass by weight. Pressure connections on the tube shall be stainless steel. The tube shall be self -scouring. The manufacturer shall furnish a certified flow vs. differential curve to the Engineer for approval. The manufacturer shall furnish certified data substantiating tube proportions and per- formance. The data shall include coefficient values and tolerance; effects of upstream configurations; head loss as a function of the velocity head expended; and proof that coefficient is independent of beta and line size. The accuracy shall be ± 0.5% of actual rate of flow corresponding to the differential produced, over the range of 5.0 to 25.0 mgd. The tube shall produce a differential of approximately 190 inches of water at maximum rate of flow and head loss at that rate shall not exceed 10 inches of water. The insert tube shall be BIF, Model 182 or approved equal. 2-2 Transmitters (FT-1, FT-2) The transmitter shall be actuated by a liquid filled beryllium copper bellows assembly having seals which prohibit deformation of the bellows due to overload. The bellows shall be contained in a forged brass housing designed for working pressure up to 500 psig. The assembly shall have integral tempera- ture compensation from 40" to 120' F. The bellows assembly shall be equipped with air vent valves, a pipe manifold with bypass valve and a hydraulic test head device for checking calibration in the field. The damping system shall have an external adjust- ment. The transmitter shall be furnished with a mounting flange for wall or floor stand mounting. The motion of the bellows shall be transmitted to the pulse duration mechanism by a torque tube. The transmitter shall operate on 117 v, 60 Hz through an internal switch and fuse module. The pulse duration mechanism shall consist of a synchron- ous motor driven function generating cam, a rate arm, magnet rocker bar and a hermetically sealed glass enclosed signal switch. The output shall be a 15-second pulse duration (PDM) signal direct- ly proportional to flow.. The transmitter shall have a micrometer type zero adjustment. The mechanism shall be contained in a molded high impact plastic housing forming a NEMA 4 enclosure. 5-2 The transmitter shall be specifically designed to kk function with the venturi tubes specified in the preceding para- graph. The accuracy shall be -i' 1% of maximum rate over a range of 5 to 25 mgd. ' The transmitter shall include a segmental indicator with calibrated graduations from 0-100%. ' 2-3 Receivers (FIR-1, FIR-2) The receiver shall be actuated by a 15-second time pulse input signal. The electronic circuitry shall be of solid ' state components designed to drive a servo positioner which shall ' remain motionless unless there is a change in the measured vari- able, All components within the receiver shall be of modular con- struction with each circuit card plugged into a mother board which shall be wired directly to an internal terminal strip with color coded wire. The necessary do power supply for the signal circuit shall be an intergral part of the receiver and compatible with com- mercial telephone requirements. The entire mechanism shall be mounted on a slide tray with all components completely service- able from the front of the instrument. Internal wiring shall include on -off switch and fuse. The case shall be steel with molded plastic door bezel containing a clear plastic door and magnetic latch. The upper border of the window shall be white j lamicoid. The lower border shall display the function legend engraved on white lamicoid with block letters. The case shall be equipped with an integral mounting bracket for mounting to panels or consoles. The charts shall be of the strip type, nominally 4" x 4" and driven by a syncronous motor through a toothed belt and sprocket which prevents "slip" or "walk". The charge carriage shall be removable from the front of the instrument without disturbing operation. The inking system shall be of the capillary "fine line" type. The pen -indicator shall lift free of the chart automatically when the chart carriage is with- drawn for chart changing. The pen shall be of the replaceable L' cartridge type with a 90-day ink supply based upon a 1" per hour chart speed. The pen shall have an integral indicator. The indicator shall run beside the chart and be nominally 4" long and have black graduations on white background. The multiplier for readout shall consist of the addition of ciphers only. The chart speed shall be 1" per hour. Graduations for chart and indicating scale shall be 0 to 25 mgd. The accurance shall be t 0.5% of full scale over a 10:1 range. The receivers shall be specifically designed to function . . with the transmitter specified in the preceding paragraph. ' Furnish a one year's supply of charts with each receiver. 5-3 2-4 Flow Totalizers (FN-1, FN-2) The totalizers shall be actuated by a 15 second time pulse signal. The input signal shall actuate a stepper motor to drive a seven digit, cyclometer type totalizer. The total- izer readout multiplier shall consist of the addition of ciphers only. The unit shall be contained in a white high impact styrene enclosure serviceable from the front of the panel. The components shall be mounted on a white lamicoid faceplate over an aluminum backplate with separate removable top and bottom service and function indentification strips, engraved in black letters all set in a black elastomeric raised bezel. The necessary 30 volts DC power supply shall be taken from the related flow receiver. The accuracy shall be ± 0.5% of actual rate from 10% to 100% of maximum rate. The totalizers shall be specifically designed to function with the receivers specified in the preceding paragraph. 3. STATION INFLOW TRANSMITTER (FT-3) The transmitter shall be actuated by a corrosion resistant polyester float and nylon covered stainless steel cable. The float motion shall be transmitted through a cable and pulley or gear combina- tion. The transmitter shall operate on 117 volts, 60 Hz through an internal switch and fuse module. The motion of pulley or gear combina- tion shall position a function generating cam which produces a linear angular motion to actuate a precision rotary differential transformer. The cam shall have a zero adjustment and alignment indication. The linkage between the cam and the differential trans- former shall have a self-locking adjustment for range and a micro- meter type zero adjustment. The AC output voltage from the trans- mitter shall be rectified, filtered and temperature compensated from 400 to 1200 F. with diode and thermistor techniques. This stabilized DC signal shall then be amplified with a linear integrated circuit to provide a 4-20 ma DC current output signal into output loads from 0-600 ohms. The output signal shall be used for flow pacing the chlorina- tor as specified in Section: CHLORINATION EQUIPMENT. The transmitter will measure flow over a 10-foot long sharp crested weir with side contractions. Maximum flow rate to be 40 mgd. The electronic modules shall be contained in a high impact molded plastic housing forming a NEMA 3 enclosure. The transmitter shall be furnished with a mounting flange for floor stand mounting. The float and pulley assembly shall be protected by a weatherproof sheet steel cover which is open at the bottom. Cable and counter- weight protection tubes shall be furnished with the transmitter. The accuracy shall be : 1% of actual rate of flow over a 20:1 range. The transmitter shall be equipped with a direct reading indicator mounted in the external face of the transmitter cover and reading in mgd. 5-4 I A thermostat and heater for freeze and condensation protection shall be included. 4. RESERVOIR LEVEL MONITORING 4-1 Level Transmitter (LT-1) The transmitter shall be actuated by a corrosion resistant polyester float and nylon covered stainless steel cable. The float motion shall be transmitted to a cable drum grooved to prevent binding of the cable. The motion of the cable drum shall be transmitted to the pulse duration mechanism by a mechanical lever with self-locking range adjustment. The transmitter shall operate on 117 v, 60 Hz through an internal switch and fuse module. The pulse duration mechanism shall consist of a synchronous motor driven function generating cam, a rate arm, magnet rocker bar and a hermetically sealed glass enclosed signal switch. The output shall be a 15 second (PDM) signal directly proportional to level. The transmitter shall have a micrometer type zero adjustment. The components shall be con- tained in a molded high impact plastic case forming a NEMA 4 enclosure. The float mechanism shall be weather shielded by a molded high im- pact plastic hood. Cable and counterweight protection tubes shall be furnished with the transmitter and a mounting flange for wall or floor stand mounting. The maximum float travel shall be 22 feet. The accuracy shall be ± 0.5% of the scale span over a 10:1 range. A thermostat and heater for freeze and condensation protec- tion shall be included. 4-2 Level Indicator (LI-1) The level indicator shall be actuated by the 15-second pulse duration signal from the transmitter specified in the preceding para- graph. The electronic circuitry shall be of solid state components. The electronic circuit shall convert the time pulse signal to a binary count which is transduced into a DC voltage proportional to the input signal. The DC signal shall drive a servo positioner by means of a closed loop circuit. The servo shall drive the various mechanisms of the instrument. The positioner shall remain motionless unless there is a change in the measured variable. All components within the receiver shall be of modular construction with each circuit card plugged into a mother board which shall be wired directly to an internal terminal strip with color coded wire. The circuit shall be equipped with zero and span adjustments. The necessary DC power supply for the signal circuit shall be an integral part of the receiver and compatible with commercial telephone requirements. The entire mechanism shall be mounted on a swivel plate with magnetic latch making all components completely serviceable from the front of the instrument. Internal wiring shall include on -off switch and fuse. The mechanism shall be contained in a steel case with pressed steel door, forming a NEMA 1 enclosure suitable for panel mounting. 5-5 The indicator dial shall be nominal 10-inches in diameter and shall be calibrated from 0 to 25 feet. The accuracy of the indi- cator shall be ± 0.5% of full scale over a 10:1 range. A retransmission relay to retransmit the 15 second pulse duration signal shall be included with the instrument. 4-3 Level Indicator -Recorder (LIR-1) The reservoir level indicator -recorder shall conform to the requirements of paragraph 2-3, above. The receiver shall be specifically designed to function with the transmitter and retrans- mission relay specified in the preceding paragraphs. Adjustable high and low level alarm switches shall be pro- vided. 5. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS, CONTROL SYSTEM 5-1 General The following paragraphs briefly outline the functional requirements of the control system. Any system which does not fully satisfy these requirements will not be approved. 5-2 Pump Controls The pump control system shall provide for remote ON -OFF operation of two booster pumps from the Dispatcher's Office. Space shall be provided in the enclosure at the Dispatcher's Office for control switches and tone equipment for control of two future pumps. Status report -back from the pumping units is not required. 5-3 Valve Controls The valve control system shall provide for remote OPEN -NO ACTION -CLOSE operation of 4 motor -operated valves. The controls shall permit the dispatcher to stop the valve in any desired position to provide throttling of the flow with the valve. Space shall be provided in the enclosure at the Dispatcher's Office for control switches and tone equipment for control of four future motor -operated valves. Status report -back from the valves is not required. 5-4 Station Alarm One of the tone channels shall be used as a station alarm channel and shall activate the alarm in event of loss of power at the station or loss of communication between the station and the Dis- patcher's Office.. The enclosure at the Dispatcher's Office shall contain an audible and visual alarm with an alarm silence button to silence the audible alarm. 5-6 The high and low level switches in the 10 mg Reservoir Level Receiver (LIR-1) shall also be connected to the audible alarm. Separate visual alarm lights shall be provided for the high and low ' level alarms. 6. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT t6-1 General This paragraph of the specifications sets forth certain requirements for the principal equipment items required for the con- ' trol systems. It is the intent of this paragraph to establish a standard of quality for the equipment furnished. Any manufacturers' names, brand names or model numbers which are stated herein are used to establish a standard of quality without the intent of excluding other equipment of equal quality. Other equipment may be used upon approval by the Engineer. The Engineer may consider such factors as general design of the equipment, experience of the manufacturer, availability of service and parts, and any other factor which, in the judgement of the Engineer, may affect the operation and the reliability of the systems. 6-2 Tone Equipment All tone equipment shall be frequency shift units. Frequency shift transmitters and receivers shall be Model FST and Model FSR, respectively, as manufactured by BIF accutel or QT-30 and QR-30, respectively, as manufactured by QEI. =� Tone racks and power supplies shall be furnished and in- stalled as required. =' 6-3 Enclosures . 6-3.1 General All enclosures shall be shop -assembled with all internal wiring completed and brought to terminal strips for connec- tion to external wiring. All connections shall be tagged and numbered and all wiring shall conform with approved wiring diagrams. All internal wiring shall be color coded, No. 18 AWG minimum wire size. All internal wiring shall be neatly bundled and located and supported so as to prevent strain on the wiring when access doors are open or ' when components are being serviced. A switch shall be provided on the power supply to each enclosure which requires 110 volt power. Doors or access openings shall be provided as re- 4 rl quired to provide easy access to all components. Enclosures shall be fabricated of the gauge steel specified and shall be formed and welded for rigidity with bracing members as required. Following fabrication, the panels shall be thoroughly cleaned, both internally and externally, finished smooth with epoxy filler and sanded. Painting shall consist of a rust -inhibitive primer and two coats of enamel, colors as selected by the Engineer. 5-7 1 6-3.2 Enclosure at Pump Station Enclosure for control equipment at the Pump Station may be either free-standing or wall mounted. Construction shall be equal to NEMA-12 using as a minimum 12-gauge steel. All components shall be accessible through doors in the front or side of the enclosure. All doors shall be provided with piano type hinges and shall have quarter -turn pressure type latches. All components mounted on the face of the panel shall be provided with Lamicoid nameplates. Space shall be provided in the enclosure for the future installation of 6 additional tone transmitters or receivers for control of two future pumping units. 6-3.3 Enclosure at Water Dispatcher's Office The enclosure at the Water Dispatcher's Office shall be of dimensions shown on the drawings and shall be similar and equal to the adjacent existing panels in appearance and general construction. The face of the enclosure shall be Formica matching the color of the existing panels. Full length rear access door shall be provided with piano -type hinges and quarter -turn pressure type latches. Metal shall be 10-gauge minimum. Chrome trim shall match existing panels. Space shall be provided in the enclosure for the future installation of the following items for control and monitoring of two future pumping units: 2 - Pump Control Switches 2 - Pump Discharge Valve Control Switches 2 - Rate -of -Flow Indicator -Recorders 2 - Totalizers 6 - Tone Transmitters or Receivers Shop drawings for the enclosures shall indicate the locations for the future equipment items. All components mounted on the face of the panel shall be provided with Lamicoid nameplates. A nameplate with the legend PUMP STATION NO. 10 shall be placed near the top of the en- closure. 6-4 Control Switches Control switches mounted in the enclosure patcher's Office shall be equal to Micro Switch Type lighted legends. Pump Control switches shall be of Push to Stop" type. Valve control switches shall be Open, Turn to Close, Push to Stop" type. 5-8 at the Water Dis- CMC with back - the "Turn to Start, of the "Turn to 7. ELECTRICAL WORK All electrical work required for the installation of the in- strumentation and control system shall be accomplished in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section: ELECTRICAL WORK. 8. START-UP SERVICES The Contractor shall furnish the services of a qualified tech- nician for calibration and start-up of all control and instrumen- tation equipment. In addition to these services, the technician shall spend not less than 8 hours instructing the Owner's personnel in calibration, maintenance and operation of all equipment furnished ' under this section of the specifications prior to completion of the project. 9. SYSTEM DRAWINGS Prior to final acceptance of the project, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner six prints and one reproducible drawing of the completed system. The drawings shall be 24 x 36 inches. The enclosures at the Water Dispatcher's Office and at the Booster Pump Station shall be provided with pockets in which copies of the wiring diagrams may be inserted. 1-1 I 1 5-9 SECTION 6 PIPING, VALVES, AND FITTINGS 1. GENERAL This section of the specifications covers all piping, valves, and fittings required for the project. The term piping as used herein shall include all piping, valves, fittings and accessories as shown on the plans and/or as specified herein. Types and classes of pipe to be used at the various locations shall be as scheduled on the drawings or as listed below: Pump Location 1. Supply lines to reservoir. 2. Pump suction lines, 36- inch diameter and smaller. 3. Pump suction lines, larger than 36-inch diameter. 4. Pump discharge lines. 5. Chlorine solution lines. 6. Miscellaneous short sec- tions of pump discharge or suction pipe within pump building. 2. PIPE MATERIALS Type Pipe Pretensioned concrete cylinder pipe, 150 psi. Pretensioned concrete cylinder pipe, 100 psi. (see item 6 for exceptions). Prestressed concrete embedded cylinder pipe, 100 psi. (see item 6 for exceptions). Pretensioned concrete cylinder pipe, 150 psi. (see item 6 for exceptions). Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), SDR 21. Concrete lined steel pipe, 100 psi on pump suction lines and 150 psi on pump discharge lines. 2-1 Pretensioned Concrete Cylinder Pipe Pretensioned concrete cylinder pipe shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with current AWWA Standard C 303 and shall be approved by Underwriter's Laboratories. An affidavit of com- pliance with the AWWA standard shall be furnished. In general, below ground joints shall be of the self - centering rubber gasket type. Where noted on the drawings or where required by special conditions, flanged, mechanical joint, or other special joints shall be provided. Shop drawings of the pipe will be submitted to the Engineer for approval before any of the pipe is fabricated. 1 Op 2-2 Prestressed Concrete Embedded Cylinder Pipe Prestressed concrete embedded cylinder pipe shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with current AWWA Standard C 301, and shall.be approved by Underwriter's Laboratories. In general, joints shall be of the self -centering rubber gasket type. Where noted on the drawings or where required by special conditions, flanged, mechanical joint, or other special joints shall be provided. Shop drawings of the pipe will be submitted to the Engineer for approval before any of the pipe is fabricated. 2-3 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe PVC pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2241 including the marking requirements. All PVC pipe shall be approved by the National Sanitation Foundation Testing Laboratories, Incorpo- rated, or other accredited laboratory for use in the transportation of potable water and shall bear the seal of approval of the testing laboratory. PVC joints shall be of the integral thickened bell type using rubber rings or of the solvent weld type. The rings and lubri- cants or solvents shall be suitable for use in potable water service. PVC pipe shall have a water pressure rating of not less than 200 psi at 23' C with a standard dimension ratio of 21 or heavier. 2-4 Steel Pipe Steel pipe used inside the pump building shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with current AWWA Standard C 200. The pipe shall have a cement -mortar lining installed in accordance with current AWWA Standard C 205. Joints for the pipe shall be as indicated on'the drawings. 2-5 Copper Pipe Copper pipe installed underground shall be Type K, soft temper. All exposed copper pipe shall be type L, hard temper, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. 2-6 Galvanized or Black Steel Pipe Small steel pipe shall be galvanized or black as shown on the drawings and shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 120. 2-7 Pipe Fittings Fittings for pretensioned concrete cylinder pipe shall, in general, be fabricated in accordance with current AWWA C 303. End joints shall be as required for each particular installation. All metal shall be protected with cement mortar. Fittings on pump suction and discharge piping within the pump building shall be steel or cast iron. Cast iron dimension I 6-2 fittings will generally be required to meet the dimensional require- ments as shown on the project drawings. Steel fittings shall comply with the requirements of current AWWA C 200 and shall be lined in accordance with current AWWA C 205. Cast iron fittings conforming to current AWWA C 110 will be used on the pump suction or discharge lines within the pump building where required to comply with the dimensional requirements indicated on the project drawings. Joints shall be as indicated on the drawings. All cast iron fittings shall have an internal cement lining conforming to current AWWA C 104. Fittings shall have a pressure rating equal to that of the pipe with which they are used but in no case less than 150 psi. Flanged fittings shall be drilled and faced in accord- ance with ANSI B 16.1 for Class 125 flanges. Fittings for PVC pipe shall be solvent weld PVC fittings. 2-8 Flanged Coupling Adapters Flanged coupling adapters shall be provided at the loca- tions shown on the drawings and at other locations required for installation of the piping system. Flanged coupling adapters will be provided with anchoring studs. Rockwell couplings are indicated on the drawings. Equal couplings by Dresser will be acceptable. 3. VALVES AND APPURTENANCES " 3-1 Butterfly Valves All butterfly valves shall conform to AWWA C 504 for Rubber -Seated Butterfly Valves as modified herein. Buried valves shall have mechanical joint ends unless flanged ends are shown on the drawings. Valves may be short body unless long body valves are called for on the drawings. Wafer - type valves are not permitted. Valve discs may be of any material permitted by AWWA C 504 except fabricated steel. Valve bodies shall be of cast iron conforming to ASTM A126 Class B, ASTM A48 Class 40, or ductile IN iron conforming to ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12. Design, materials and construction of the valve seats, shafts, bearings and shaft seals shall be as specified in AWWA C504. All tests required by Section 12 of AWWA C504 shall be performed and the manufacturer shall furnish certified copies of the reports covering these tests. I ' Manual operators conforming to the requirements of AWWA C 504 shall be provided with each valve. All manual operators, except those on buried valves, shall be provided with handwheels. Operators for buried valves shall be specifically designed for buried service and shall be provided with 2-inch square operating nuts. Valve boxes as specified in paragraph 3-2, below, shall be furnished with r each buried valve. 6-3 Extension stems shall be furnished on buried valves where the top of the operating nut is more than 36-inches below finished grade. Top of 'the extension stem shall not be more than 9-inches below the top of. the valve box. 3-2 Valve Boxes Buried valves shall be provided with cast iron valve boxes. The boxes shall be designed to fit over a section of 6-inch cast iron pipe which will be used as an extension from the top of the valve to within 8-inches of the ground surface. The box shall have a heavy cast iron cover. The box shall have a flange type base, with the base -being approximately 4 inches larger in diameter than the outside diameter of the barrel of the box. The necessary length of 6-inch cast iron pipe required for the extension shall be considered as a part of the valve box. 3-3 Ball Valves Three electric motor operated ball valves are to be fur- nished and installed as part of this project. One will be a sixteen - inch ball valve on a pump discharge line, and the other two will be eighteen -inch ball valves on the supply lines to the reservoir being constructed as part of this project. Ball valves shall conform to current AWWA C 507 and shall have a design pressure rating of 150 psi. Flanges shall be drilled in accordance with ANSI B 16.1 for Class 125 flanges. 27 inches. The laying length of the 16-inch valve shall not exceed Bodies and plugs shall be of cast or ductile iron. Ball valves shall be provided with electric motor operators conforming to current AWWA Standard C 507. The valves are to be used for modulating flowrates and the operator motors and gearboxes shall be appropriately derated for this type service. The operators shall be'equipped with handwheel operators for manual operation, and the handwheel operator shall be of the non -coincidental type. The unit shall automatically return from the manual operating posi- tion to the electric motor operating position following manual operation. The three electric operators will normally be manually operated .from a remote location as described in Section 5, "Metering, Instrumentation, and Controls." The motor operators shall be designed to operate on a 200 v, 60 c, 3p power source and shall operate the valve from fully open to fully closed position, or the reverse, in not less than 2 minutes nor more than 3 minutes. The starting equipment for each valve operator shall be housed in a NEMA 3 enclosure equipped with a "Remote -Off -Local" switch mounted in the enclosure. It shall also be equipped with three push button opera- tors with functions and labels "Open -No Action -Close." 6-4 1'. W W The valve plugs shall have stainless steel seating sur- faces and the bodies shall have stainless steel or Monel seating surfaces. The valves shall be single seated. Shaft -seals on the valve shall be designed for replace- ment with the line at design pressure and with the plug in either the open or the closed position. ' Valve bearings shall be of stainless steel or bronze. The operating mechanism shall be housed in an enclosure with a removable cover that will allow the operating mechanism to be inspected and lubricated without removing the valve proper from ' the line. The operating mechanism shall be capable of being re- moved and repaired without removing the valve proper from the line. Additionally, the operating mechanism will be designed so that the packing on the main shaft can be replaced without removing the operat- ing mechanism housing and while the valve is in the line under pressure. The 16-inch ball valve will be used to control pressure surge when a pump is started or stopped, and as a throttling valve to control the pumping rate. ' Each of the two eighteen inch ball valves will be installed on a supply line to the reservoir. The valves will be used to con- trol the flowrate into the reservoir. Complete descriptive information and shop drawings for the ball valves and operators shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Positioning of the operators will be as determined by the Engineer during review of the shop drawings. The principal features of -the equipment design shall have been incorporated in the construction of similar valves of the same type and size, which have been in successful operation in similar installations for a period of at least five years. The ' ball valves shall be Williamette, List 26, or approved equal. 3-4 Check Valves The pump discharge piping shall have a mission Duo- Chek, or approved equal, check valve. The check valve shall be designed for a working pressure of 150 psi and shall be suitable for installation between Class 125 flanges. The required studs shall ' be furnished with the check valves. The check valves shall be cast iron bronze mounted with ' BUNA N-seals, nickel plated steel stops, 316 stainless steel pins and spring. The bodies shall be flangeless with flat facing. 1 6-5 4. PIPE INSTALLATION. 4-1 General All pipe and accessories required for the work specified herein shall be'unloaded, handled, laid, jointed, tested for defects and for leakage and chlorinated in the manner herein specified. Refer to Section 1 for additional requirements relating to trenching, bedding and backfilling. 4-2 Inspection The pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories shall be in- spected upon delivery and during the progress of the work and any material found to be defective will be rejected by the Engineer and the Contractor shall remove such defective material from the site of the work. 4-3 Responsibility for Materials The Contractor shall be responsible for all material furnished by him and he shall replace at his own expense all such material that is found to be defective in manufacture or has be- come damaged in handling after delivery. 4-4 Handling Pipe and Accessories All pipe, fittings, valves, and other accessories, shall, unless otherwise directed, be unloaded at the point of delivery, hauled to and distributed at the site of the work by the Contractor. In loading and unloading, they shall be lifted by hoists or slid, or rolled on skidways in such a manner as to avoid shock or damage to the materials, Under no circumstances shall they be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways must not be skidded or rolled against pipe al- ready on the ground. The pipe, fittings and accessories shall be placed along the site in such a manner as to be kept as free as possible from dirt, sand, mud and other foreign matter. 4-5 Excavation and Trenching The trench shall be excavated to the lines and grades as established by the Engineer. The minimum depth of cover for all pipe lines shall be thirty-six (36) inches, unless otherwise specifi- cally shown on the drawings. The minimum width of the trench shall be the outside diameter of the pipe plus twelve (12) inches and the maximum width shall be the outside diameter of the pipe plus eighteen (18) inches. The trenching equipment shall be maintained on a sufficiently level road bed to provide substantially vertical trench walls. The maximum horizontal offset of the trench wall from bottom of trench to the top of the trench (undercutting) shall be four (4) inches. 6-6 The trench shall be excavated to an even grade so that the bottom of the pipe will rest on the bottom of trench thoughout the entire length of the pipe. In order to obtain a true even grade, the trench shall be fine graded by hand. Any part of the trench excavated below grade shall be cor- rected by filling with approved material and thoroughly compacting. If ledge rock, rock fragments or other unyielding material is encountered in the bottom of the trench it shall be removed to a depth of three inches below grade, refilled with selected material, and thoroughly compacted. Bell holes of ample dimensions shall be dug at each joint to permit the jointing ofpipe to be made properly, and of sufficient depth to prevent the bell of the pipe from resting on undisturbed materials. Wherever necessary to prevent caving, the trench shall be adequately braced and sheeted. Trench digging machinery may be used to make trench excavations except in places where operation of same would cause damage to existing structures either above or below ground; in such instances, hand methods shall be employed. The Contractor shall locate all existing underground lines, of which he has been advised whether or not they are shown on the drawings, sufficiently in advance of trenching operations to prevent any damage thereto. Extreme care shall be used to prevent such damage and the Contractor shall be fully responsible for damage to any such lines. There will be'no classification of or extra payment for excavated materials and all materials encountered shall be excavated ' as required. Adjacent structures shall be protected from damage by construction equipment. All excavated material shall be piled in a manner which will not endanger the work or existing structures and 1 which will cause the least obstruction to roadways. . The Contractor will be required to locate all known utility lines, including consumer service lines, far enough in advance of 1 the trenching to make proper provisions for protecting the lines and to allow for any deviations that may be required from the esta- blished lines and grades. The Contractor shall not be allowed to disrupt the service ' on any utility lines except consumers service lines, which may be taken out of service for short periods of time, if the Contractor ob- tains permission from the Engineer. 1 6-7 The Contractor shall immediately notify the proper utility ' company of any damage to utility lines, in order that service may be established with the least possible delay. Any damage to existing lines and the repair of consumer lines which are authorized to be cut or temporarily taken out of service shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at his own expense, and as directed by an official representative of the utility company involved. ' All existing lines shall be properly supported to prevent settlement or damage to the line both during and after construction. Any permanent relocation of existing utility lines shall be done by proper utility company without expense to the Contractor. Where pipes, conduits or concrete curbs, gutters, or other obstructions are encountered in the construction, the cost of tunneling shall be included as a part of the cost of the pipeline, or other pay items, complete in place. Cutting of curb and gutter will not be permitted. Excess trench excavation, not used for backfilling, shall be disposed of by the Contractor, and at the Contractor's expense.; Blasting for excavation of solid rock will be permitted W only after securing the approval of the Engineer and only when proper precautions are taken for protection of persons or property. The hours of blasting will be fixed by the Engineer. Any damage caused by blastingshall be paid for by the Contractor. The method of pro- cedure relative to blasting shall conform to all state laws and local ordinances. 4-6 Pipe Laying • ift 4-6.1 General All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the specified lines and grades shown on the drawings or established by the Engineer. Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a ' straight line either in a vertical or horizontal plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb valves, or where vertical or horizontal curves are shown or permitted, the degree of deflection at each ' joint shall not exceed the maximum deflection recommended by the manufacturer of the particular kind of pipe being laid and the degree of deflection shall be approved by the Engineer. ' After the trench grade has been completed, all bell holes dug and the grade inspected, the pipes and accessories may be placed in the trench. All pipe, fittings, fire hydrants and valves shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of derricks, ropes, or other suitable tools or equipments, in such a manner as to prevent damage to the material in any way. Under no cir- cumstances shall pipe or accessories by dropped or dumped into the trench. 6-8 Before lowering into trench the pipe shall be again inspected for defects and cast iron pipe while suspended shall be lightly hammered to detect cracks. Any defective, damaged or unsound pipe and materials shall be rejected. All foreign matter or dirt shall be removed from the inside of the pipe and from all bells, spigots or parts of the pipe used in forming the joint, before the pipe is lowered into the trench, and it shall be kept clean by approved means during and after laying. 4-6.2 Laying and Jointing PVC Pipe PVC pipe shall be handled and installed in strict accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. Special care shall be exercised in handling PVC pipe, in preparation of the trench for pipe laying, and in compacting the bedding under and around each side of the pipe. Solvent weld pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned before installation. Solvent application and joining shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The ring groove shall be clean before installation of the rubber ring. The ring shall be carefully installed in the groove as recommended by the manufacturer. The spigot end of the pipe shall be wiped clean and lubricated using the recommended lubricant. The spigot end shall be carefully inserted into the bell end until the reference mark on the spigot end is flush with the end of the bell. 4-6.3 Laying and Jointing Concrete Pressure Pipe When the pipe is placed in the trench, the rubber gasket shall be placed in the groove on the spigot ring, and the spigot end of the pipe shall be entered into the bell of the ad- joining pipe and forced into position. The bell and spigot rings shall be thoroughly cleaned by wire brushing and wiping until clean and dry. The rubber gasket and the inside of the metal sleeve shall be lubricated with flaxseed soap to insure proper closure of the joint. The inside joint recess shall be filled immediately prior to placing pipes together by buttering the pipe ends with a Portland cement mortar consisting of one part cement to two and one-half parts of sand. After placing the pipe together, the interior shall be thoroughly swabbed and cleaned by pulling a swab of approved design through the joint. The pipe shall be laid to true alignment and grade and shall be secured in this position by carefully tamping earth under and on each side of the pipe, except at bell holes. Care shall be taken to prevent dirt from entering the unfinished joint. The pipe shall be laid with a recess between ends of pipe sections which will leave the proper space for pointing up the joint with mortar. 6-9 At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by approved means, and no trench water shall be .permitted to enter the pipe. Immediately after the pipes are laid, the annular recesses at the joint outside of the pipe shall be filled with cement grout mixed to the consistency of thick cream, in a proportion of not less than one part of cement to two and one-half parts of (plaster) sand. The filling of the joint with grout shall be done as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. After completion of the joint, the trench must be immediately backfilled with no joints exposed overnight. No pipes shall be filled with water until the inside joints have set for at least 12 hours; however, as soon thereafter as practicable, the line shall be filled with water. 4-7 Setting Valves, Valve Boxes, and Fittings Valves and fittings shall be set at the locations shown on the plans or at locations as established by the Engineer, and shall be set and jointed to the pipe in the manner heretofore specified for pipe installations. All valves buried in the ground shall have a valve box set over the valve. All valves shall be thoroughly inspected and checked for operation before installation. Concrete blocking shall be provided for all buried valves. Valve boxes shall be firmly supported and maintained centered and plumb over the wrench nut of the valve, with box cover flush with the surface of the ground or at such level as directed. 4-8 Plugging Dead Ends Standard plug-s shall be inserted into the bells of all dead ends and pipes, tees, or crosses and spigot ends shall be capped. Plugs or caps shallbejointed to the'pipe or fittings in the same manner used in jointing the pipe. 4-9 Anchorage of Bends, Tees and Plugs, Etc. Reaction or thrust backing shall be applied to all pipe lines at all tees, plugs, caps, and at bends deflecting 11-1/4 degrees or more. Concrete shall be used for backing the pipe and fittings and shall conform to the concrete specifications as set forth in the CONCRETE Section. The backing shall be placed between solid ground and the fitting to be anchored; the area of bearing on pipe and on the ground in each instance shall be as required by the Engineer. The backing shall be so placed that the pipe and fitting joints will be accessible for repair. 6-10 4=10 Exposed Piping All exposed piping shall be installed in a neat and workman- like manner. All piping runs shall be truly horizontal or vertical and parallel to adjacent building construction except where speci- fically shown otherwise on the drawings. Piping shall be adequately supported by temporary supports during installation. Permanent supports, as specified and as shown on the drawings, shall then be placed so that pipe loads are supported thereon. Small piping installed along walls or beneath roof slabs shall be adequately supported with approved devices. Spacing of such supports shall be as required to prevent deflection of the pipe between supports. 4-11 Testing After the pipe is laid and the joints completed, each section or run of piping shall be tested as specified herein. The Contractor shall bear all costs of providing all equipment, materials, labor and other incidentals required to test pipe lines as specified herein. Water of sufficient pressure to test the pipe lines will not be available and the Contractor shall provide suitable means for developing the required pressure in the lines. Each section of pipe line shall be subjected to a hydro- static pressure to which the pipe line will be subjected when the line is put in operation. Any joint showing visible leakage shall be repaired and the hydrostatic test repeated. No line shall be backfilled until after it has been tested and accepted by the Engineer. Any leakage which becomes evident prior to final acceptance of the project shall be found and repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer even though the particular line has been previously accepted and tested. The Contractor shall be required to provide all necessary fit- tings to allow the lines to be purged of air during filling, as the per- manent piping to be installed does not provide purge points. 4-12 Disinfection All water piping and pumps shall be disinfected. Piping shall be disinfected in accordance with current AWWA ' C601. The piping shall be thoroughly flushed following disinfection; the City will designate fire hydrants in the area around the project site that may be used to purge the lines. .1 .1 SECTION 7 MOVING AND INSTALLING PU14PS AND RELATED PIPING AND VALVES 1. GENERAL This project includes removal of two pumps and related piping and valves from City of Lubbock Pump Station Number Three, transport of the pumps, piping, and valves to the site of this project, and installation of the pumps, piping, and valves in the pump building to be constructed as part of this project. Pump Station Number Three is located just west of University Avenue on Third Street. The Contractor will be responsible for providing all work required to remove, trans- port, and install the items to be removed, including electrical work. 2. EXAMINATION OF ITEMS TO BE REMOVED The Engineer will schedule a pre -bid meeting at Pump Station Number Three in order to enable bidders to examine the items that are to be removed and relocated. The pre -bid meeting will be scheduled approximately one week prior to the project bid date, and bidders will be notified of the meeting by mail. 3. DESCRIPTION OF ITEMS TO BE REMOVED The items to be removed and relocated are located in two separate buildings. Major items to be removed from one building are listed below. The building in which these items are located is equipped with a bridge crane and hoist and opens onto Third Street. 1. Worthington 16-LN-28 pump' and 600 horsepower drive. The pump drive is estimated to weigh approximately 7,000 pounds. The pump is esti- mated to weigh approximately 6,000 pounds. 2. Electrical starting and control equipment for pump drive and ball valve operator. 3. Sixteen inch ball valve on discharge side of pump. 4. Sixteen inch by twenty-four inch reducer on discharge side of pump. 5. Check valve on pump discharge. 6. Section of twenty-four inch pipe between check valve and butterfly valve on pump discharge and coupling on butterfly valve. 7-1 Major items to be removed from the second building are listed below. The building in which these items are located is equipped with a beam and traveling hoist. The capacity of the beam support system is not known, and the Contractor shall be responsible for providing sufficient temporary supports for the beam to allow the motor and pump to be removed. Access to this building is from Third Street. 1. DeLaval P18/16 pump and 600 horsepower drive. The pump drive is estimated to weigh approxi- mately 7,000 pounds and the pump is estimated to weigh approximately 6,000 pounds. 2. Electrical starting equipment for pump drive. 4. PUMP AND MOTOR MOUNTING FRAMES The Contractor will provide new mounting frames for the pumps and motors that are to be relocated. The frames shall be of equal quality to those installed at the present location. 5. COORDINATION OF REMOVAL OF EQUIPMENT The Contractor shall provide the Engineer not less than one weeks notice prior to the date that he intends to begin removal work at Pump Station Number Three. The notice will be required so that the City of Lubbock will. be aware that their normal pumping procedures will be altered. The Contractor will schedule work, including electrical work, at Pump Station Number Three so that at least one pump at the station remains operable at all times. 6. PROTECTION OF FACILITIES The Contractor will be responsible for any damage caused by his operations at Pump Station Number Three. The Contractor's responsibility for damage will apply both to items to be moved from Pump Station Number Three and to items that are to remain in service at the Pump Station. 7-2 SECTION 8 CHLORINATION EQUIPMENT 1. GENERAL Chlorination equipment shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the drawings and these specifications to feed chlorine solution at the designated point of application proportional to flow of water in the supply line to the reservoir. All chlorination equipment shall be the product of a - manufacturer with a record of production of chlorination equip- ment for this type of application of least 5 years and with adequate installation and service personnel to install and service the equipment. The equipment shall be installed under direct supervision of a qualified representative of the manu- facturer and he shall place the equipment in operation and in- struct operating personnel in its operation. The -chlorination equipment furnished shall include all accessories required, whether specified or not, to provide ' chlorination in the manner specified. 2. CHLORINATOR The chlorinator shall utilize a variable orifice as the main metering element. The rate of chlorine feed shall be maintained within 11 of the indicated rate of flow. The unit �. shall include a 10-inch rotameter with a direct -reading linear scale graduated.in pounds of chlorine per 24 hours. The design shall permit rotameters of different capacities to be used inter- changeably. The feed range shall be 20 to 1 for any rotameter. A 30 watt 115 volt heater shall be provided in the chlorine in- let line. A vacuum gage and chlorine pressure gage shall also PM be provided. The maximum capacity of the chlorinator shall be not less than 500 pounds per day. One 200 pound per day rotameter shall be furnished with the unit. The chlorinator shall be specifically designed for automa- tic flow proportional control in response to a 4 to 20 mA signal from the flow transmitter specified in Sections HETERING INSTRUMENTA- TION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS. The rate of chlorine feed shall be manually M adjustable with a feed rate control on the face of the unit. W The unit shall be housed in a free-standing fiberglass cabinet. The chlorine injector may be installed in the cabinet or wall -mounted outside the cabinet. 1W 8-1 W 3. AUTOMATIC SWITCHOVER VALVES Furnish and install automatic switchover valves that will switch automatically to a new chlorine supply when the supply being used is exhausted. The valves shall be provided with traps and filters for removal of impurities and shall be com- plete with all accessories required for wall mounting. 4. SCALES Furnish and install one platform type beam scale with a capacity of 1000 lbs. Platform shall be not smaller than 27 x 18 inches. The beam shall be graduated to 100 lbs. with 1/2 pound divisions. S. CHLORINE SOLUTION DIFFUSOR Furnish and install one chlorine solution diffusor in the Chlorination Manhole. The diffusor shall be of the orifice type consisting of a length of perforated plastic pipe with brackets for mounting on a vertical concrete wall. The dimensions of the diffusor and the size and spacing of the perforations shall be as required to adequately disperse the chlorine solution without excessive head loss. 6. ACCESSORIES The following accessories shall be furnished: One two tank manifold. One four tank manifold. Six flexible connections. Six auxiliary chlorine cylinder valves. All required gaskets in gas piping. Bottle of ammonia for testing gas system. Any other special tools or accessories for a complete installation or for servicing the chlorinator. 8-2 1 SECTION 9 PAINTING EQUIPMENT � AND METAL SURFACES 1. GENERAL This section of the specifications governs P g erns the materials, accessories, surface preparation and application of paints and protective coatings required for plant equipment including all exposed metals not covered in. the Section titled PUMP STATION BUILDING. Seethe Section titled PUMP STATION BUILDING for build- ing painting. 2. SCOPE The Contractor shall supply all labor, materials, tools, ladders, scaffolding and other items necessary for the completion of sandblasting, cleaning, painting, clean-up, and other related work in the project. Surfaces and areas to receive paint or other finish shall !► be as specified herein or as noted on the drawings. Bronze, chromium, nickel, stainless steel, aluminum, and Monel items shall not be painted or finished unless otherwise specified. 3. APPROVAL OF MATERIALS Contractor shall at least 30 days in. advance of starting of work, submit to Engineer for his approval, a complete list of the manufacturer's products that he proposes to use, together with trade names of specific articles to be used and formulas if re- quired by the Engineer. It is understood, however,. that no gen- eral approval of such schedule shall constitute a waiver of any specific requirement of this specification. After approval is ob- tained from the Engineer no substitution whatsoever will be made. 4. STORAGE All materials used on the job shall be stored in a single place designated by the Contractor. Such storage place and its surroundings shall be kept neat and clean. Any oily rags, waste, etc., must be removed from the building every night, and every precaution taken to avoid the danger of fire. Storage shall not be within 100 feet of any of the Owner's buildings. 9-1 5. MIXING All materials shall be delivered in original sealed con- tainers with labels attached and remain unopened until inspected and approved by the Engineer. Materials shall be thoroughly mixed and no paint, varnish, stain or enamel shall be reduced or adulter- ated in any way except as specified. Thinner, if required, shall be product of, or of type recommended by, the manufacturer of the material to be thinned. 6. MISCELLANEOUS SURFACES Miscellaneous surfaces which ordinarily require painting,. which occur in painted or finished areas and which may not be specifically noted to receive paint or other finish, shall be finished to conform to the area in which they are located. 7. COLOR SCHEDULE The color schedule for the various areas and surfaces shall be furnished by the Engineer after award of contract. 8. WORKMANSHIP The workmanship shall be of the very best, all materials shall be evenly spread and smoothly flowed on without runs or sags. Only skilled mechanics shall be employed. All surfaces to be painted shall be cleaned free of loose dirt and dust before painting is started, and no sweeping shall be done near places where paint or varnish has not dried dust free. Except where sandblasting is required, all metal surfaces shall first be washed with mineral spirits to remove any dirt or grease, before applying materials, Where rust or scale is present, it shall be wire -brushed or sandblasted clean and smooth before painting. Shop coats of paint that become marred shall be cleaned and touched up with the primer specified. All galvanized metal surfaces which require painting shall be chemically treated with a compound designed for this purpose and approved by the Engineer, in accordance with manufacturer`s directions for use, before applying the first coat of paint. Painting of galvanized grating is not required. All undercoats of paint and enamel shall be of a lighter shade than the final coat. coats. All coats shall be thoroughly dry before applying succeeding 9-2 All work where a coat of material has been applied must be inspected by the Engineer before the application of the succeeding specified coat, otherwise no credit for the coat applied will be given, and the Contractor automatically assumes the responsibility to recoat the work in question. The Contractor will furnish the Engineer a report of the particular coat applied when ready for inspection and approval to comply with the above. No painting shall be done outside in extreme cold, frosty, foggy or damp weather, or when sand is blowing. No coats of paint shall be applied on either wet or damp surfaces and in no case until preceeding coat is dry and hard. Where interior or exterior metals are primed in the mill or _d shop, the materials shall in every case be that specified for such surfaces, and shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's directions for the first or prime coat. I All adjacent work and materials shall be protected by suitable covering or other methods during the progress of the painting. Upon completion of the work, all paint and varnish spots shall be removed from the floors, glass, hardware, and other surfaces. All rubbish and accumulated materials of whatever nature shall be re- moved from the site as the painting progresses. 9. RETOUCHING Shall be done where required, whether defects are due to painter negligence or due to negligence or necessities of others. If neces- sary to prevent retouching from showing to an extent not acceptable to the Engineer, the entire equipment unit, door frame, or other piece of work involved shall be repainted. 10. COVERING SHALL BE COMPLETE When color, stain, or undercoats show through the final coat of paint the work shall be covered by additional coats until the surface is of uniform color and appearance and coverage is complete. Where two or more coats of paint are required, the one prior to the finish coat shall be applied noticeably lighter in shade than that of the final coat. 11. HARDWARE, ACCESSORIES, FIXTURES AND SIMILAR ITEMS All hardware, fixtures, etc., placed prior to painting shall be removed or adequately protected during painting and replaced on completion of painting. 12. TOUCH UP At completion of painting, touch up and restore finish where damaged or defaced, remove all paint where it has been spilled, splashed, splattered on surfaces, and leave job in a first class condition. 9-3 13. AFFIDAVITS The Contractor shall furnish affidavits from manufacturers of materials, if requested by the Engineer, certifying 'that materials delivered to the project conform to the requirements of these speci- fications. Affidavits shall also be furnished, if requested, certify- ing that shop cleaning, priming and painting has been accomplished in accordance with the requirements of this section of the specifications. 14. ITEMS TO BE PAINTED 14-1 Metal Work All metal work such as piping valves, handrails, plant equipment, miscellaneous structural steel items, and other metal items except as specifically excluded in paragraph 2, above, shall be painted. Motors, drives, electrical enclosures and other items which receive a finish coat of shop enamel shall receive one finish coat of paint in the field. 15. PREPARATION OF SURFACES 15-1 General All surfaces to be painted shall be properly prepared as specified and as required for the paint which is to be applied. 15-2 Metalwork, Interior & Exterior Except where other treatment is required, all metal surfaces shall first be washed with mineral spirits, to remove any dirt or grease, before applying materials. Where rust or scale is present, it shall be wire -brushed or sandpapered clean and smooth before painting. Shop coats of paint that become marred shall be cleaned and touched up with the primer specified. All galvanized metal surfaces shall be chemically treated with a compound designed for this purpose and approved by the Engineer, in accordance with the manufacturer's directions for use, before applying the first coat of paint. Metal items which have received shop coats shall be cleaned of all dirt, rust and loose prime coat. All bare or abraded spots shall be spot primed as required to properly prepare the items for finish coats. 16. MATERIALS All paint shall be the products named herein or other paints of equal quality and durability specifically approved in writing by the Engineer. In no case will paints of different types than that speci- fied for the various applications be allowed. Color selections will be by the Engineer. 9-4 it All paints mentioned herein by trade name are products of Tnemec Company, Inc. Reference by trade name shall be regarded as establish- ing the type of paint system required for the various.uses and to establish a standard of quality. It is not intended to limit competi- tion and equal products by Amercoat, Cook, Mobil, or PPG Industries will be acceptable upon approval by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit complete information regarding materials proposed for use to the Engineer for approval. 17. PAINT SYSTEMS ' • 17-1 Metalwork, Interior lst coat - Tnemec 37-77 Chem -Prime 2nd coat Tnemec Tneme-Gloss ' 3rd coat _ Same as 2nd coat 17-2 Metalwork, Exterior 1st coat Tnemec 37-77 Chem -Prime. 2.0 mils over shop primer, 2.5 mils over bare steel. 2nd coat - Tnemec Series 71 Endura-Shield, Semi - Gloss. 1.5 mils dry thickness. 3rd coat - Tnemec Series 71 Endura-Shield, Semi - Gloss. 1.5 mils dry thickness. 17-3 Exposed Copper Pipe Clean with steel wool and paint with one coat of shellac. 17-4 Exposed Galvanized Metal 1st coat - Tnemec Tneme-Grip" 2nd coat - Tnemec Tneme-Gloss 3rd coat - Same as second coat 18. INSPECTION AND SUPERINTENDENCE 18-1 General No primer or subsequent coat of paint shall be applied until the surface has been approved by the Engineer. All intermediate ' coats shall be tinted a different shade than the final coat to assist in inspection. No credit will be given for any coat of paint not inspected by the Engineer prior to application of the succeeding coat. ' 18-2 Film Thickness The Engineer will make film thickness measurements on all ' metal to insure that all coats are applied at proper thicknesses and that all completed paint'systems are of the specified minimum thicknesses. Additional coats of paint shall be applied at no additional cost to the Owner in areas deficient in film thickness. IP ry 9-5 19. GUARANTEE The Contractor shall guarantee all painting for a period of 12 months after the date of final acceptance of the project. Any painted surface which reveals blisters, flaking, rusting or other imperfec- tions within the 12-month guarantee period shall be cleaned and re- painted in accordance withthese specifications at no coat to the Owner. Such cleaning and repainting shall be accomplished within 30 days after the date of notification by the Owner. 9-6 SECTION 10 PUMP STATION BUILDING 1. DESCRIPTION 1-1 General This item shall consist of the construction of the Pump station in accordance with these specifications and the accompanying • plans. ' 2. EXCAVATING, FILLING AND GRADING 2-1 General PW The work required under this section consists of excavating, filling and grading work and related items necessary to complete the Pump &' Station as indicated on the plans. All excavating, filling and grading work shall conform to the requirements of Section 1, "Excavation, Grading ' and Subgrade Preparation", and to the following requirements. Provide bracing and shoring as required in excavations, .. to maintain sides, complying with applicable codes and regulations. Maintain until excavations are backfilled. 2-2 Excavation Strip topsoil from building area to a depth of 6 inches, or " more if required to remove vegetation roots. `.topsoil shall be stockpiled and later used for finish grading around the building. Topsoil shall not be used for fill under slabs. Unauthorized excavations (removal of materials beyond indi- cated subgrade elevations) may be filled and compacted with acceptable mater- ial, filled with lean concrete,_ or corrected by extending the indicated bottom elevation of the footing to the lower elevation, -as directed by the Engineer. ' Stockpile acceptable excavated materials in sufficient quantity, until required for backfill and grading. Excavate for structures to elevations and dimensions shown, extending excavation a sufficient distance to permit placing and removal of other work and for inspection. Trim bottom to required lines and grades to provide solid base to receive concrete. If unsatisfactory soil materials are encountered at design elevations, continue excavation as directed by the Engineer. If conditions .' are not a result of Contractor's negligence, additional excavation will be measured as directed by the Engineer and paid for on a unit price basis in accordance with contract conditions relative to changes in the work. • ' 2-3 Drilled Piers Use drilling equipment of proper type and size to perform the work. Machine or hand -dress to a sharp line between the slope and the im bottom of the bell and clean out the bell. before concrete is placed. If water is used in drilling, use the minimum amount required and allow the PP bell to dry out before placing concrete. 2-4 Compaction Compact each layer of backfill and fill soil materials except sand -cement fill to 90% maximum density for cohesive soils and 95% for cohesionless soils at optimum moisture as determined by AASHT0 T 180. Apply water to surface of subgrade or layers of soil material if required. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density. 2-5 Backfill and Fill After forms are removed, place and compact acceptable soil material in layers to required elevations. Use soil material free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 2" in any dimension, debris, vegetable matter, waste, and frozen materials, and having a plasticity index of 11 or less. Fill materials shall be approved by the Engineer. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits. Backfill around basement walls may not proceed until seven (7) days after placement of concrete. Notify Engineer prior to backfilling at basement. Prepare ground surface to receive fill by removing debris. Scarify as required so that fill material will bond with existing surface. Except under slabs, place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8" in loose depth, compacting each layer to required maximum density. Do not place materials on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain ice or frost. Fill under slabs shall be built up in horizontal layers of 6 inches and compacted as specified for backfill. Dress fill level with under side of sand layer so concrete will be full thickness as shown. Provide a 2-inch layer of clean sand, free of loam, imme- diately below the floor slabs. Remove excess excavated materials, trash, debris, and waste materials from the site. 2-6 Grading After building is completed, grade around the building, using topsoil, to drain away from the building as shown. 2-7 Protections Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities in areas of work. Barricade open excavations. 2-8 Fence 2-8.1 General Work required under this section consists of all labor and material necessary to complete the fencing work indicated on the drawings and/or described in the specifications. 10-2 Refer to applicable sections of this specification for in- formation regarding excavation, concrete masonry, miscellaneous steel, and carpentry. 2-8.2 Materials Those materials not dealt with elsewhere in this specification shall conform to the following: r.+ (a) Girts and Posts - Western Cedar "Structural Light.Framing 1 No. 1". (b) Grape Stake Fencing - 3-7/8" x 5/8" No. 1 grade split face cedar, dressed sides with saw point top. (c) Hardware - See Section 8-9 Hardware Thresholds and Weather- stripping Hardware Set #6. 2-8.3 Installation Cut all joints to a close fit. Bolt girts in place with joints at supports. Nail with galvanized nails using 6d box for grape stake using 2 nails at top and bottom girts and 1 nail at center girt. Install gates plumb, level, and true and adjust to ensure smooth operation of gate. 2-9 Foundation Drainage System ., The lower portion of the basement walls shall be provided with a drainage system consisting of a gravel drainage bed and weep holes as indicated herein and as shown. The weep holes shall be Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe conforming to is ASTM D 2729. The impervious fill shall be clayey soil with the percentage passing sieve #200 being between 60 and 75% and a plasticity index between 14 and 20. The impervious fill should be compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum dry density (ASTM D 698), with moisture content at least 3 to 4% more than optimum. If material excavated from the site is demonstrated to meet the require- ments indicated herein, it may be stockpiled for use as impervious fill. he Grade 2 or 3. The gravel filter may be concrete course aggregate either THD im C: 10-3 2-10 Dewatering Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from exca- vations. Convey water removed from excavations and rain water to collecting or run-off areas. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits for each structure. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. 3. CONCRETE 3-1 General The work required under this section consists of concrete work and related items necessary to complete the Pump Station as indicated on the plans. All concrete shall conform to the requirements of Section 2, "Con- crete" and to the following requirements. 3-2 Codes and Standards ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings"; ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork"; ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete"; comply with applicable provisions except as otherwise indicated. Concrete shall reach a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 4,000 psi or 5,000 psi as indicated in the drawings. All concrete work required shall be constructed in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with the details shown on the draw- ings and in accordance with this section of these specifications. No con- crete shall be poured until embedded items are in place, inspected and approved by the Engineer. 3-3 Materials (a) Concrete Materials: Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type as required. Aggregates: ASTM C 33, except local aggregates of proven durability may be used when acceptable to Engineer. Water: Clean, free of oils, acids, organic matter. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 10-4 (b) Reinforcing Materials: Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185. (c) Form Materials: Exposed Concrete Surfaces: Acceptable panel -type to provide continuous, straight, smooth finish. Use largest practical sizes to minimize form joints. Unexposed Concrete Surfaces: Suitable material, dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. y Carton Forms: 4" deep double-faced, corrugated fiberboard, constructed of waterproof paper, laminated with waterproof adhesive, surfaces coated with paraffin containing polyethylene. When placed, the forms shall be capable of supporting a load not less than 600 psi. (d) Joint Fillers: Resilient non -extruding premoulded bituminous impregnated fiberboard units, ASTM D1751. (e) Sealant Compounds: Cold applied two -component polysul.fide sealant specifically recommended by manufacturer for illdi- cated applications. The handling, mixing and placing of the material and joint preparation prior to sealing shall be in strict accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. (f) Waterstops•: Polyvinylchloride (PVC) waterstop, 6-inch, serrated "split -flange", 3/4-inch bulb and minimum thickness of 3/16-inch. 3-4 Concrete Finishes .(a) Exposed Vertical Surfaces: All exposed formed sur- faces shall have all tie rod holes filled, fins and rough edges removed, and all defects removed or patched prior to finishing as specified below. A11 surfaces above finished grade and six inches or less below finished grade shall be considered exposed formed surfaces. Exposed formed surfaces shall receive one brush coat of the following finish coating: Liquid latex adhesive 1 part White cement 2 parts Natural cement 2 parts 11 Masonry sand 2 parts I Water 1 part 10-5 The proportions of white and natural cement may be varied as directed by the Engineer to obtain the desired color. The Contractor shall make test applications of the finish coating oil un- exposed concrete surfaces for inspection by the Engineer to establish the color and texture which will be required on the exposed surfaces. (b) Floor Slabs: Such surfaces shall be finished by carefully grading and sloping the slabs to point of drainage, as shown on the plans, with wood floats. Screeds shall be set as required to insure that true surfaces, accurate to grade, are secured. After floating, the surfaces shall be trowelled to a hard, smooth finish. (c) Exterior Slabs: After troweling, apply a light broom finish brushed across the direction of travel. 3-5 Chemical -Hardener Finish (a) Chemical Floor Hardener: Provide liquid chemical floor hardener equal to the following: A.C. Horn/W.R. Grace "Hornolith" Sonneborn-Contech "Lapidolith" (b) Apply chemical -hardener finish to dry interior concrete floors where shown on the drawings or in schedules. Apply liquid chemical - hardener after complete curing and drying of the concrete surface. Dilute the liquid hardener with water, and apply in 3 coats; first coat, 1/3 strength, second coat, 1/2 strength; third coat, 2/3 strength-. ,Evenly apply each coat, and allow 24 hours for drying between coats. Apply proprietary chemical hardeners in accordance with the manufacturer's printed directions. After the final coat of chemical -hardener solution is applied and dried, remove surplus hardener by scrubbing and mopping with water. 3-6 Joints Provide construction, isolation, and control joints as in- dicated or required. Locate construction joints so as to not impair the strength and appearance of the structure. 3-7 Gypsum Plank Roof Decking (a) Provide from a single manufacturer a gypsum plank roof system the equal of "USG Span -Rock Gypsum Roof Planks". �� (1) The gypsum plank shall be factory laminated to form 2 (nominal) x 24" (nominal) x 10' long planks encased in gray liner paper. (2) The bulb tees shall be ASTM A 440 high strength steel. (3) The gypsum grout shall be gypsum cement, ASTM C22; and clean, sharp, uniformly graded natural or manufactured sand, ASTM C 35. 10-6 (4) The cross tees shall be 1-1/4" x 1/2" x 0.023" thick sheet metal hot rolled or formed and painted. (5) At electrical chases use 1/2" "Sheetrock" form board. ift, (b) All materials shall be delivered in their original -unopened packages or bundles, handled and stored on edge and stocked off the ground in a place providing protection from damage and exposure to the ele- ments. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from the site. (c) Begin installation of one corner of roof area and place roof system in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Place bulb tees accurately at required spacing with minimum of three supports for each section. Weld to steel trusses with 1/8" x 1/2" fillet welds placed on alternate sides of tee. Center gypsum planks between bult tees and fit abutting 14 ends close to minimize grout leakage. Install cross tees at all plank ends unsupported by steel trusses. to Fill voids with gypsum grout at ridges, edges, electrical chases and bulb tees to slight excess and strike excess grout flush with plank after initial set. Protect the installed plank decking from damage by weather and subsequent construction operations until the start of roofing installation. 3-8 Surface Preparation for Metallic Waterproofing Concrete surfaces to receive metallic waterproofing shall be moderately rubbed as well as being prepared as specified under "Metallic Waterproofing", Section 7-3. 4. MASONRY 4-1 General The work required under this section consists of unit masonry work and related items necessary to complete the work as shown on the plans. 4-2 Standards Comply with the requirements of the governing code and with the recommendations of the Brick Institute of America (BIA, formerly SCPI) and the National Concrete Masonry Association. 4-3 Materials (a) Face Brick: ASTM C216, Grade SW, modular size of texture and color as selected. (b) .Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C90, Grade N-1, light- weight aggregate, hollow. im 10-7 (c) "Spectra -Glaze": Concrete masonry units glazed on exposed surfaces. Color as selected. (d) Masonry Mortar:. ASTM C270, Type S; approximately 3:1:11 portland cement, lime, sand. Cement: Portland cement, ASTM C150, Type I. Lime: Hydrated lime, ASTM C207, Type S. Sand: ASTM C144. (e) Continuous Masonry Wire Reinforcing: Truss design, 9 gauge welded steel wire, width 1-1/2" to 2" less than wall thickness. (f) Epoxy Mortar: Mixture of masonry.mortar, sand and epoxy to match color of regular mortar. (g) Dovetail Slots and Anchors: Fabricate slots from 24 ga, galvanized steel; supply with filler strips. Provide hot -dip galvanized steel dovetail anchors of size and type to suit construction requirements. 4-4 Installation Install (lay) masonry units in bond pattern. Cut exposed masonry units, where necessary, with a power saw. Avoid the use (by proper layout) of less -than -half-size units. Hold uniform joint sizes. On the interior face of the wall cut joints flush and tool slightly con- cave. On the exterior face of the wall tool brick joints to concave surface. Coursing shall be laid out to work to vertical dimensions. Leads shall not be carried up over seven courses in advance of facing between leads, and toothing will not be permitted. The Contractor shall furnish sufficient scaffolding to permit laying CMU's continuously. All mortar joints shall be full. Set all anchors, lintels, bolts, and similar items as shown or required as furnished by other trades which come in connection with masonry work. Major items such as door frames will be set and braced by the Contractor where they are to be built into masonry. All embedded items and door frames shall be grouted solid for secure anchorage. Mortar shall be of proportions hereinafter noted, except that sand content may be decreased if required to produce crushing strength specified in ASTM C161. All mortar shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C270. Mortar shall be composed of one part portland cement, one- half to one part hydrated lime or lime putty, and sand in amount- of not less than 2-1/4 and not more than three times the sum of the volumes of the cement and lime used. Sand shall be measured in damp, loose condition. Reinforce horizontal joints with continuous masonry wire reinforcing, spaced 16" vertically, and immediately above and below openings, for a distance of 2 ft. beyond opening in all 4 directions. Do not bridge control joints in the wall system. 4-5 Cleaning and Protection Protect newly laid masonry from exposure to precipitation, excessive drying, freezing, soiling, backfill and other harmful elements. Dry -brush concrete masonry work at end of each day's work. At completion of masonry work, clean down all exposed surfaces, removing mortar spots, stains, dirt and other surface imper- fections. Ligi►tweight concrete masonry units shall be cleaned by scrubbing with stiff bristle brush and a carborundum stone where neces- sary. No water shall be used. ►dash down face brick upon completion of brick masonry work. 5. STRUCTURAL STEEL 5-1 General The work required under this section consists of all structural steel and related items necessary to complete the Pump Station shown on the drawings and/or described in the specifications. 5-2 Codes and Standards AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges"; AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings" including "Commentary"; AWS "Structural Welding Code"; comply with applicable provisions except as otherwise indicated. 5-3 Shop Drawings Show complete details and schedules for fabrication, assembly and erection. Furnish anchor bolts required for installation in other work; furnish templates for bolt installation. 5-4 Materials (a) Steel Plates, Shapes, Bars: ASTM A 36. (b) Fasteners: High -strength bolts and nuts, ASTM A 325 or A490; unfinished bolts and nuts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; rivets, ASTM A 502, Grade 1. (c) Crane Rails: Standard A.S.C.E. section rails sized as per crane manufacturer's recommendation and appropriate joint bars and bolts, beam clamps, stops and other appurtenances. (d) Shop Paint: SSPC-Paint 13. 5-5 Fabrication and Erection (a) Fabrication: Comply with AISC "Specifications" and - final shop drawings. Mark and match -mark units for field assembly. (b) Connections: As shown on final shop drawings. Use high -strength bolts for field connections, except as otherwise indicated. rr (c) Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance, and quality of welds. 10-9 (d) Provisions for Other Work: Fabricate structural steel members to provide holes for securing other work and for passage of other work through steel framing as indicated. (e) Shop Painting: Paint structural steel work, except members or portions of members embedded in concrete or mortar, and contact areas to be welded or riveted. Clean steel free of loose mill scale, rust, oil and grease. Apply prime paint to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. (f) Erection: Comply with AISC Code and Specifications; and maintain work in safe and stable condition during erection. Provide temporary bracing and shoring as required; remove when final connections placed. Splice members only where shown on final shop drawings. Touch-up prime paint after erection. Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas, and apply same type paint as used in shop. (g) Crane Runway: Clamp crane to top flange of each bridge girder setting and adjusting the gauge, alignment and elevation to the tolerances of AISC for crane rails. Stagger joint locations in opposite rails. Provide flush joints at the top of all crane rails. 5-6 Miscellaneous Metals 5-6.1 General The work required, under this section consists of miscellaneous metal work necessary to complete the Pump Station as shown on the drawings, and includes items fabricated from metal shapes, plates, bars, strips, tubes, pipes, castings and chains which are not a part of other metal systems specified elsewhere. Items to be furnished under miscellaneous metal shall be those in, but not limited to, the general categories as follows: Loose lintels Steel Stairs Miscellaneous framing and supports Nosings Railings Thresholds Louvers Other miscellaneous metals not specified elsewhere. 5-6.2 Codes and Standards AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings"; AWS "Structural Welding Code"; comply with applicable provisions unless otherwise indicated. 10-10 5-6.3 Shop Drawings and Data Show complete details and instructions for fabrication, assem- bly, and installation. Furnish anchor bolts required for installation in other work; furnish templates for bolt installation. 5-6.4 Inserts and Anchorages Furnish inserts and anchoring devised to be built into other work for installation of miscellaneous metal items; coordinate delivery to job site to avoid delay. 5-6.5 Materials I (a) Steel plates, Shapes, Bars: ASTM A 36. (b) Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B. i(c) Louvers: Extruded aluminum alloy.6063-T52 bronze anodized finish as selected by Architect. (d) Shop Paint: FS TT-P-86, Type II; or SSPC Paint 14; apply to cleaned and degreased steel surfaces at rate to provide a 2.0 mil dry film thickness. �+ (e) Aluminum Pipe = ASTM B 429 Schedule 40 Alloy 6063-T832. (f) Extruded Aluminum Shapes = ASTM B 221 alloy 6063-T5. (g) Aluminum Castings = ASTM B 108 alloy 214. 5-6.6 Fabrication and Installation (a) Fabrication: Use materials of size and thickness shown or, if not shown, of required size and thickness to produce strength and dura- bility in finished product. Shop -paint all items not specified to be galvanized r after fabrication. Weld corners and seams continuously; grind exposed welds smooth and flush. Form exposed connections with hairline, flush joints; use concealed fasteners where possible. (b) Loose Steel Lintels: Fabricate to sizes shown. on (c) Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Provide as required to complete work and not included with structural steel framework. Fabricate of welded construction in as large units as possible; drill and tap as required to receive hardware and similar items. Include required anchors for building into other work; spaced not more than 24" o.c. .kw (d) Nosings: Fabricate of shapes as shown; miter corners and weld joints. Provide anchors 6" from ends or corners and 24" o.c. am (e) Steel Railings: Fabricate to dimensions. shown, with welded joints. Secure posts and rail ends to building construction as indicated. (f) Aluminum Railings: Fabricate to dimensions shown, with mechanical connections. Secure posts and rails to building construction as indicated. Provide removable rail sections as indicated. Furnish slip -fit metal socket for casting into concrete. Accurately locate sockets to match post spacing. (g) Installation: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation; set work accurately in location, alignment and ele- vation, measured from established lines and levels. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for installation to other work. 6. CARPENTRY 6-1 General The work required under this section consists of all car- pentry cabinetry and related items necessary to complete the Pump Station shown in the drawings. Concrete formwork is specified under"Concrete". 6-2 Standards Comply with applicable "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" by AWI for all cabinetry. 6-3 Shop Drawings Submit shop drawings for custom -designed interior wood- work, including casework. Drawings shall show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large scale details; attachment devices and other components. 6-4 Materials (a) Lumber Standard: American Softwood Lumber Std. PS 20 (U.S. Dep. Comm.), S4S, 19% moisture at time of dressing, except as otherwise indicated. (b) Exposed Lumber for Paint Fin. (c) Grade: Dimension lumber shall be wither No. 1 common southern yellow pine or "Construction" Douglas fir. (d) Plywood Roof Sheathing: Softwood plywood, construction and industrial PS 1 bearing DFDA grade trademark, C-D/EXT-APA. (e) Wood for Painted Finish on Cabinetry: Solid Wood: Plain sawed birch. Veneer: Rotary cut fir. 10-12 nyF (f) Plastic Laminate: Comply with NEMA LD3; type, thick- ness, color, pattern and -finish as indicated for each application. 6-5 Cabinet Work Comply with AWI 400 series standards. Provide Custom Grade, with exposed work of.species and grade as indicated above. ki Provide counter tops of grade matching cabinet work, with plastic laminate cover, exposed edges, and back-up. Plastic Laminate: NEMA No. LD3, Class I (high pressure), 0.062" general-purpose type for counter tops, 0.051" post forming type where post forming is required, 0.032" vertical -surface type for cabinet work, and 0.020" back-up sheets for concealed back face where required. Provide smooth texture color as selected by Engineer. 6-6 Cabinetry Accessories (a) Drawer Slides: Knape & Vogt 1300, or Grant 336 full extension slides, minimum 50-lb. capacity. v (b) Drawer Pulls: Hager 1077 or equal with satin alumi- num finish. (c) Drawer Hinges: Hager 1043 or 1044 steel hinges or equal with satin chromium plated. , (d) Drawer Catches: Hager 1437 or equal. (e) Shelf Supports: Where shelving is indicated as "adjustable", provide Knape & Vogt No. 255 standards and No. 256 supports. Recess standards for flush installation. 6-7 Installation (a) Set rigid and true to line, and substantially and per- manently anchored to masonry, steel or other construction. Install cabinetry plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work with joints carefully made and nails set. Refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. (b) All carpentry work as required to complete the project shall be performed by persons skilled in the trade. 1 10-13 7. MOISTURE PROTECTION 7-1 General The work required under this section consists of shingle roof, metallic waterproofing, sheet metal fascia, aluminum siding, caulking and sealants and other related items necessary to complete the Pump Station as shown in the drawings. 7-2 Shingle Roof 7-2.1 Applicator Work specified under this section and related sheet metal work shall be performed by one applicator for undivided responsibility. 7-2.2 Materials (a) Shingles: Mineral -surfaced asphalt shingles bearing UL Class "A" label, self-adhesive tabs weighing not less than 300 lb. per square; color and pattern as selected by the Architect. (b) Underlayment: 15-lb. felt ASTM D226. (c) Nails: Hot -dipped zinc -coated, of type and size recommended by shingle manufacturer. 7-2.3 Installation (a) Coordinate roofing with flashing and other adjoining work to ensure proper sequencing of work. (b) Except as otherwise indicated, install shingles as recom- mended by shingle manufacturer. Provide course of underlayment on substrate before installation of shingles. Provide accessory items as shown and as required to make a complete installation of shingle roofing, including flash- ings integrated with the shingle work. 7-3 Metallic Waterproofing 7-3.1 General Apply waterproofing to inside face of basement walls and slab as indicated on the drawings. Furnish continuous grooves at all junctures between floors and walls. 7-3.2 Quality Assurance (a) Installer: A firm specializing in the installation of metal oxide waterproofing, with at least 5 years of successful experience in applications similar to the requirements for this project. Laborers and mechanics skilled in this type of work shall be used. (b) Materials: Ironite or equal three -coat application consisting of brushed -on metallic aggregates, Portland Cement ASTM C150 I, clean sand and water. 10-14 AN I (c) Substrate Treatment: Clean walls by means of one or a combination of the following: (1) 1000 psi water spray through an aerator nozzle. ' (2) Lightly sandblasting. (3) Etching with 10% muriatic acid (4) Bush hammering to maximum of 1/16" depth. (d) Submittals: Submit manufacturer's product specifica- tions and application instructions for metal oxide waterproofing. 7-3.3 Installation (a) General: Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed directions on properly prepared substrate. (b) Application: Apply three coats of waterproofing materials thoroughly brushed into surface, with one day's oxidation time allowed between coats. Provide mechanical means of forcing air circulation if there is inade- quate circulation to secure proper oxidation without it. Fill cut out wires, holes, voids, cracks or other de- pressions with 1:3:15 metallic grout. First coat - 10 lbs. metallic waterproofing and water to slurry consistency. M Second and Third Coats - 8 lbs. metallic waterproofing, 1 bag Portland Cement and 2 parts sand. M Brush final coat uniformly in one direction using sifted sand and then give a coat of white Resto-Crete, or equal. Where pipes, inserts or similar penetrations occur, the same shall be caulked with lead wool saturated with metallic waterproofing. r 1 7-4 Aluminum Siding 7-4.1 General Provide Alcoa 12-inch Vertical Siding 12 VN, or equal, as well as all starter strips, trim and other appurtenances as indicated. Comply with AAMA 1402.1. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 7-4.2 Installation Comply with manufacturer's instructions for the use of either non-ferrous or hot -dip zinc -coated fasteners which are non -corrosive and non- staining when used with specified type of siding and finish. 10-15 7-5 Sheet Metal 7-5.1 Materials (a) Aluminum: .040" mill finish. (b) Galvanized Iron: ASTM A526, 24 gauge. (c) Glass Fiber Fabric: ASTM D1688. (d) Roofing Cement: ASTM D2822. 7-5.2 Fabrication and Installation Conform to profiles and sizes shown, and comply with "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" by SMACNA, for each general category of work required. Provide soldered flat -lock seams except at moving joints, and provide for thermal expansion at 10-ft. intervals except as otherwise shown. Separate dissimilar metals and separate metals from contact with other corrosive materials, by a 15-mil coating of bituminous mastic (FS TT-C-494) or other permanent separation. Anchor work permanently in place with non -corrosive fasteners. Cover flanges (edges) of system on plywood substrate with roofing felt stripping, using 2 courses of glass fiber fabric set in and covered with roofing cement. 7-6 Mineral Fiber Reinforced Cement Board 7-6.1 General The work required under this section consists of mineral fiber reinforced cement board soffit, trim and related items necessary to complete the Pump Station as shown in the drawings. 7-6.2 Shop Drawings Submit shop drawings indicating sizes and thicknesses of boards, including methods of attachment to supporting structure, trim pro- files, joints and connections. 7-6.3 Materials Mineral fiberboard shall be 1/4" thick, unfinished mineral fiber reinforced cement board. unfinished surface shall be suitable for paint application. Trim mouldings shall be for specified thickness of board with anodized aluminum mill finish. 10-16 7-6.4 Installation_ Install the soffit work plumb, level, true and straight. Install trim mouldings and sealant as recommended by material manufacturer for the installation shown. 7-7 Sealants and Caulking 7-7.1 General The work required under this section consists of sealants and caulking necessary to complete the Pump Station as shown in the drawings or as specified herein. 7-7.2 Caulking Requirements Provide caulking as shown on drawings and at the following general locations: (a) Around frames, pipes, conduits and other materials through exterior walls. (b) At other joints or cracks where required to obtain an acceptable appearance, if caulking is approved for the purpose by the Engineer. 7-7.3 Caulking Materials (a) One Component Polysulfide Sealant: Polysulfide based, one -part elastomeric sealant complying with FS TT-S-00230, Class A, Type II .�e (non -sag) unless Type I recommended by manufacturer for the application shown. Products offered by manufacturers to comply with the require- ments include the following: •� Hornflex one-comlionent; W.R. Grace & Company Synthacalk GC-9; Pecora Chemical Corporation ' Sonolastic 1-Part; Sonneborn Building Products 7-7.4 Caulking Installation Employ only proven installation techniques, which will ensure that sealants will be deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete "wetting" of the joint bond surfaces equally on opposite sides. Except as otherwise indicated fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and a vertical surface, fill joint to form a slight cove, so that joint will not trap moisture and dirt. M 8. DOORS, WINDOWS AND GLASS 8-1 General The work required under this section consists of hollow metal doors and frames, fiberglass faced wood door, aluminum windows, glass and related items necessary to complete the Pump Station as shown in the drawings. 10-17 8-2 Standards Comply with the requirements of Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames: (SDI-100), and as herein specified. Comply with NWMA Industry Standard I.S. 1 "Wood Flush Doors" of the National Woodwork Manufacturer's Association, and as herein specified. Provide certification of door quality. Comply with requirements for aluminum windows of ANSI A134.1, and applicable general requirements of AAMA and AA. Glazing shall comply with recommendations of "Glazing Manual" by Flat Glass Marketing Association, except as otherwise indicated or recom- mended by product manufacturer. 8-3 Shop Drawings With manufacturer's standard details and specification, submit shop drawings for the fabrication and erection of work specified in this section. Include details of each frame type, elevations of each door design types and installation details showing application to project, as required. 8-4 Metal Doors, Frames and Accessories Furnish and install, in sizes as indicated on drawings, door and frame manufactured by Ceco Corporation, Fenestra, Republic Steel Cor- poration, or equal. (a) Materials: Steel door and frames; hot -rolled, pickled and oiled per ASTM A569 and A568; cold -rolled per ASTM A366 and A568. Use gauges as follows: 14 gauge: Exterior frames 16 gauge: Exterior doors and Interior frames 18 gauge: Interior doors Knock -down type frames are not acceptable. (b) Anchors and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard units. (c) Cores: Provide impregnated honeycomb cores to completely fill the inside of the doors and laminated to the inside of the panels. (d) Installation: Install hollow metal units and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and as herein specified. 10-18 (e) Rolling Service Door: Provide steel rolling service door equal of Cookson Co. Type FK with slat number 4 size as scheduled, com- plete and shop finished with manufacturer's standard finish. Install door., track, and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, weatherstrip- ping, counterbalance mechanism, operators, locks anchors, inserts and equipment w supports in accordance with final shop drawings, and manufacturer's instructions. Install plumb, level, and secure. Lubricate, test and adjust doors for easy ' operation. 8-5 Wood Door Furnish and install, in sizes as indicated on the drawings, ' a solid core fiberglass clad door the equal of Kaylien style #304 and a solid core flush wood door, as specified herein. .-, (a) Materials - Manufacturer's standard high impact flexible fiberglass with high heat distortion rate and integral carving on solid core. Finish shall be selected from manufacturer's standard finish selection by the Architect. Provide same material on both faces and all edges of door unless otherwise indicated. (b) Core Construction: Solid wood -block, wood particle- board, or mineral with wood lock blocks, as required by door manufacturer to comply with specified guarantee period. (c) Solid Core Wood Door shall conform to the following: (1) Materials: Manufacturer's standard 2 or 3-ply face panels of species and grade as scheduled or specified. ',-*!6 Provide same material on both faces and all edges of individual doors, unless otherwise indicated. (2) Provide "Custom Quality" exposed surfaces: Face Veneer: NWMA Premium Grade plain -sliced or half -round sliced red oak. Book match face veneer. (3) Adhesive Type: Type I waterproof bond. (4) Core Construction: Solid wood -block, wood particle- board, or mineral with wood lock blocks, as required by door manufacturer to comply with specified guarantee period. (d) Guarantee: Shall be in effect for five years after the date of acceptance. Submit on manufacturer's standard form signed by the Manufacturer and Contractor. (e) Installation: Install wood doors in accordance with .1k manufacturer's instructions and as shown. Where trimming of door is necessary, use carbide tipped tools and seal raw edges. C� 10-19 W 8-6 Aluminum Windows Furnish and install, in sizes as indicated on the drawings, Ware Aluminim Windows, Inc., Series 400B projected. (a) Materials: Comply with ASTM B 221. Provide alloy and temper recommended by window manufacturer, but not less than 22,000 psi ultimate tensile strength and not less than 0.062" thickness at any location for main frame and sash members. (b) Submittals: Submit shop drawings with manufacturer's standard details, specifications and drawings for fabrication and erection of work specified in this section. Include elevations showing application to type and installation details showing application to project and operators as required. (c) Anchors, Hardware and Accessories: Aluminum or non- corrosive and compatible metal as recommended or standard with manufacturer. Manufacturer shall make necessary adaptations to window to receive window operator. (d) Screen: Provide manufacturer's standard screen with aluminum tubular frame, 18 x 16 aluminum mesh and standard hardware. (e) Weatherstripping: Woven pile and vinyl as standard with window manufacturer. (f) Installation: Comply with manufcaturer's specifica- tions and recommendations for the. installation of window units, hardware, operators and other components of the work for a complete and weathertight installation. 8-7 Window Operators (a) Furnish and install as indicated -on the drawings Teleflex Industrial Products, Inc., Chain. -Flex remote window operator systems with surface -mounted operators. (b) Submittals: Submit shop drawings with manufacturer's standard details, specifications and installation drawings showing applica- tion to project for review by the Architect. (c) Install, test and adjust remote window operators to ensure smooth, easy and positive operation of aluminum projected windows. 8-8 Glass and Glazing (a) Glass Exposed sealant edged insulating glass with interior sheet of "4" tinted plate glass Type I Class 3 and exterior sheet of "4" clear plate glass (I-1-q3), spaced 1/2" apart, filled with air at 60°F. dew point, hermetically sealed with spacers and sealant, 1" thick. 10-20 ' Exposed sealant edges insulating glass with 2 sheets of 1/4" tempered glass, spaced 1/2" apart, filled with air at 60°F. dew point, hermetically sealed with spacers and sealant, 1" thick. " Silicone sealant shall be the equal of Dow Cornings non-acid Type #790 Building Sealant, (FS TT-S-001543, Class A).. Polysulfide sealant shall be the equal of DAP 2-part Flexiseal (FS TT-S-00227, Class A, Type 2). Setting blocks shall be Neoprene, 70-90 Shore A hardness. ' Filler rods shall be non -absorptive, closed -cell plastic or rubber which is compatible with other glazing materials in the channel, 3 to 5 psi compression for 25% deflection. (b) Glazing General: Clean the glazing channel, or other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to the substrate. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces wherever elastomeric sealants are used. Apply primer or sealant to joint surfaces wherever recom- mended by the sealant manufacturer. Do not attempt to cut, seam, nip or abrade glass which is tempered, heat strengthened, or coated. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installa- tion, and eliminate any which have observable edge damage or face imperfections. Install setting blocks of proper size at quarter points of sill rabbet. Set blocks in thin course of the heel -bead compound. Provide spacers inside and out, and of proper size and spacing, for all glass sizes larger than 50 united inches. Provide 1/8" minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. Provide filler rods where sealants are used in head and jamb channels. Comply with "Glazing Manual" by Flat Glass Marketing Association for all liquid inside and out glazing system. Unify appearance of each series of lights by setting each piece to match others as nearly as possible. Inspect each piece and set with pattern, draw and bow oriented in the same direction as other pieces. ' Clean and trim excess glazing materials from the glass and stops or frames promptly after installation, and eliminate stains and dis- colorations. 10-21 Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation, by attachment of crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers of any type to surfaces of glass. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in any other way during the construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism. Maintain glass in a reasonably clean condition during construction, so that it will not be damaged by corrosive action and will not contribute (by wash -off) to the deterioration of glazing materials and other surfaces. 8-9 Hardware Thresholds and Weatherstripping a Hardware Hardware Set No. 1 Door No. 1 2 Pr. Hager Butts BB1279 x 2TMS 42 x 42 US10A 1 Ea. Russwin Lockset 440 ASHFORD x 217L13 x STMS US10B 1 Ea. Russwin Closer P2810-6 x SNB LBL 1 Ea. Trimco Stop 1205ES US10B 3 Ea. Trimco Silencers 1229A Hardware Set No. 2 Rolling Service Door No. 2 1 Ea. Russwin Cylinder 1291 US10B Balance of Hardware by door manufacturer Hardware Set No. 3 Door No. 5 12 Pr. Hager Butts 1279 x TMS 4 2 x 4-, US10A 1 Ea. Russwin Privacy Lock 420 ASHFORD x 217L13 x TMS US10B 1 Ea. Trimco Stop W12721iCS USlOB 3 Ea. Trimco Silencers 1229A Hardware Set No. 4 Doors No. 3 & 4 3 Pr. Hager Butts 1279 x TMS 42 x 42 US10A 2 Ea. Russwin Locksets SS452 ASHFORD x 217L13 x TMS US10B 2 Ea. Trimco Stops 1205ES US10B 6 Ea. Trimco Silencers 1229A 10-22 Hardware Set No. 5 Door No. 6 1 Pr. Hager Butts 1825 x WS 31z x 3z USIOA 1 Ea. Hager Pull 1077 US10B 2 Ea. Hager Catch 1437 Hardware Set No. 6 Gates No. 7 & 8 6 Pr. Hager Strap Hinges WS1908-10" 1 Ea. Hager Gate Latches 19342 @ gate 7 2 Ea. Russwin Padlocks 2863W 1 Ea. Hager Cane Bolts 1408-24" @ gate 8 1 Ea. Hager Hasp WS1915 @ gate 8 (b) Thresholds: Single piece extruded aluminum, grooved tread �- with smooth commercial mill finish. (c) Stripping at Heads and Jambs: Adjustable bumper -type strip- ping with resilient insert retained in adjustable metal strip by captive adjustment screws, and metal housing. Extruded aluminum with natural anodized finish; 0.062" minimum thickness of main walls and flanges. Insert of closed -cell extruded sponge neoprene, 3/16" x 1-1/4". (d) Stripping at Door Bottoms: Extruded aluminum with natural anodized finish; 0.062" minimum housing thickness with 1/4" x 1-3/8" black neoprene seal strip. (e) Installation: Hardware: Hang doors to operate freely with uniform clearance between door and frame without binding at any point. Center knobs on locks to operate freely in both directions without binding. M Stripping: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recom- ,y mendations, to the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated. Provide metal fasteners of the type which will not work loose as a result of normal door use, and which are compatible with the metal of the strip- ping and door. Provide only smooth exposed fastener heads, which do not constitute a snagging hazard to clothing of the building occupants. Finish exposed fasteners to match stripping. Set units plumb and level, accurately centered at the optimum location for maintaining a permenent seal. 10-23 Adjust doors, frames and hardware, if necessary, to achieve proper operation of stripping. Thresholds: Comply with threshold manufacturer's instructions for the installation of thresholds. Notch at jambs to extend full width of opening. 9. FINISH SYSTEMS 9-1 Acoustical Ceiling Systems 9-1.1 General The work required under this section consists of acoustic panels, suspension system and related items necessary to complete the Pump Station as shown in the drawings. 9-1.2 Materials (a) Exposed Grid Suspension System: Provide direct hung suspension system complying with ASTM C635 intermediate duty minimum load -carrying capability for main runners. Provide steel main and cross runners with smooth matte white painted finish. Provide 12 gauge, galvanized, soft annealed, mild steel wire hangers. (b) Acoustic Panels: Mineral fiber composition lay -in tile units. Tile shall be 24" x 48" x 5/8" thick with square edges. Provide factory finish of washable white paint. 9-1.3 Installation (a) Install suspension systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; the requirements of Article 2 "Installation of Components" of "Standard Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -In Panels", ASTM C636; and as further specified to provide a level tolerance of 1/8" in 12 feet in the finished ceiling. (b) Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and other recommendations, applicable to the work. Do not install acoustic units until: exterior openings have been closed and building is weather - tight, all mechanical, electrical and plumbing work above ceilings is complete, and temperature and relative humidity have reached manufacturer's recommendations. 9-2 Resilient Floor and Base 9-2.1 General The work required under this section consists of vinyl asbestos tile and vinyl base necessary to complete the Pump Station as shown in the drawings. 9-2.2 Materials (a) Flooring: Shall be vinyl asbestos complying with FS SS-T-312, Type IV, size 12" x 12" x 1/8" thick, color as selected. (b) Base: Shall be vinyl base complying with FS SS-W-40, Type II, 3-1/2" high, 1/8" gauge, standard top -set cove, color as selected. 10-24 (c) Adhesives: Waterproof, stabilized type as recommended by tile manufacturer. 9-2.3 Delivery and.Storage Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer's original, .. unopened containers with manufacturer's brand name, color and pattern number clearly marked on each container. Store materials carefully in conformity with manufacturer's recom- mendations. Store materials in original container at not less than 70°F. for at �. least 24 hours before installation. Protect materials from the elements and store clear of work areas. 9-2.4 Installation (a) Preparation of Surface: Inspect the concrete slab to see that all surfaces are smooth, even and clean. Any floor too rough, uneven, or not clear of objectionable materials shall be corrected before tile is laid. (b) Resilient Floor Covering: Tile shall be laid on a clean, smooth, dry surface in a full bed of adhesive with all joints straignt and tight. Fit tile neatly at walls and all projections. Adhesive and tile shall be laid according to recommendations of the manufacturer and shall have a clean and neat appearance. Lay tile in "checkerboard" pattern with grain reversed in alternate tiles. 1�__ (c) Base: Install base-.ccording to manufacturer's recommendations. V The base shall be set in a full and proper bed of adhesive with all joints tight and neatly fitted. Apply base in as long lengths as practicable. (d) Cleaning and Waxing: Upon completion of the project, clean floors, wash with cleaner, wax and buff. 9-3 Painting Systems 9-3.1 General The work required under this section consists of painting and finish- ing work and related items necessary to complete the Pump Station as shown on the drawings. All painting shall conform to the requirements of Section 9 "Painting" and to the following requirements. Exterior: Metal doors, frames, flashing and other ferrous metals requiring painting, mineral fiberboard soffit, and other exposed surfaces requiring painting. Interior: Includes metal doors and frames, steel trusses, gypsum plank roof deck, mechanical equipment, concrete masonry block and any other exposed interior surfaces requiring painting. 9-3.2 Submittals In addition to manufacturer's data, application instructions and . ' label analysis for each coating material, submit samples for Engineer's review of color and texture only. Resubmit samples as requested until required sheen, color and texture is achieved. 10-25 Is C__a On 12" x 12" hardboard, provide 2 samples of each color and material, with texture to simulate finish conditions. 9-3.3 Delivery and Storage Deliver materials to job site in new, original and unopened containers bearing manufacturer's name, trade name and label analysis. Store where directed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 9-3.4 Protection Protect work of other trades, correct any painting related damages by cleaning, repairing or replacing and refinishing, as directed by Engineer. 9-3.5 Coordination Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers where required. 9-3.6 Surface Preparation Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions for each substrate condition. 9-3.7 Materials (a) Exterior Gloss Enamel: Apply to primed or sealed exterior metal surfaces. First Coat: Enamel undercoat or metal primer, to suit substrate. Second and Third Coats: Alkyd gloss enamel. FS TT-E-489, Class A. (b) Exterior Acrylic Emulsion: Apply to exterior mineral fiber - board soffit. First Coat: Primer undercoat. FS TT-P-25. ' Second and Third Coats: Acrylic emulsion. FS TT-P-19. (c) Interior Semi -gloss Enamel: Apply to filled or primed masonry or metal. First Coat: Surface filler, primer or undercoat to suit substrate. ,k Second and Third Coats: Alkyd enamel TT-E-509. or metal. (d) Interior High Gloss Enamel: Apply to primed or undercoated wood First Coat: Surface primer or undercoat to suit substrate. Second and Third Coats: Enamel TT-E-506. 10- 26 '� (e) Interior Latex: Apply to exposed gypsum plank roof deck. First Coat: Primer coat on bulb tees to suit substrate. On gypsum plank, use latex paint, the approved equal of.U.S. Gypsum's TAL Latex Paint with job site addition of fungicide. Second and Third Coats: Latex with fungicide as noted above. 9-3.8 Material Preparation Mix, prepare and store painting and finishing material in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 9-3.9 Application v Apply painting and finishing materials in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for the material and surfaces to which applied. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final paint coat, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and edges same as exterior faces. Sand lightly between succeeding enamel coats. � Omit first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop - primed and touch-up painted, unless otherwise specified. . Apply prime coat to material which is required to be painted or finished, and which has not been prime coated by others. Apply enamel material at not less than the manufacturer's recom- mended spreading rate, to provide a total dry film to thickness of not less than 5.0 mils for the entire coating system of prime and finish coats for 3-coat work. 10. SPECIALTIES 10-1 General The work required under this section consists of special furnishings and related items necessary to complete the Pump Station as shown in the drawings. 10-2 Toilet Accessories F Furnish and install complete the following as manufactured by Bradley or approved equal: (a) One mirror with shelf - Bradley No. 715, 16" x 24". (b) One toilet tissue holder - Bradley No. 5054. (c) One towel dispenser - Bradley No. 250. (d) Locate as directed by the Engineer. 10-27 10-3 Bridge Crane and Hoist 1 (a) Crane Bridge Assembly: Robbins & Meyers,. Dresser Industries or approved equal, single girder hand -geared top -running bridge crane assembly ' complete with end trucks, crane wheels, crane bridge and other standard appurte- nances designed for 12,000 pounds capacity. (b) Geared Trolley Hoist: Robbins & Meyers, Dresser Industries ft or approved equal, geared trolley hoits, 6 ton capacity complete with chains, hooks and other appurtenances. •, as 1 rs w r rr 10-28 w i SECTION 11 CIE HANlCAL WORK 1. UTILITY SERVICES: 1-1 Sewer: Extend to the existing 24" line as shown on the drai,rings and connect. Verify exact location and invert. 1-2 Water: Extend water from the existing main as shown on the drawings. Verify exact location and depth. 1 2. MATERIALS: (a) Sanitary Soil, Waste and Drain Lines: Except as.otherwise specified or noted on the drawings, piping shall be bell and spigot, service weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings, each heavily coated at the factory with asphaltum or coal tar pitch and each having the manufacturer's mark or name and the date of manufacture cast on it. Type "L" copper in sizes up to 2" may be used where space is restricted. C.1. joints may be caulked or push -on. Above grade, no -hub may be used, unless otherwise prohibited. (b) Sanitary Fixture Waste Arms: Fixtures served by sanitary soil waste and drain lines shall be connected using cast iron pipe and fittings, red brass pipe, Type L hard -copper tubing with cast brass drainage fittings or lead. Use brass soldering nipples or ferrules as required. (c) Sanitary Vent Lines: Vents in the sanitary system shall be service weight cast iron bell and spigot pipe and fittings for all lines 2" and larger and standard weight galvanized steel, Type L or heavier weight copper, red brass, or lead for lines smaller than 2" except that the same class of material shall ' be used throughout, insofar as practicable. C.1. joints may be caulked or push -on. Above grade, no -hub may be used, unless otherwise prohibited. (d) Domestic Water Lines: All water lines underground or under slabs on grade shall be of Type K hard drawn copper tubing. All interior water lines shall be Type L hard drawn copper tubing. where connections are made between copper tubing and cast iron pipe, use adapters. Copper tubing shall be assembled using solder -joint fittings. .' (e) Drain Lines: Type L copper with solder joint fittings. ., (f) Interior Cleanouts: Cleanouts shall be provided at the bottom of each stack, at each change in direction, a and in each horizontal run at intervals not exceeding 50 feet in all interior soil, waste, and drain lines. Where cleanouts occur in walls or floors of finished areas, they shall be concealed behind chrome plated access•covers, such as Josam Series Y80 or provided with other special plugs and covers as required to present a finished appearance. All cleanouts shall be the same size as the line served up to 4" size and shall be 4" for all larger lines. (g) Exterior Cleanouts: Provide and install cleanouts in exterior sewer lines where shown or required by ordinance but not less than 100 ft. apart. Cleanouts shall consist of a conrete encased special fitting with sewer pipes extendin; therefrom upward, terminating in a concrete slab below grade. Standard 'turn Z-136-10 cast iron cleanout casting shall be set on this slab in such manner as to be flush with finished grade and to provide access, through its cover, to the cleanout. A removable stopper shall be set in the open top of the cleanout pipes. (h) Air Chambers: Air chambers of Type L copper, not less than 121, long and no smaller than the supply pipe, shall be provided and installed in each water supply to each and every fixture, outlet, item of equipment, etc. The length and/or the diameter of these air chambers shall be greater where required to eliminate water hammer. (i) Vacuum Breakers: On each water supply line serving a plumbing fixture, item of equipment, or other device which has a water supply below the rim of the fixture, or which has a threaded or tubing spout, provide and install an approved vacuum breaker. These vacuum breakers shall be designed to prevent any possible backflow through them. Where these are installed in chrome plated lines, they shall be chrome plated to match. 3. VALVES: General Service Valves: 4" and larger, bronze trimmed, flanged; 311 and smaller, all bronze, screwed; equal to the following Crane Nos: Type Fluid Pressure Below 125 PS1G Gate ?" and smaller 428 4" and larger 1165 , Globe 3" and smaller 1 Swing Check Valves: Bronze trim, flanged, equal to Crane No. 373. 4. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: 11-2 7 8 1 n 2 4-1 Support all pipes as required by the plumbing code and as required to prevent sagging. Cast iron lines shall be supported at 5' intervals and other pipes shall be supported on 8' intervals as a minimum.. Hangers shall be clevis type with adjusters. 5. PLUmBING FIXTURES: The plate numbers on the drawings represent fixtures that will be acceptable on the job. Approved equal fixtures of Crane, Arnerican'Standard, Eljer, and Kohler will be acceptable. All exposed trim shall be chrome plated brass. This includes faucets, fittings, stops, risers, strainers, tailpieces, traps, vaste, escutcheons, flush valves, brackets, vacuum breakers, goosenecks, hole covers, bolts, nuts and etc. P.11 threaded supply fittings or outlets with tubinC, nozzles shall have back flow preventers. All fixtures shall have stop valves. Generally all wall hung fixtures shall be provided with chair carriers zo that no weight is supported from the wall. All fixtures shall be cleaned before final acceptance. Verify mounting height of each and every fixture before rough -in. Where fixtures mate with irregular walls, the joint r shall be grouted with dental plaster, G. E. Silicone or other grout as directed by the Architect. ' 6. DRAINS: Lrovide all drains as scheduled. h,ade, Josam or Zurn are acceptable. Provide a clamping device for the floor r■ membrane, where applicable. All floor drains shall have galvanized bodies, auxiliary drainage rim, adjustable strainer, and deep seal p-trap. 7. INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS: (a) Drain Lines and Sanitary waste: Grade down toward the sewer connection at a uniform slope of 1/4" per foot to serve individual fixtures or not less than 1/8" per foot to serve multiple stacks or outlets. Slope shall be greater where: possible and shall never be less than required to produce a flow velocity of 2 feet per second. I (b) Vents: Grade up to the vent thru the roof. ' Terminate not less than.10" above the roof.. (c) Water Lines: Grade to established low points ' and provide valved drains to completely drain the system. (d) Isolation Valves: The water supplies to each group of fixtures shall have an isolating valve in each line ' serving the riser. Where these valves are not accessible thru removable ceilings or otherwise, provide access doors in the ceiling or chase. ' 8. FABRICATION OF PIPE JOINTS: (a) Push -On Pipe: The inside of the bell and the i outside of the spigot shall be thoroughly cleaned to rernovc oil, grit, excess coating, and other foreign matter. Pipe that is not furnished with a depth mark shall be marked before asesmbly to assure that the spigot end is inserted to the full depth of the joint. Complete assembly instructions from the pipe manufacturer shall be followed. ' (b) No -hub Joints: Install according to manufacturer's instructions. Rubber sleeve shall be neoprene. Clamps and bolts shall be stainless steel. (e) Threaded Pipes: Ream and deburr pipe after it is cut and before it is threaded. Stand each pipe on one end and �. hammer to remove all foreign material. Full cut threads, but not more than 3 pipe threads shall remain exposed when joint is completed. Make up joints with graphite and oil or an approved graphite compound applied to male threads only. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or prevent leaks is'prohibited. (d) Copper Tubing: Cut tubing square and deburr. , Clean insides of fittings and outsides of tubing with sand cloth before assembly. Exercise care to prevent annealing of fittings and hard drawn tubing. Make all joints with solid string or wire solder, using non -corrosive paste flux of the proper type for each application. No cored solder will be permitted. Use 95-5 solder for all copper tubing, 95% tin, 5% antimony, except for drain and domestic water which may be 50% lead, 50% tin. 9. REPAIR OF LEAKS: All leaks in piping systems shall be corrected as fo11ows: (1) Repair leaks in solder joints by remaking the ,. joint; no soldering or brazing over existing joints will be 11-4 7R1n9 permitted. (2) Repair leaks in screwed joints by tightening the joint; remake the joint if the tightening fails to stop the leak. (3) Leaks in caulked joints may be stopped by additional caulking of the joint; but if that fails, remake the joint . When any defect is repaired, retest that section of the system. 10. INSULLTION: 1 Any insulation which is not applied in a workmanlike manner will be rejected and replaced. All coverings shall be smooth, flush, dressed to line and tight. 11,:astic shall be - neatly applied and tooled. The Architect reserves the right to ' reject any insulation whose appearance he deems unacceptable. Apply insulation and pipe covering after all work has been tested, found to be tight and accepted as such by the Architect. Thoroughly clean and dry all surfaces to be covered_. Factory -applied vapor -barrier jackets shall be laminated of flame resistant white kraft paper and .001 inch thick aluminum foil reinforced with glass fiber fabric between the foil and the paper. The foil and paper shall be adhered with a flame resistant latex adhesive. Insulate valves and fittings with two fiberglass inserts and preformed Johns-Nanville "Zeston" covers with taped searas . The following describes materials, thicknesses and finishes for insulation and coverings. Domestic Cold Water: Insulate with 112" thick ' Johns -Manville "Micro-Lok APT 650" molded sectional glass fiber pipe covering with all purpose jacket. Insulate valves and fittings with Johns -Manville preformed "Zeston" PVC covers over fiberglass insulation. 11. TESTING: ' Test all pipes before they are concealed in furrings or chases insulated, painted, or otherwise covered up or rendered inaccessible. Accomplish testing by sections of lines or systems, as required by conditions during construction. Clean all piping and equipment before testing. 1 ' 11-5 . Domestic Water Lines Interior: Test for 24 hours at 200 psig. There shall be no leaks whatsoever. Interior Soil, Waste and Vent Lines: Drainage and venting system piping shall be tested with water before the fixtures are installed. After the plumbing fixtures have been set and their traps filled with water, the entire drainage and venting system shall be submitted to a final test with smokd or peppermint if required. Water test shall be applied to the drainage and venting system either in its entirety or in sections. If the entire system is tested, all openings in the pipes shall be tightly closed except the highest opening and the system shall be filled with water to the point of overflow. If the system is tested in sections, each opening except the highest opening of the section under test shall be tightly plugged, and each section shall be filled with water and tested with at least a 10 foot head of water.. The water shall be kept in'the system, or in the portion under test, for at least 30 minutes before the inspection starts. The system shall then be tight at all joints. hater shall not drop more than 1" in 8 hours. Other Tests: Perform all tests required to demonstrate that each system is operating properly. 12. DISINFECTING: After cleaning, flushing and testing, the contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials necessary for the disinfection of all domestic pipe lines. Disinfect for 24 hours with 50 PPM: of chlorine. All treated water shall be thoroughly flushed from the lines until the replacement water in the lines has a chlorine residual of not more than 0.2 parts per million. 13. EQUIPMENT: This specification requires that all items of equipment be completely installed, finally connected, tested and placed in service. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to verify all requirements of the equipment and the contract and certify with the submittal of the shop drawings that all requirements have been met, including: 1. space requirements 2. Electrical requirements (voltage, phase, wires - No. and size) 3. Capacities 4. Clearance for maintenance 11-6 7Aln9 5. Quality 6. Quantity 13-1 Fans The fans indicated on the drawings shall be provided in accordance with the schedule on the drawings. Fans Shall be ANXA rated. Fans shall be furnished with backdraft dampers, 'y starters, disconnect switches, flexible connection, and bird screen. ' Exhaust fans shall be as manufactured by Cook, Penn Ventilator, Jenn Aire Products Co. or Greenheck. (a) Wall Mounted Propeller Fan Ventilator'shall be belt driven axial type. Drive frame assembly shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel angle. Mounting members shall be slotted to allow adjustment and centering, of propeller over spun venturi. Propeller construction shall be six die formed blades welded to a steel hub with gussets welded to three quarters of the blade length. The hub bore shall be a machined steel insert welded to the hub. A standard square key with two set screws and two retaining rings shall lock the propeller to the shaft. .' The ground and polished steel propeller shaft shall be mounted in sealed ball bearings. Fully machined cast iron pulleys shall be keyed to the propeller and motor shafts. All drives shall be adjustable and sized for a minimum of 165 percent of driven horsepower. r r Refer to schedule on the drawings for size and capacities. Fan shall have a backdraft damper and heavy duty guard. Fan shall be Greenheck or equal. (b) Ceiling Exhaust Fans: 9w Unitary exhaust fans shall be as scheduled on the drawings. They shall be centrifugal, direct driven fans in a sound insulated sheet metal housing. (c) Controls: Exhaust. Fan No. 1 shall be provided with a pilot ON 40 11-7 lighted "ON -OFF" switch mounted in the Chlorine Room. Exhaust Fans No. 2 & No. 3 shall be provided with one two -stage thermostat and "HAND -OFF -AUTO", switch per fan. When the "HAND -OFF -AUTO" switch is in the "HAND" position, the particular fan shall run on high speed. With both "HAND-OFF-AUTG" switches in the "AUTO" position, the two thermostats shall provide four stages of control. On a rise in temperature above the first stage set point, the first fan shall cycle on to low speed. Cr. a continued rise, the second fan shall cycle on to lot, speed. As the temperature continues to rise, each fan shall cycle on to high speed for stages 3 & 4. As the temperature falls below each set point, the thermostats shall cycle each fan in its respective reverse order. 13-2 Automat.ic Roll Filter_ The air filters shall be of the automatic renewable media. type of the proper sizes for the capacities shown on the drawings and meet the following requirements. Each section shall be complete with initial losdin of media. The master section shall include an automatic timer control, manual .advance switch, media runout switch with red warning light, media metering switch and drive, all located outside the moving -air stream. The filter shall have,not more than 500 FPN: face velocity at the total CFM shown. All metal surfaces exposed to the air stream shall be of corrosion resistant galvanized steel construction. The drive assembly shall consist of a 1/6 HP motor and separate gear reducer with built-in thermal overload protection. The drive assembly shall not be located in the unfiltered air. The drive shall be actuated by a pressure differential control which shall index the filter media the full length of the filter to provide a completely clean filter media. The control shall be interlocked with supply fan starter to prevent media feed during "off" periods. All factory wiring shall be in electrical metallic tubing or liquid tight flexible metal conduit and meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code. Each square foot of media shall be charged with an average of 20 grams of an odorless and flameproof thixotropic gel -type adhesive which will not flow while in storage or when subjected to continuous operating temperatures up to 175 degrees F. 11-8 7P.1 nP Media shall be 2" thick. The media shall have a compressibility which will allow 65 feet to be wound to a maximum of 13" in diameter on both new and used rolls. Each roll of media shall be reinforced for greater strength by steel wires firmly bonded to the air leaving side of the media and running the full 65 foot media length. Each wire shall be completely coated with resin to prevent corrosion during service. The dust holding capacity shall be not less than 175 grams (dust actually retained) of AFI test dust or 344 grams (dust reaching filter) of Cottrell -Lint mixture per squre foot of media or when tested under dynamic conditions and a face velcoity of 500 FPM. The average of efficiency shall not be less than 62 percent of the AFI weight method or 85 percen-t by the NES dust spot method. ' Each media carton shall bear a code number applying to the following series of tests that have been carried out by the ' manufacturer; AFI Performance Test, Test of Uniformity of Resistance, Media Compressibility and Strength Test, Weight Test for Quantity of Adhesive, and Weight Test for Quantity of Fiber. Laboratory proof of performance, complying with this spoecification shall be -provided in writing (if requested). Both filter unit and media shall be fabricated from basic raw materials by the same manufacturer. The filter shall be •Roll-0-Matic as manufactured by American Air Filter Company, Inc., Cambridge or Continental. ' Provide a Dwyer inclined tube manometer for each filter with isolating cocks and copper tubins, mounted on the filter. Provide wiring diagrams. ' Provide a clean roll of media in each filter at final acceptance and a spare roll of media for each filter. 1 13-3 Electric Unit Heaters: The Contractor shall furnish and install the electric unit heaters shown and scheduled on the drawings. The unit heaters shall conform to NFPA requirements and shall be UL listed. Units shall be Singer or equal. All components and controls, including thermostat, .yr transformers, relays, and switches shall be enclosed inside the double walled, heavy gauge enameled steel case.. W= 11-9 The unit heaters shall be furnished with individually adjustable extruded aluminum louvers, thermal cutout safety switch, and fan delay switch. Provide thermostatic controls with each unit. 13-3 Sewage —Ejector: Provide and. install the screenless duplex sewage ejector assembly indicated on the drawings. The assembly shall have the capacity scheduled on the drawings. Each pump shall be rated to pass three inch diameter solids. The pump shafts, impellers and couplings shall be carried by grease lubricated thrust bearings supported in hcusings with provisions made for adjustment of impellers. bearings shall be mounted well above the floor in a combination bearing housing and motor support. Thrust bearings shall be of the self -aligning fully enclosed, ball bearing type, providing for vertical adjustment of the shaft. Intermediate and pump casing bearings shall be grease or water lubricated sleeve type. Each shaft shall be high carbon steel of adequate size and turned, ground and polished. The shaft. shall be tested and proved to be true running. Each suspension pipe shall be heavy, wrought steel with cast iron flange attached. Each pump casing shall be heavy, close grained cast iron and shall be of the enclosed type with large water passages. Each impeller shall be of bronze and locked to shaft. The pumps shall be direct connected by flexible couplings to vertical 1750 RPM motors mounted on special cast iron combination motor supports and bearing housings. Motors shall be equipped with drip proof covers over top heads. Basin will be 48" diameter by 616" deep and constructed of fiberglas. On the basin provide and install a properly sized gas tight steel bolted cover provided with openings for the pump floor plate, vent, rods, alarm and an 11"x15" manhole with bolted on cover. Pumps shall be fitted with suspension plates to fit the openings in the covers. Each discharge pipe shall be provided with a gate valve and a swing check valve. Each check valve shall be installed either in a horizontal or in a 45 degree angular line. Each gate valve shall be installed in a vertical discharge line at a uniform height of 510" above the basin cover. Each motor shall be provided with an Allen Bradley Bulletin 840 Style "A" heavy duty butt contact float switch, which shall be actuated by a heavy copper float attached to a guided brass rod on which adjustable stops shall be fastened. Provide A-b Bulletin 841 providing electric pump alternation and for full duplex operation should combined capacity be required. Provide two Allen-Bradley Bulletin 712 combination automatic starters and unfused disconnect switches (one for each motor). Provide and install a high water alarm assembly consisting of a panel, diaphragm, switch and bell. In addition to sounding locally, an alarm shall be transmitted to the control cen-ter when water in the basin rises above the normal high water level. ' The control and alarm equipment shall be mounted on supports furnished and installed on the basin cover by the pump 1 manufacturer. 14. LOW PRESSURE DUCTWCRK: ' Except as otherwise specified herein, in other sections of the specifications, and/or noted on the drawings, low pressure ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheets in accordance with the recommended construction for low pressure ducts insofar as gauges of metal to be used, bracing of joints and joint construction as established in the ASHRAE GUIDE AND DATA BOCK ' "Systems and Equipment". Duct construction details shall conform to "Low ' Pressure Duct Construction Standards", 5th Edition, published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA). ' Make square elbows where shown or required, with factory -fabricated turning vanes. Make all other changes in direction with rounded elbows having a centerline radius equal to 1 1-112 times the.width of the duct in the plane of the bend. 15. FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS: ' Provide sound isolating flexible connections between connecting ducts and the inlet and outlet of each fan. These connections shall in each case be long enough to permit a ' minimum separation of 3" between the duct and the fan or unit housing with at least 1" slack in the flexible material itself. .' The material shall be of a glass cloth type equal to 30 ounce Ventglas as manufactured by Ventfabrics. It shall be fire resistant, waterproof and mildew -resistant. 1 1 16. FLASHING: Where the Contractor installs ducts or piping through the roof, he shall flash and counterflash them into the roof construction to the satiL'faction of the Architect. All such flashing shall be constructed of copper bearing galvanized steel sheets. 17. INSTRUCTIONS: During the test periods instruct the building operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of all equipment. Deliver to the owner 3 complete instruction manuals covering the maintenance and operation of the system components. Provide complete data on all equipment, including for each item a parts list, and the name and address of the vendor where replacement parts can be purchased. 11-12 17AIn-3 LECTIOLa 11LE _TRIC V+ FK 1. ELECTRICAL MATERIALS I1-1Conduits 1P Rigid Steel Conduit: Rigid, threaded, thick -wall; galvanized inside and outside or galvanized outside with a protective coating inside; UL listed and labeled according to Standard U L 6 ; conforming to ANSI Standard C80.1; Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy ' or Allied. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Steel tubina,, galvanized outside and provided with a slick corrosion resistant interior coating; UL listed and labeled according to Standard 797; conforming to ANSI Standard C80.3; Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy or Allied. Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound with hot dip galvanized steel strips (commercial Greenfield); conforming to UL Standard UL 1 and UL listed and labeled; Triangle Conduit and Cable Company, or equivalent. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound, galvanized steel strips, as for flexible metal conduit; with polyvinyl chloride cover extruded over the exterior to make conduit liquidtight; UL listed; Electri-flex type "LA" or equivalent. PVC Coated Steel Conduit: The conduit before coating shall conform to UL Standard UL6 and ANSI Standard C80.1. The conduit on after coating, shall meet NEMA Standard RN1-1974. The polyvinyl chloride coating shall be bonded to the galvanized outer surface of the conduit. The coating shall be a minimum of .020 inches (20 mil). A loose coupling shall have a PVC coating bonded to the outer surface with a PVC sleeve extending from both ends such that when the coupling and conduit are joined, they shall be no exposed metal. Conduit shall be "Rob -Rote" as manufactured by Robroy Industries or 110cal-20" as manufactured by Occidental Coating Company. Couplings and Terminations for Rigid Steel Conduit: Factory made steel threaded couplings; bushing at all boxes and ik cabinets, with locknuts inside and outside box or cabinet. Couplings and Terminations for Electrical Metallic Tubing: Join lengths of EMT with steel compression couplings. Attach EMT to boxes or cabinets with steel compression -type box connectors IN 12-1 op am 'IRlno having an insulated throat with locknuts. Where grounding bushings are required at terminations, they shall be T & B Series 3802, or equivalent. Set screw type connectors, or indent connectors will not be allowed. Couplings and Terminations for Flexible Metal Conduit: T & B 440 Series couplings at- connections between flexible and rigid conduit; T & B 3110 or 3130 Series nylon insulated throat, steel connectors at box or cabinet terminations. Couplings and Terminations for Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: T & B 5271 Series adapters at connections between flexible and rigid conduit; T & B 5331 Series nylon insulated throat, steel connectors at box or cabinet terminations. 1-3 outlet Boxes UL listed of sizes and types specified. Sheet Steel Boxes: Sheet steel not lighter than No. 14 gauge, galvanized after fabrication; Raco, Steel City or Appleton. Cast Metal Boxes: Cast iron or cast alloy with threaded hubs; Crouse -Hinds, Appleton or Pyle National. Sheet steel, galvanized inside and outside, with galvanized covers. Small Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is not over 100 cubic inches, use standard outlet boxes. Larger Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is over 100 cubic inches, use cabinets as specified for panelboard cabinets with covers of same gauge as boxes, secures with corrosion resistant bolts or screws. 1-5 Conductors (5KV) High voltage cable shall be 5 KV, single conductor, shielded, Class B stranded copper, with semi -conducting strand shield, 0.120 inch thick ethylene propylene base insulation, semi -conducting tape, copper shielding tape and 0.080 inch thick polyvinyl chloride jacket; Okonite "Okoguard-Shielded-Okoseal" or approved equivalent. Type: Soft drawn, annealed copper, UL listed, rated at 600 volts, continuous without weld, splice or joint, uniform cross-section, free from flaws, scale and other imperfections; Okonite, Triangle, Anaconda or Simplex. No. 8 and larger shall be stranded; No. 10 and smaller shall be solid. . 12-2 7A1n;) Insulation: Branch circuits shall have type TVJ, THW, or RHW insulation unless the type is specifically designated or specified. Feeder circuits shall be Type THW. Circuits Subjected to High Temperatures: Type RHH conductors for wiring in proximity for motors and devices subject to high temperature because of high ambient temperature or convection or radiant heat. Lighting Fixture Conductors: Type and size approved by the NEC for the purpose. Splices For Stranded Copper Conductors: UL approved ' solderless bolted pressure connectors or Thomas and Betts Series 54000 compression connecters. All connectors shall be of proper sizes to match conductor sizes. All compression connectors shall be applied with properly sized dies and tools. Split -bolt connectors are not acceptable. Splices For Solid Copper Conductors: UL approved solderless bolted pressure connectors; or UL approved electrical spring connectors of "Scotchlok", Ideal or T & B "Piggy" make. All connectors shall be of proper sizes to match conductor sizes. Split *— bolt connectors are not acceptable. Color Coding: Use standardized color -coding of conductors throughout. All color coding shall be continuous for the entire length of the conductors, and shall be permanent and readily distinguished after installation. In cases where the specified colors of insulated wire and cable are unavailable, such conductors shall be .� color -coded, as specified above, by means of Brady, or equivalent, slip-on colored plastic sleeves or plastic tape at all pull boxes, support boxes, outlet boxes, panelboards, and other terminal and - splicing points. Neutral conductors shall be white or natural grey. �. Grounding conductors shall be green, or green with one or more yellow stripes. Phase conductors shall be black, red and blue for phases, A, B, and C respectively in the 208 volt system. 1-7 marring Devices Acceptable Manufacturers: The catalog numbers listed herein are generally of Hubbell manufacture. Equivalent devices of Arrow -Hart, Pass and Seymour or General Electric are also acceptable. Classification: All wiring devices shall be "Specification Grade", and shall be UL listed. Colors: All devices shall have an ivory finish. Wall Switches: Hubbell No. 1201-I. in 12-3 1P A so Receptacle, 15 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding +� duplex: Hubbell No. 5262 or 5262-I (NEMA 5-15R). Outdoor receptacle with self-contained ground fault circuit interrupter: Hubbell No. GFA315. Weatherproof Devices: Provide the specified device in FS box with a gasketed cast aluminum or cast alloy coverplate having a lift cover. Coverplates: Sierra Electric Corporation "P-Line" smooth plastic to match devices where they are flush mounted. Use sheet metal coverplates to match the cast boxes where they are surface mounted. Panelboard Cabinets: Furnish and install cabinets to serve the various panelboards, of sizes as required to house the panelboards. Cabinet Construction: Rigidly constructed'of sheet steel of gauges conforming to Underwriters Laboratories Inc. requirements; corners overlapped or welded; edges turned over to receive trim. Cabinet Fronts: Cut from single sheet of not less than. No. 12 gauge cold rolled sheet steel; fastened in place by adjustable trim clamps which will allow plumbing; same size as the cabinet box if surface mounted; size to overlap the box a minimum of 3/411 on all sides if flush mounted. Provide each door with a substantial flush, cylinder tumbler lock and catch. On doors more than 48" high provide a combination three point catch and lock with T-handle. Provide each lock with two keys, with all locks keyed alike. Finish: All back boxes galvanized; all exposed metal, including fronts, primed and finished in gray lacquer. Where a circuit protective device is scheduled as a "spare", provide the device complete for operation. Where such a device is scheduled as a "space" or "space only", provide proper space and all necessary connectors for future installation of the size of device scheduled. Where a breaker or switch is scheduled to serve a "future" load, provide the device complete for operation. All circuit breakers shall be quick make, quick break, trip free, thermal magnetic, indicating type unless noted otherwise. Provide all multiple pole breakers with common trip and single operating handle; handle ties between breakers are unacceptable. Branch circuit breakers shall be fully interchangeable without disturbing adjacent units. M 12-4 7A1np Connect all circuit interrupting devices with sequence phasing. Provide each panelboard with a neatly typewritten directory of circuits mounted in a cardholder on the inside of the panelboard cabinet. Cover directory with transparent sheet plastic. The panelboard shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. and shall be listed as suitable for "Service ' Entrance Equipment." Submit shop drawings of each panelboard for review before commencing fabrication; drawings shall indicate number, size, 1 interrupting rating and type of circuit protective devices; dimensions, gauges and type of construction of cabinets, size and material of main bus and necessary to determine lugs, and any compliance with other pertinent information the drawings and specifications. ' Provide each panelboard with a factory engraved nameplate which shall identify the panelboard name. ' Panelboards for 208 volt Service: General Electric Type NLRB, with type THQb circuit breakers. 1-10 DjLeo _t Swi t hes Unless otherwise noted or required, all disconnect switches shall be UL listed and shall meet NEMA Standard KS1-1969 for Type HD heavy duty switches. Switches shall be unfused unless noted otherwise; quick make, quick break; in NEMA 3R enclosures if exposed to the weather; elsewhere in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless ' special enclosures are required. All motor circuit switches shall be horsepower rated. Switches shall be of General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse, Federal or ITE manufacture, equivalent to General Electric Type TH quick make, quick break switches. ' Where disconnect switches are used to disconnect starters, provide auxiliary poles in switches as required to disconnect all auxiliary control circuits in.starters. 1-11 Lighting Fixtures Provide and install a lighting fixture on each and every lighting outlet shown. Furnish fixtures in accordance with the designations on the drawings and as specified herein. Should any designations be omitted on the drawings, furnish fixtures of the same type as used in rooms of similar usage. All features specified or • scheduled for fixtures shall be provided, even if the catalog number given in the specifications or schedule lacks the required numerals, prefixes or suffixes corresponding to the features called for. 12-5 ,4 All lighting fixtures shall bear the label of ' Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. Furnish scale drawings, catalog data, samples of finish, distribution curves, and any other data ' required by the Architect for every type fixture. Ballasts: Provide all fluorescent fixtures with high power factor, UL and ETL labeled ballasts; CBM certified where such ratings are available; Class P with automatic reset features; "A" sound rating in those types where available; General Electric, Advance or Jefferson. �! Lamps: Fully equip each fixture with a full set of new lamps at the completion and acceptance of the work; lamps shall be of the best grade, and of the sizes and types specified; General Electric, Westinghouse or Sylvania. Incandescent lamps shall be inside frosted unless 0 specified or recommended otherwise by the fixture manufacturer. Fluorescent lamps shall be standard cool white. 2. INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL MATERIALS 2.1 Excavatin Perform all excavaton work required in connection with A the installation of the work under this Division. After the electrical work has been installed, tested and approved, backfill all excavations with suitable material under the direction of the �. Architect. Include the cutting of all sidewalks, streets and other pavement and repairing the openings in them to return to the surface to appoximately its original condition. Perform all excavations of every description of whatever substances encountered and to the depths required for installation of the work under this Division. During excavation, stack material suitable for backfilling in an orderly manner a sufficient distance from the banks I� of the trenches to prevent slides or cave-ins. Remove all excavated material not required or suitable for backfill, or waste as directed. Control grading to prevent surface water from flowing into excavations and remove any water accumulating therein by pumping. Use open cut grading and make trenches of the necessary width for proper installation of the lines with banks as nearly �. vertical as possible. Grade the bottom of trenches accurately to provide �. uniform bearing and support for conduit or duct. on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length. ru 12-6 rr 7Ain� Except at locations where excavation of rock from the bottoms of trenches is required, take care not to excavate below the depths required. Where rock excavation is required, remove the rock to a minimum overdepth of 4 inches below the trench depths specified. Backfill the overdepth rock excavation and all excess trench excavation to the proper level with 3/4 inch crushed rock or the equivalent in coarse gravel prior to the installation of conduit or ducts. Whenever wet or otherwise unstable soil that is incapable of properly supporting conduits or ducts is encountered in the trench bottom, remove such soil to a depth required and backfill the trench to trench bottom grade with 3/4 inch crushed rock or coarse gravel or other suitable material. 2-2 Backe_1ing Carefully backfill trenches with earth, sandy clay, sand and gravel, soft shale or other approved material free from large clods of earth or stone, deposited in thoroughly and carefully rammed 6-inch layers. Do not use blasted rock, broken concrete or pavement, - or large boulders as backfill material. Settling the backfill with water will be permissible and will be requirement when so directed. Re -open any trenches improperly filled or where settlement occurs to the depth required for proper compaction, then refill, mound over and smooth off. im 2-3 Installa_.ion of Under -ground Steel Condsit All steel conduit in earth shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit. 4;rap such conduit with 311 Company 0.020 inch thick No. 51 "scotchrap" vinyl plastic tape, half lapped to give a double thickness wrap. Remove all oil, grease and dirt from conduit with a suitable solvent, and clean and dry conduit before wrapping. If conduit is pre -wrapped in the shop and then cut and joined on the job, wrap all joints on the job, overlapping pipe wrapping 3" on both sides of joints. 2-4 Installati n of_Building Raceways All wiring of every description shall be run in conduit or electrical metallic tubing unless noted or specified otherwise. Conduits may be run exposed unless otherwise noted. All exposed runs shall be installed parallel to the surface of the building in a neat and orderly manner. Types: All conduits buried in the earth or in concrete or installed in wet or damp locations shall be rigid galvanized steel conduits. Above grade interior conduits larger than 111 in size shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit. Rigid galvanized steel conduits or electrical metallic tubing in sizes not exceeding 111 shall be employed elsewhere. 12-7 - 78102 Sizes: Size and install raceways so that conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive strain. Make field bends with approved bending devices. Do not install bends or'offsets in which pipe is crushed, deformed or otherwise injured. Connections: Use lengths of flexible metal conduit, not less than 12" long at final connections to all motors, generators, controls and other devices subject to movement because of vibration or mechanical adjustment. In damp or wet locations, and where installed outdoors, use liquidtight flexible metal conduit. Damp or iNet Locations: In damp or wet loeatio,ns make every effort to avoid installing raceways in a manner whichwill create moisture traps. Where they must be so installed, seal both ends of raceways with an approved sealing compound to prevent "breathing" and moisture condensation within the raceways. Joining Rigid Conduits: Join with threaded couplings. Ream out all conduit ends after threading. Secure rigid conduits at panel boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, support boxes, or sheet metal outlet boxes by galvanized locknuts, inside and outside, with insulating bushing inside. Unthreaded set screw type couplings or connectors are not acceptable in rigid conduit systems. No running threads shall be used anywhere in conduit systems. Joining EP;T: Join electrical metallic tubing with raintight steel compression couplings. Indenter or set screw type couplings are unacceptable. At EM terminations provide raintight insulated throat, steel box connectors and locknuts. Protection of Raceways: Seal ends of all raceways with blank discs ("pennies"), push pennies or other approved closers during construction. Do not pull any conductors into raceways until all plastering in the vicinity is completed. Swab out all raceways before pulling in conductors. Penetrations: Wherever raceways pass through floors, walls parititions, etc., carefully fill any space between the outside of the raceway and the building material to prevent passage of air, water, smoke and fumes. Filling material shall be fire resistive and, in general, similar to the basic building materials through which the raceway passes. Support spacing: Use minimum spacing as directed by National Electrical Code, but space hangers more closely where required by conditions. 1. Individual Conduits: Support conduits running vertically or horizontally with galvanized malleble iron one hole clamps. Carry individually supported horizontal conduits 1-1/4" and larger on Kindorf No. 150 or Steel City No. C-14.9 hangers. Use no perforated I. - I 12-5 7 A 9 n 0 strap iron as hanger material. Do not use any wire to support conduits or to attach conduits to supporting members. Multiple Conduits: Where multiple raceways are run horizontally at the same elevations, they may be supported on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut angle iron or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Size trapeze members the number size and loaded weight of including the suspension the conduits they are to rods for support. Space them as required for the smallest conduit supported. Usage: Provide at each outlet or device of whatever character a metal outlet box in which conduits shall terminate. boxes recessed in construction: Sheet steel boxes. For Lighting Fixture Outlets: 4" octagonal by 1-112" minimum depth with 3/8" fixture stud for incandescent lights which. are surface mounted, wall mounted or suspended. For Wall Switches, Receptacles and Communications Use: Use 411x4" size with proper square cornered tide wall cover, plaster cover, or finishing plate, except where construction will not permit or the device requires a larger box. Boxes for Exposed Work: Cast metal boxes. boxes for Outdoors: Cast metal boxes with gasketed covers. 2-7 Instal lation_ot_Pul _��nd Junction Boxes Sizing: Size all pull and junction boxes in accordance with NEC, using larger sizes than required by code where job conditions so indicate. Mounting: Fasten all boxes securely to the building construction, independent of conduit systems. On concealed conduit systems where boxes are not otherwise accessible, set box covers flush Iwith finished surfaces for access. 2-8 Installation of 5 Ky Conductors Pulling Compounds: Use UL listed cable pulling compounds of non -conducting type when pulling cables into conduits. Terminations: Make all terminations in wiring in strict accordance with instructions of the manufacturer of the materials used. All materials shall be properly selected for conductor size, type of insulation and voltage rating. Use 3M Company "Scotchcast" No. 83-B3 or 83-B4 kits, or equivalent method. Submit method of termination for review. 12-9 Ground cable shielding at all cable terminations. I Arc Proofing: Individually arc -proof and fireproof all exposed cable inside equipment enclosures with one half -lapped layer of 3M Company No. 7700 Arc and Fire Proofing Tape, held in place with 3M Company "Scotch" No. 27 Gl-ass Cloth Tape, spirally wrapped around ' the No. 7700 tape. Apply per manufacturer's directions. Testing High Voltage Cable: All cable installed under this Contract shall be proof -tested to determine the adequacy of ' insulation. 2-9 Installation of —Build i, Wire (600 volts and__inder_1 Wire Pulling: Provide suitable installation equipment for pulling conductors into raceways or conduits. Use ropes of polyethylene, nylon or other suitable material to pull in conductors. Attach pulling lines to conductors by means of woven basket grips or by pulling eyes attached directly to conductors. All conductors to be installed in a single conduit shall be pulled in together. Pull no conductors into conduits until all work of a nature which may cause injury to conductors is completed. Use an Underwriters'"listed cable pulling compound where necessary. Cable Lubricants: All cable lubricants shall be UL listed, and shall be certified by their manufacturer to be non -injurious to the insulation on which they are used. Pulling Devices in Empty Raceways: Provide in every empty raceway, not containing conductors to be installed by this Contractor, a suitable pull line to facilitate future installation of wiring. Lines shall be free from splices and shall have ample exposed length at each end. ldentify each end of each line with, a linen tag bearing complete information as to the purpose of the raceway and the location of its other end. All lines shall' be nylon or polyethylene cord with a tensile strength not less than 200 pounds. Feeders: Run all feeders their entire length in continuous pieces without joints or splices, insofar as practicable. Make joints in branch circuits only where circuits divide as shown on drawings. Such joints shall consist of one through circuit to which shall be spliced the tap circuit. Branch Circuits: Not more than one power or lighting circuit shall be installed in a single conduit, except that one 3-wire circuit or one 4-wire circuit consisting of 2 different phase wires and a common neutral or 3 different phase wires and a common neutral may be installed in a single conduit. Sizes: No wire shall be smaller than No. 12 except for signal or control circuits, and except for individual lighting fixture taps as permitted by the National Electrical Code. 12-10 Receptacle Branch Circuits: No. 12 conductors unless noted or scheduled otherwise. m Joints and Splices: Make joints and splices only where necessary and only at outlet boxes and pull boxes. All joints shall be mechanically and electrically secure. After a joint or splice is complete, insulate it with Ok•onite rubber tape, and Manson fricton tape to make the insulation of the joint or splice equal to that of the conductor. T Conductor splices in wet locations shall be made in accordance with the conductor manufacturer's recommendations. Identifying Tags: Non-ferrous; stamped to clearly identify each circuit. Securely fasten tags to all cables, feeders and power circuits in pull boxes, lighting panelboards, etc. Bundling Conductors: Bundle all conductors in panelboards, cabinets and the like, using marlin twine lacing or nylon straps made for the purpose. Bundle conductors larger than. No. 10 in individual circuits. Bundle smaller conductors in larger groups. 2-11 Servici_IQnnections Low Voltage Service: Lubbock Power and Light will provide and install a pad -mounted transformer assembly where shown complete with primary cable thereto and all transformer connections. Furnish and install service entrance conductors in conduit from the building panel underground to the transformer assembly. Leave sufficient slack in the conductors at the transformer to facilitate connections by the Power Company. High Voltage Service: Lubbock Power and Light will furnish and install a total of two transformer banks to provide the 4160 volt service necessary to power the pumps. Also, provisions shall be made for a future bank. Lubbock Power and Light will furnish all primary cable thereto and make all connections to the . transformers. r:Q As a part of the work under this section, provide and install all secondary conductors and conduit from these transformers to a pad -mounted 5 KV bus unit and therefrom to the pump motor ' controllers, and completely connect for operation. 2-12 Tad-Mounted_bus Unit Furnish and install a pad -mounted bus unit for the purpose of terminating the 4160 volt conductors from the high voltage transformers and therefrom to the individual pump controllers. ' The unit enclosure shall be constructed from 11 gauge steel with all structural joints welded. It shall be suitable for installation outdoors with adequate ventilation to keep the interior 12-11 7A10P dry. All openings shall have baffles which make the unit tamperproof. The doors shall have hinges and padlock hasps to prevent unauthorized entry. Provide a padlock. High voltage warning sign shall be affixed to the door. The enclosure shall contain a 600 ampere, three phase, 5 KV copper bus, drilled for the termination of the conductors connected thereto and for the future conductors from the future transformer bank and the future pump controllers. The unit shall be similar to S & C Pad -mounted gear Model PMS-1, except with bus only and without primary switches or fuses. 2-13 Service and Equipment Ground . Provide adequate and permanent service neutral and equipment grounding in accordance with the National Electrical Code, and subject to the following additional requirements. Connect the service ground and equipment ground to a common point within the metallic enclosure containing the main service disconnecting means. From the common point of connection of the service ground and equipment ground, run in conduit a combined service and equipment grounding conductor without joint or splice to the main water service pipe and connect it thereto with an approved bolted pressure clamp. Clean all contact surfaces thoroughly before connection, to assure good metal to metal contact. Supplement the water pipe ground with an additional electrode which shall be 10' long by 3/4 inch diameter copperclad steel ground rod. Attach the electrode to the water pipe and to the service/equipment grounding conductor. Size grounding conductors in accordance with National Electrical Code Tables 250-94 and 250-95. Assure the electrical continuity of all metallic raceway Systems, pulling up all conduits and/or loeknuts wrench tight. Where expansion joints or telescoping joints occur, provide bonding jumpers. Where flexible metallic conduit is employed, provide a green -insulated grounding jumper installed in the flexible conduit. Provide grounding bushings on all raeways terminating within motor controllers, panelboards, cabinets, and all other enclosures. Provide grounding conductors from such bushings to the frame of the enclosure and to the ground bus or equipment grounding strap. Size grounding conductors in accordance with NEC Table 250-95. Ground the frames of the pumps with copperclad steel ground rods at the pump. 2-1.4 Equipment Wiring Connect complete for operation all items furnished by the Owner or under other Divisions of the specifications. Outlets of various types have been indicated at equipment locations, but no 12-12 78102 indications exact location or scope of the work are shown on the _of drawings. Refer to the Owner and to the various Contractors for the work under the other Divisions for the scope of connections to equipment furnished by them and for the exact locations of all items. Secure all rough -in drawings required for proper installation of the electrical work, in ample time to permit preparation of the drawings and thus avoid delays on the'job. 2-15 Work at Pump Station No.'i Two existing 600 HP pumps and their controllers will be moved to the new site from Pump Station No. 3. As a part of the work under this Section, disconnect all electrical connections from these ' pumps and controllers at Pump Station No. 3, transport the reused electrical equipment to the new site and install where shown on the drawings. ' The contractor's attention is called to the fact that one remaining controller at Pump Station No. 3 will require an auxiliary section to be installed to enable the existing service to be reconnected. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to visit Pump Station No., 3, determine the existing conditions and the work required in disconnecting and moving the equipment to the new location. The equipment remaining at Pump Station No. 3.shall remain ' fully operational after the designated equipment has been removed. All existing controls, including supervised control ' circuit,' shall remain in operation at Pump Station No. 3. 12-13 MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION 1. GENERAL This section of the specifications governs, in general, materials, accessories, and construction of miscellaneous items required for the construction of the reservoir and pump station. Miscellaneous items re- quired for architectural, mechanical, and electrical work are covered in other sections of these specifications. 2. SHOP DRAWINGS ' Shop drawings shall be prepared for all work herein specified. Drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval in four (4) copies before fabrication has commenced. 3. STEEL SHAPES ' Items involving steel shapes shall be of steel conforming to ASTM Designation A 36. All necessary provisions for anchoring or attaching ' the steel shapes to adjoining construction shall be as detailed on the or as shown on approved shop drawings. plans 4. WEIR PLATE The weir plate shall be made from A 36 steel plate and shall be hot -dip galvanized. The weir plate shall be fabricated as shown on the drawings by sawing or shearing and all rough edges shall be ground smooth. All anchor bolts shall be galvanized. 5. HOT -DIP GALVANIZING All metal parts specified herein or shown on the drawings to be galvanized shall be hot -dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM Designa- tion A 123. However, the Engineer reserves the right to make all tests and visual inspections of galvanized items on representative samples of such items after delivery to the site of the work. 6. GRATING All grating shall be Dravo Type 19W4 or approved equal. Unless ' otherwise shown on the drawings, the grating shall have 1" x 3/16" bearing bars with one'inch clear between bars and 1/4" twisted square cross bars spaced at four inch centers. fit neatly around all required openings ports shall be installed in a neat and and grating support members installed i dip galvanized. 7. LADDERS All ladders shall be the drawings. All ladders be hot -dip galvanized after to the structures as shown approved by the Engineer. 8. CONCRETE ANCHORS The grating shall be fabricated to ' and all grating and grating sup - workmanlike manner. All grating n exterior locations shall be hot- ' fabricated in accordance with the details on except where installed inside buildings, shall ' fabrication. Ladders shall be securely attached on the drawings or by other similar methods All anchor bolts shall be hot -dip galvanized. The weir plates, ladders and other metal items that are to be attached to concrete floors or walls may be mounted using anchor bolts as shown on the drawings or they may be mounted using concrete bolt anchors. Where concrete bolt anchors are used, they shall be as manufacutred by Wej-It Expansion Products, Incorporated, or approved equal. The anchors and bolts shall be of stainless steel. The sizes and embedment depths of the anchors shall be as determined by the Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish certified data concerning the tensile strength and the shear strength of concrete anchors proposed for use with the ladders. 9. SUMP PUMPS A sump pump will be furnished installed in the chlorination manhole. The sump -pump will have a motor designed to operate on a 115V, 60C, 3 ph power source, and shall be not less than 1/3 horsepower. The pump shall have cast, two blade, dynamically balanced impeller. The pump shall be automatically operated by a liquid level sensor. Turn-off depth shall be three inches and turn -on depth shall be adjustable over a depth range of not more than nine inches to not less than two feet. The pump shall be suitable for operation in an eighteen inch diameter by two foot deep sump. The sump pump shall be Enpo Cornell Series 1650, or approved equal. 13-2 0 SOILS INVESTIGATION RESERVOIR & PUMP STATION NO. 10 AT 82nd STREET & MEMPHIS AVENUE LUBBOCK, TEXAS I I ZZ- / nc /TiBrra < 1 7erraTeoNng Inc. 1212 18th Street Telephone: 806744-4920 Lubbock, Texas 79401 June 15, 1979 Mr. James R. Glazer Parkhill, Smith & Cooper Consulting Engineers 4010 Avenue R. Lubbock, Texas 79412 Ref: Soil Investigation, Reservoir & Pump Station No. 10, at 82nd Street & Memphis Avenue, Lubbock, Texas Dear Mr. Glazer: Enclosed is the Report No. str/164 from Dr. C.V.G. Vallabhan, P.E., our Geotechnical Consulting Engineer on the Soil Investigation, Reservoir & Pump Station No. 10, at 82nd Street & Memphis Avenue, Lubbock, Texas. Presented in this report are our analysis and recommendation on the bearing capacities and foundation designs. We appreciate you on this project. If any additional assistance CVS/iag the opportunity to be of service to we may answer any questions or be of please call us. Very truly yours, TERRA TESTING INC. C.V. Surendran, P.E. 0 ■ ■ SOIL INVESTIGATION RESERVOIR & PUYIP STATION NO. 10 AT 82nd STREET & D=v1PHIS AVENUE LUBBOCK, TEXAS Prepared for Mr. James R. Glazer Parkhill, Smith & Cooper Inc. Consulting Engineers Lubbock, Texas TERRA TESTING INC. 1212 18th Street Lubbock, Texas June 15, 1979 TEF,RA- ZTESTrgG LNC. str/164 a SOILS INVESTIGATION RESERVOIR & PUMP STATION NO. 10 ' AT 82nd STREET & MEMPHIS AVENUE ` LUBBOCK, TEXAS INTRODUCTION ' This report contains the results of the soils the for the investigation recently made at site Reservoir & Pump Station No. 10, at 82nd Street & Memphis Avenue, Lubbock, Texas. The investigation was conducted according to the instructions from Mr. James R. Glazer, Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Consulting Engineers, Lubbock, Texas. The investigation con- sisted of sub -surface exploration, laboratory testing and engineering analysis leading to recommendations for foundation design for the proposed construction. EXPLORATION, SAMPLING AND FIELD TESTING The area of the site under investigation was relatively flat with a slight uniform slope down to- ward West. Three test holes were made, each to a depth of 30 feet, as shown in the Boring Location Plan (Figure No. 1). The drilling was made using a Mobile B-40 H Hollow Auger Drilling Machine with compressed air in order to secure reliable data on the natural moisture content of the soil and on ground water, if any. TERRA TE S=CX LV C. 1 r j 10, 0001, 000 Gall ons Reservoir It Hole No. 3 Test Hole `2 El'�1Xlazt Hole #1! : Q) Pump Station � U J Center Line - 82nd Street FIGURE NO. 1 BORING LOCATION PLAN RESERVOIR & PUMP STATION NO. 10 LUBBOCK, TEXAS TErMA TE. STLNG LYC. — In all holes standard penetration tests were made at depth of 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, and 30 feet respectively, and in hole #1, penetration at 22 feet also was made. The number of blows per foot of penetration of the split spoon sampler (in 6 inch increments) is shown in the boring logs and in Figure No. 2. The change in soil strata as can be observed during drilling operations is carefully determined and shown in the boring logs. The soil samples ob- tained from the test holes were almost comparable to each other for practical foundation consideration. All soil samples were kept in moisture content, identified to hole number and depth of the hole, and transported to the laboratory for additonal tests and evaluation. No water table was observed in any of the holes. LABORATORY TESTING All samples were visually classified and their in -situ -moisture contents were determined. Soil samples which indicated maximum plasticity character- istics were selected for Atterberg limit tests. Also, the percentages by weight passing sieve 7-r"200 were determined for selected samples. The results are presented in the boring logs. All samples are classified according to the Unified Soil Classification system. DESCRIPTION OF THE SOIL °The top soil is a brown silty sand which is nonplastic and the thickness of this soil strata is only 12 feet approximately. Below this, the soil is a reddish brown sand mixed with silt, clay and caliche in varied proportions, and the pre- dominant fraction is sand in most instances. TERMk TESTUgG LTC. No Text The plasticity index varies from 13 to 21,.and higher plasticity index is due to larger caliche content. The soil is heavily overconsolidated due to dessication. The results of the standard penetration tests at deeper levels indicates good bearing resistances of the natural soil at that level. However, the tests in hole #3, indicated a comparitively poor strength for the soil from top to 15 feet deep below ground level. Since this area is going to be excavated, I do not see any problem due to this reduced strength of the soil. BEARING CAPACITY OF THE SOIL a) RESERVOIR (Holes #2 and #3) Since the reservoir is going to be underground the bearing values are given for deeper levels only. The allowable bearing values for spot and or continuous footings at various depths are given as follows: Depth in Allowable Bearing Feet Value in PSF 15' 5060 20, ?300 251 1i,000 The above recommended values have a factor of safety of three against ultimate bearing. Since the underground water reservoir will eventually allow water to seep through the slabs, and increase the moisture content in the soil below, it may be good to presoak the soil below the slab before placing the concrete -slab. Reinforcements in the slab have to be adequate to prevent any possible swelling of this overconsolidated clayey sand. TEIZIU TESi'I1i TG INC. L The prewetting concept will definitely reduce the swelling pressures. For the design of the retaining walls on the sides, the following recommendations are made: 1) The first soil pressure to be considered is due to the weight of the soil backfill. The backfill should be a soil of low plasticity (plasticity index not more than 12) and com- pacted to a density between 90 and 95% of the standard compaction dry density ( ASTM D-698). If the area surrounding the reservoir has to be used for pavements or other uses, the ba.ckfill has to be compacted in 8 inch layers according to specifications. The recommended lateral soil pressure at a depth h feet below the ground is 40 h pounds per sq. foot. This pressure varies linearly from the top to the bottom of the side walls. 2) The side walls are to be designed for a constant lateral pressure of, which is 1/3 the average vertical surcharge pressure on the soil surrounding the reservoir. This surcharge load has to es- timated based on usage of the area from auto- mobiles and other service vehicles if any. Possi- bilities of future construction of adjacent struc- tures has to be considered in assessing this vertical surcharge pressure. b) PUMP STATION (Hole #1) The allowable bearing capacity of the soil for spot and continuous footings at a depth of 22'is 3000 psf with a factor of safety of three. The bearing can be increased to 4000 psf at 5 feet depth. Since the soil has low plasticity index near the surface, the danger from swelling or shrinking of the soil is very minimal. TERRA TESlprI'G D' C. The above recommendations are based on soil samples from the three holes as directed. If, in any case, during excavation any weak spot or possible fill is located, please call us. G. V. G. VALLASH;a =99 C On im• Yo s sincerely, v C.V.G. Vallabhan, Ph.D., P.E. Geotechnical Consulting Enginee TERRA. TESTLNG LNC. BORING LOG — BOLE NO. 1 DATE WILLED May 29, 1979 PROJECT Reservoir & -Pump Station NorOCIPON Lubbock, Texas BORING METHOD Compressed Air DEPTII OF tIOLE 30 Feet 3 Inches DIA.OF HOLE SURFACE ELEV. Unknown CLIENT Parkhill, Smith &, Cooper, Consulting Engineers, Lubbock, Tex X DESCRIPTION a I ATTERBERG o NO. OF a OF 0 i LIMITS (A UNCONFINED BLOWS/FT. REMARKS SOIL Z I \ �;oMr�rtEsslOra LL �L PI — 1ST 2NO 3RD. 0 6 10 6, 6 Brown silty sand SM 31 13 11 11 2.5 Reddish brown silty sand SM 9.6 18 117.2 with caliche soil ' Reddish brown silty sand SM 10.' 11 13 with caliche soil 10' Reddish brown sandy clay CL 14J 34 18 16 '0.9 10 20 with caliche soil Reddish brown silty sand SM 14.c �7.0 12 20 with caliche soil —2C Reddish brown sandy clay CL 9.0 34 18 16 25, For 5 inches with caliche soil penetration 2 , Reddish brown silty sand SM 7.9 25 For 4 inches - with caliche soil Tor-v;i Tes Li nj, Inc. BORING LOG - HOLE NO 1 C t'd DATE DRILLED Nay 29, 1979 BORING METHOD Compressed Air SURFACE ELEV . Unknown on PROJECT Reservoir & Pump Station NeLOATION Lubbock, Texas DEPTIt OF BOLE 30 Feet DtA.OF HOLE 3 Inches CLIENT Parkhill mi-tY-& Cooner,_Consulting Engineers, Lubbock, Te; DESCRIPTION < a LiTTERBERa o NO. OF n. z OF LIMITS UNCONFINED ®L01�"dS/FT. REMARKS o SOIL cn-� z � I e cornmEsslorl LL PL PI I si 2N0 MO, _.25 Reddish Brown clayey sand SC 7.9 25 For 4 inches with caliche soil penetration -30' Reddish Brown clayey sand SC 4.0 25 ## ##For 3 inches caliche soil penetration I Tf,r.r•,i 'rontiIrg Inc. • BORING LOG — HOLE NO. 2 DATE DRILLEDMc3.y_29, 1979 PROJECT Reservoir & Pump Station No,DAfloN Lubbock, Texas BORING METHODCompressed Air DEPTH OF IIOLE __30 Feet DIA.OF HOSE— 3 Inches _ SURFACE ELEV, Unknown CLIENT Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Consulting Engineers, u ock, Tex X_ DESCRIPTION ATTERBERG O NO. OF OF 0 O; a a �- LIMITS O N UNCONFINED BLOWS/FT. REMARKS z 0 -' SOIL (n Z) �_ (n Q O I a COMPRESSION LL PL PI I ST 2I4D 3RD 6 6' 6" Brown Silty Sand with Sm Caliche soil LA Reddish Brown sandy clay CL 10.2 3D 16 17 54.f 11 lr with caliche soil 10' Reddish Brown sandy clay CL 14.7 12 1 Nvith caliche soil _1_-L Reddish brown clayey sandf SC 15.1 4" 22 21 47. 11 17 25 with caliche soil —2 Reddish brown clayey sand SC 14.5 12 19 with caliche soil Reddish brown clayey sand SC 14,1 40o 25 For 2inch -25' with caliche soil penetration T(It—r<i T (,- Lin{r Inc . BORING LOG - HOLE NO. 2 Cont'd DATE DRILLED May 29, 1979 PROJECT Reservoir & Pump Station NotoAYIONLubbock, Texas BORING METHOD Compressed Air DEPTri OF ROLE 30 Feet WA. OF HOLE 3 Inches SURFACE ELEV Unknown CLrENTParkhill, Smith & Coo -per, Consulting Engineers, Lubbock, Tex. Imo- DESCRIPTION Q ATTER®ERG o NO. OF FL �, z OF U a E � LIMITS N uNcorrFiNEo BLOWS/FT. REMARKS cm) — SOIL � � d G` z ! � t;ommESSION LL PL P I ► st. Z " 3RD s" 25 s s" 25' Reddish Brown clayey sand SC 14.t ' 4o. f For zinch with caliche soil penetration 302 Reddish Brown clayey sand SC 25" "For no with caliche soil penetration Terra Tenting If -le. BORING LOG - HOLE NO. DATE DRILLED May 29, 1979 PROJECT Reservoir & Pump Station NoLdclpoN Lubbock, Texas BORING METHOD (;nm.:Qra-,gar? Air DEPTII OF HOLE ^30-_FPat DIA.OF HOLE - - - 3 TnehPs SURFACE ELEV. Unknown CLIENT Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Consulting Engineers, Lubbock, Tex. DESCRIPTION <ct UTTER®ERG o NO. OF a z OF U � I-- L LIMITS (V UNCONFINED BLOWS/FTLLI REMARKS " SOIL i- z o f o COMfRES510N LL PL PI I S7 2N0 3R0 Uniform brown sand SP 4 9 12 Reddish Brown silty sand SC 9.0 3 with caliche soil 1 Reddish Brown silty sand. SC LO.9 27 13 14 48. 0 10 12 with caliche soil 1�2 Reddish Brown silty sand SC Ll.8 6 8 12 with caliche soil 28.0 15 21 20' Reddish Brown silty sand SC 12.1 36 26 10 - Reddish Brown silty sand SC '_ 2 with caliche soil 25 # For 2 Inch Tot•r'l ImI P" BORING LOG - HOLE No. 3 Cont'd PATE DRILLED - MaV 90 197q PROJECT?�eservoir &Pump Station No Lubbock, Texas •LQMIoro BORING METHOD_ Ass DEPTF4 OF MOLE Q�'ggt DiA.OF HOLE... 3 Inches _ SURFACE ELEV. Unknown CLIENTParkhill, Smith & Cooper, Consulting Engineers, Lubbock, Tex' DESCRIPTION ( 6� ATTERDERG o z OF V 1-LINTS UricotinUED SOIL � o I corer firsslorr LL PL PI 25` _ Reddish brovn clayey sans SC with caliche soil 30' Reddish Brown clayey sans SC . with caliche soil NO. OF GLOMS/FT ST 2ND 3Rp G� 6 1 6 -i 25 25 Tetra Tes Ut,', Inc.